ET 200U Distributed I/O Station System Overview 1 Technical Description 2 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration 3 ET 200U(DP Siemens): Address Assignment, Starting Up, Diagnosing Faults ET 200U(DP Standard): Address Assignment, Starting Up, Diagnosing Faults ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Cap. of the IM 318-C Manual Edition 03 EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4 5 6 Analog Value Processing 7 Module Spectrum 8 Function Modules 9 Safety-Related Guidelines A Glossary B SIMATIC and SINEC are registered trade marks of Siemens AG. Safety-related Guidelines ! ! ! This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and graded according to severity by the following texts: Danger indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning indicates that death, severe personal injury, or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Note contains important information about the product, its operation or a part of the document to which special attention is draw. Qualified Personnel A device/system may only be commissioned or operated by qualified personnel. Qualified personnel as referred to in safety guidelines in this document are persons authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground, and tag circuits, equipment and systems in accordance with established safety practice. For a detailed description of the safety-related guidelines, please refer to the Appendix. Proper Usage Please observe the following: ! Warning The equipment/system or the system components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in combination with the equipment, components, and devices of other manufacturers as far as this is recommended or permitted by Siemens. The product will function correctly and safely only it it is transported, stored, set up, and installed as intended, and operated and maintained with care. Exclusion of Liability Copyright We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. Copyright Siemens AG 1993 All Rights Reserved Technical data subject to change. The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. Preface The ET 200U distributed I/O station belongs to the ET 200 distributed I/O system with the SINEC L2-DP field bus. Available Bus Protocols The distributed I/O station operates with the DP Siemens, DP Standard and FMS protocols. The DP Siemens bus protocol has been developed by Siemens especially for the ET 200 distributed I/O system. The DP standard bus protocol, a further development of DP Siemens, complies with the PROFIBUS-DP draft standard (DIN 19245, Part 3), the PROFIBUS solution for high-speed field applications. FMS is the PROFIBUS bus protocol described in DIN 19245, Part 2. Prerequisites This manual is based on the "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual. Scope of this Manual The manual is structured as follows: What is ET 200U? Chapter 1 Which control and display elements does the ET 200U have? Chapter 2 How is the ET 200U installed? Chapter 3 How is the ET 200U (DP Siemens) started up with COM ET 200? Chapter 4 How is the ET 200U (DP Standard) started up with COM ET 200? Chapter 5 ET 200U (DP Standard/FMS): How is an IM 318-C operated? Chapter 6 Analog value processing Chapter 7 Technical specifications + list of I/O modules Chapters 8 + 9 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b iii Preface Contents of this Manual This manual describes the IM 318-B slave interface module with order numbers: 6ES5 318-8MB11 6ES5 318-8MB12 6ES5 318-8MC11 "318-8MB11" An interface for SINEC L2-DP with DP Siemens protocol is integrated in the "318-8MB11". Note The "318-8MB11" module is operated in conjunction with COM ET 200 (from version 1.0) and IM 308-B (from revision level 1) "318-8MB12" The functionality of the "318-8MB11" module is a subset of the functions of the "318-8MB12". Additionally, the "318-8MB12" operates in accordance with the PROFIBUS-DP (DIN 19245/Part 3) draft standard, in the following referred to as DP Standard. The draft standard will be explained in detail in Section 1.3. Note A "318-8MB12" module can be operated as DP Standard slave (ET 200U(DP Standard) in conjunction with COM ET 200 (from version 4.0) and IM 308-B from revision level 5 (printed on module) or software version 4.0 (indicated in COM ET 200). iv ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Preface "318-8MC11" An interface for SINEC L2-DP (DP Standard) and SINEC L2-FMS is integrated in the "318-8MC11". The "318-8MC11" can be addressed via the same bus both with the DP Standard and FMS protocols. Note An "318-8MC11" can be operated as DP Standard slave in conjunction with COM ET 200 (from version 4.0) and IM 308-B from revision level 5 (printed on module) or from software version 4.0 (indicated in COM ET 200). A "318-8MC11" module can be operated as an FMS slave on any bus type conforming to the PROFIBUS DIN 19245 standard, Parts 1 and 2. If the DP and FMS protocols are used on the bus at the same time, a maximum of two DP masters, one FMS master (additional active station) and one programmer are permitted. Notes for Conversion from "8MB11" to "8MB12" Table 1-1 In the following table, the differences between the 6ES5 318-8MB12 and the 6ES5 318-8MB11 modules are listed. Differences between the IM 318-B slave interface modules Difference Described in ... Pulling and plugging-in of I/O modules under load voltage is only permitted under defined conditions. Chapter 3 Depending on whether the "DP Siemens" or the "DP Standard" protocol is used, COM ET 200 requires different address identifiers for the modules. Table 4-1, Section 4.1.1 and Table 5-1, Section 5.1.1 Different functions of switch 8 (SLOW mode). Section 4.2.1 and Section 5.2.1 Different behaviour when exiting from the SYSTEM START-UP/ TEST: MODULE SELECTION screen. Section 4.2 and Section 5.2 Different COM ET 200 screens for: SYSTEM START-UP/TEST DIAGNOSTICS Section 4.2 and Section 5.2 Section 4.3 and Section 5.3 The three ET 200U interface modules have different manufacturer identifications. Section 4.3.3 and Section 5.3.3 Extended diagnostics messages for the station status. Section 5.3.3 Using COM ET 200, the "422-8MA11" digital input module can now also be entered as 16-channel input module or as 1-channel analog input module. Table 5-1, Section 5.1.1 Individual input of address IDs. Section 5.1 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b v Preface Conventions This manual is organized in menu form to make it easier for you to find information. This means the following: At the front of the manual is an overview page that lists the title of each chapter. Following this page you will find a table of contents. The individual chapters are marked with printed tabs. At the beginning of each chapter is a table of contents for that chapter. Each chapter has three level headings that are numbered. Pages, figures, and tables are numbered separately for each chapter. Following the table of contents you will find a list of the figures and tables. This manual employs specific structuring devices which will be explained to you in the following. Important information is marked specifically: ! Warning You will find the definitions for the terms "Danger", "Warning" and "Caution" in the "Safety-Related Guidelines" on the page following the front page. Footnotes are marked with a raised number (e.g. 1) or a raised asterisk (*). You will find the corresponding explanations in the lower margin of the page. Enumerations are marked with a black point () (as, for example, in this list) or with a dash (-). Instructions are numbered (e.g. "1"). Cross-references are indicated in the following way: "(see Section 7.3.2)" refers to Section 7.3.2. Dimensions in drawings are indicated in "mm". Value ranges are indicated as follows: 17 to 21 You will find correction sheets at the end of the manual. Use them to indicate any corrections or suggestions for improvement you might have. Send these suggestions to us. They will help us to improve the next edition of the system manual. vi ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Contents 1 2 3 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.1 What is ET 200? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1.2 What is ET 200U? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-3 1-3 1.3 What is DP Siemens and DP Standard? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is DP Siemens and DP Standard? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differences between DP Siemens and DP Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Does DIN 19245 Have to Offer? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is FMS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-5 Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.1 Design of the ET 200U Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2.2 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spectrum of I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 2-4 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3.1 Mechanical Configuration of the ET 200U Distributed I/O Station . . . . . . . Installation, Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing One Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing PS 931 Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing PS 935 Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing an I/O Module on a Bus Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expanding an ET 200U Slave Station to Several Tiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing with Multi-Tier Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-9 3-11 3.2 Wiring the ET 200U Distributed I/O Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screw-Type Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crimp Snap-In Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dismantling Crimp Snap-In Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a PS 931 or PS 935 Power Supply Module to the Main Power Connecting an ET 200U Interface Module to a PS 931 or PS 935 Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Four-Channel Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Four-Channel Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Four-Channel Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Eight-Channel Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Eight-Channel Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 3-12 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-15 3-16 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-19 vii Contents 3.3 4 viii Connecting Eight-Channel Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the 482 Digital Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 3-21 Electrical Configuration of the ET 200U Distributed I/O Station . . . . . . . . . Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Electrical Configuration of an ET 200U Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . Grounded Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ungrounded Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Potentials in Floating/Nonfloating Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nonfloating Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floating Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 3-23 3-23 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-28 3-30 ET 200U(DP Siemens): Address Assignment, Starting Up and Diagnosing Faults Using COM ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites for this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is DP Siemens? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-2 4.1 Assigning Addresses Using COM ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 4-3 4.1.1 Using the CONFIGURING Screen for ET 200U(DP Siemens) . . . . . . . . . . "Station Number" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Area" ....................................................... "Station Type" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Next Available Address" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Address Assignment Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condition 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condition 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example Division of the Digital/Analog I/O Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DP Siemens Address ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finish Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-6 4-7 4-7 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-9 4-9 4-14 4.1.2 How to Proceed if the Configuration is Modified at a Later Point . . . . . . . . Expanding the Slave Station at a Later Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expanding an Already Configured Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying an Already Configured Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-16 4.2 Starting Up and Testing with COM ET 200 for ET 200U(DP Siemens) . . . In this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 4-17 4.2.1 Setting the Station No. and Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Station Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 4-18 4-19 4.2.2 Starting Up an ET 200U Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Contents 5 4.2.3 Using the SYSTEM START-UP/TEST Screen for an ET 200U(DP Siemens) Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 STATUS/FORCE Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 STATUS Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 FORCE Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 FORCE with Load Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 4.3 Diagnosing Faults for ET 200U(DP Siemens) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 4-25 4.3.1 Using LEDs to Diagnose Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 4.3.2 Using COM ET 200 to Diagnose Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 4.3.3 Diagnosing Faults with STEP 5 (Station Diagnostics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Remarks on Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features of Requesting Diagnostics Using Page Addressing . . . Structure and Request of Station Diagnostics for ET 200U . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Station Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Station Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Manufacturer Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Station Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Station Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Module Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Module Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-31 4-33 4-34 4-34 4-35 4-35 ET 200U(DP Standard): Address Assignment, Starting UP and Diagnosing Faults Using COM ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Prerequisites for this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 In this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 For Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 What is DP Standard? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Requirements for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5.1 Assigning Addresses Using COM ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying the Type File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5-3 5-3 5.1.1 Using the CONFIGURING Screen for ET 200U(DP Standard) . . . . . . . . . "Station Number" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Area" ....................................................... "Station Type" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Next Available Address" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Address Assignment Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condition 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condition 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example Division of the Digital/Analog I/O Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DP Standard Address ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help for Input of Unknown Address IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finish Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-6 5-7 5-7 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-9 5-9 5-14 5-15 5-17 5.1.2 How to Proceed if the Configuration is Modified at a Later Point . . . . . . . . Expanding the Slave Station at a Later Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expanding an Already Configured Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 5-18 5-18 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ix Contents 6 x Modifying an Already Configured Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 5.2 Starting Up and Testing with COM ET 200 for ET 200U(DP Standard) . . In this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 5-20 5.2.1 Setting the Station No. and Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Station Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of an "318-8MB12" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 5-21 5-22 5-22 5.2.2 Starting Up an ET 200U Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 5.2.3 Using the SYSTEM START-UP/TEST Screen for an ET 200U(DP Standard) Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Messages in the "...:STATUS/FORCE" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . STATUS/FORCE Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STATUS Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FORCE Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FORCE with Load Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-26 5-26 5-27 5.3 Diagnosing Faults for ET 200U(DP Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 5-28 5.3.1 Using LEDs to Diagnose Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 5.3.2 Using COM ET 200 to Diagnose Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 5.3.3 Diagnosing Faults with STEP 5 (Station Diagnostics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Remarks on Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features of Requesting Diagnostics Using Page Addressing . . . Structure and Request of Station Diagnostics for ET 200U . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Station Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Station Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Manufacturer Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Station Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Station Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Module Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Module Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 5-32 5-32 5-33 5-34 5-34 5-36 5-37 5-37 5-38 5-38 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Communications Capabilities of the IM 318-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 In this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 For Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Prerequisites for this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.1 Modes of the IM 318-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is an IM 318-C? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Which Modes are Possible? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements for Operating an IM 318-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6-2 6-2 6-5 6-6 6.2 Settings of the IM 318-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Station Number and Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 6-8 6.3 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) Communicating in Accordance with PROFIBUS Standard (Part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 6.3.1 FMS Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initiate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 6-11 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Contents 7 Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Get-OV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event-Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acknowledge-Event-Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter-Event-Condition-Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 6-11 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6.3.2 Object List (OV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static Object List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DP Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMS Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DP Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMS Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Event (with "Event-Notification") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-19 6-25 6-27 6-27 6-28 6-28 6-29 6.3.3 List of Communications Links (KBL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local LSAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RADR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACI, CCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Max. PDU Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-34 6-34 6-34 6.4 Using LEDs to Diagnose Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 6.5 Example of Programming a Link between an ET 200U(FMS) and a CP 5431 FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36 6.5.1 Programming a Cyclic Link (MSZY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 6.5.2 Programming an Acyclic Link (MSAZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 Analog Value Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.1 Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7.2 Connecting Current and Voltage Sensors to Analog Input Modules . . . . . Voltage Measurement with Isolated / Non-Isolated Thermocouples . . . . . Connection of Thermocouples with Compensa-ting Box to Module 464-8MA11/8MA21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Wire Connection of Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Two-Wire Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 7-3 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 7-5 7-5 7-6 7-7 xi Contents 8 9 xii Connection of Four-Wire Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring of the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More than Two Four-Wire Transducer Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Wire Break Detection with 6ES5 464-8ME11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Resistance Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-9 7.3 Start-Up of Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 7.4 Analog Value Representation of Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 7.5 Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Loads to Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation of Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 7-25 7-27 Module Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.1 General Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8.2 IM 318-B Interface Module (6ES5 318-8MB11) (6ES5 318-8MB12) (6ES5 318-8MC11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8.3 Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 8.4 Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 8.5 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 8.6 Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 8.7 Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 8.8 Digital Input / Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 8.9 Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41 8.10 Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Function Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 9.1 Comparator Module 2 x 0.5 to 20 mA / 0.5 to 10 V (6ES5 461-8MA11) Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 9-3 9-3 9-3 9-3 9-4 9.2 Timer Module 2 x 0.3 to 300 s (6ES5 380-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Application as On-Delay Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 9-6 9-6 9-6 9-6 9-7 9.3 Simulator Module (6ES5 788-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 9-9 9-9 9-9 9-9 9-9 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Contents 9.4 Diagnostic Module (6ES5 330-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 9-11 9-12 9-12 9-12 9.5 Counter Module 2 x 0 to 500 Hz (6ES5 385-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 9-15 9-15 9-15 9-15 9-16 9-17 9.6 Counter Module 25/500 kHz (6ES5 385-8MB11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Description of the COUNTER Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Description of the Position Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering New Setpoints for the Counter and Position Decoder . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 9-20 9-21 9-28 9-31 9-31 9-40 9-42 9.7 Closed-Loop Control Module IP 262 (6ES5 262-8MA12) (6ES5 262-8MB12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 9-46 9-46 9-46 9-47 9-47 9.8 IP 263 Positioning Module (6ES5 263-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignments of Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48 9-50 9-50 9.9 IP 264 Electronic Cam Controller Module (6ES5 264-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . Dead Time Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Process Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 9-54 9-54 9.10 IP 265 High Speed Sub Control (6ES5 265-8MA01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 9-57 9-57 9-57 9.11 IP 266 Positioning Module (6ES5 266-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 9-60 9-60 9-61 9-62 9-62 9.12 IP 267 Stepper Motor Control Module (6ES5 267-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Principle of the IP 267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63 9-64 9-65 9-65 9-65 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b xiii Contents A B xiv 9.13 CP 521 BASIC Communications Module (6ES5 521-8MB11) . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66 9-67 9-67 9-67 9.14 CP 521 SI Communications Processor (6ES5 521-8MA21) . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unidirectional Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bidirectional Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrated Real-Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68 9-69 9-69 9-69 9-70 9-70 9-70 Safety-Related Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 A.1 Active and Passive Faults in Automation Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedures for Maintenance and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 A-2 A.2 Suggestions for Configuring and Installing a Programmable Controller . . A-3 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Contents Figures 1-1 2-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 Component of the ET 200 Distributed I/O System Described in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design of the ET 200U Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation on a Standard Mounting Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System to Prevent Plugging In the Wrong Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing an ET 200U Interface Module from a Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Bus Units from a Standard Mounting Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Tier Configuration in a Cabinet Using IM 316 Interface Modules . . . Multi-Tier Configuration with a Row of Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Numbering with Multi-tier Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screw-Type Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting Crimp Snap-In Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dismantling Crimp Snap-In Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a Power Supply Module to the Mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Wire Connection of a Sensor to Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Wire Connection of a Lamp to Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a Sensor to Channel 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a Lamp to Channel 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a Sensor and Load to the 482 Digital I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . Configuration with a 115 V AC/230 V AC Power Supply for an ET 200U Interface Module, Sensors, and Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounded Configuration with a 24 V DC Power Supply for an ET 200U Interface Module, Sensors, and Actuators (Safe Electrical Isolation According to VDE 0160) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ungrounded Configuration with a 24 V DC Power Supply for an ET 200U Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simplified Illustration of a Configuration with Nonfloating I/O Modules . . . Simplified Illustration of a Configuration with Floating I/O Modules . . . . . . ET 200U(DP Siemens): CONFIGURING Screen (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200U(DP Siemens): CONFIGURING screen (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200U(DP Siemens): CONFIGURING Screen (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of Process I/O Image with ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the Bank of Switches for Setting the Station Number . . . . . . . SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: MODULE SELECTION Screen . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: STATUS/CONTROL Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault LEDs on the IM 318-B Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAGNOSTICS: OVERVIEW screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INDIVIDUAL DIAGNOSTICS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of the Station Status (Station Status 1 and Station Status 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnost. Word after Request of the Station Status (Station Status 3 and Master Address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of the Manufacturer Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Station Diagnostics . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Header and Slots 0 to 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Slots 8 to 15 and 16 to 23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 1-2 2-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-10 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-22 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-29 3-31 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-18 4-21 4-22 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-32 4-32 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-36 xv Contents 4-17 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10 xvi Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Slots 24 to 31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200U(DP Standard): CONFIGURING Screen (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200U(DP Standard): CONFIGURING screen (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200U(DP Standard): CONFIGURING Screen (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of Process I/O Image with ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of Parameterization Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the Bank of Switches for Setting the Station Number . . . . . . . SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: MODULE SELECTION Screen . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: STATUS/CONTROL Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault LEDs on the ET 200U Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAGNOSTICS: OVERVIEW Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INDIVIDUAL DIAGNOSTICS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of the Station Status (Station Status 1 and Station Status 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnost. Word after Request of the Station Status (Station Status 3 and Master Address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of the Manufacturer Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Station Diagnostics . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Header and Slots 0 to 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Slots 8 to 15 and 16 to 23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Slots 24 to 31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the Bank of Switches for Setting the Station Number . . . . . . . FMS Services Supported by the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) . . . . . . . . . Fault LEDs on the ET 200U Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Input/Output (I/O) Areas" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "CI Editor" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "CP Link Programming" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Request Editor Initialisation " Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Request Editor Service Selection" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Request Editor" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Measuring with Isolated Thermocouples (6ES5 464-8MA11/8MA21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Measuring with Non-Isolated Thermocouples (6ES5 464-8MA11/8MA21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors (6ES5 464-8MB11, 464-8MC11, 466-8MC11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Wire Connection of Current Sensors (6ES5 464-8MD11) . . . . . . . . . Connection of Two-Wire Transducers (6ES5 464-8ME11) . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Four-Wire Transducers (6ES5 464-8ME11) . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Method for PT 100 (6ES5 464-8MF11/8MF21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Possibilities for Input Modules (6ES5 464-8MF11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Connection via a Four-Wire Circuit (6ES5 470-8MA11, 6ES5 470-8MD11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection via a Two-Wire Circuit (6ES5 470-8MB11, 6ES5 470-8MC11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-16 5-21 5-24 5-25 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-35 5-35 5-36 5-37 5-38 5-39 5-39 6-9 6-11 6-35 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-42 7-4 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-26 7-27 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Contents 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-10 9-11 9-12 9-13 9-14 9-15 9-16 9-17 9-18 9-19 9-20 9-21 9-22 9-23 9-24 9-25 9-26 9-27 9-28 Scanning the Comparator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Scanning the Timer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Scanning the Simulator Module as a Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Setting the Input Voltage Range on the Counter Module (500 Hz) . . . . . . 9-15 Scanning the Counter Module (500 Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Timing Diagram: Setting and Resetting an Output of the Counter Module (500 Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Switch Positions on the Operating Mode Switch of the Counter Module . 9-20 Pin Assignment of the 15-Pin Sub-D Female Connector of the Counter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Connecting a Counting Pulse Sensor for 5 V Differential Signal to RS 422 9-22 Connecting a Counting Pulse Sensor for 24 V DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Connecting a 5 V Position Sensor to RS 422A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Connecting a 24 V DC Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Signal Sequence for Up-Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Assignment Diagram for the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Diagnostics Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Switching the Outputs Dependent on the Status of the Counter and the Enable Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Position of the Reference Point (SYNC Bit 0=1) within the Reference Signal Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Position of the Reference Point (SYNC Bit=1) after the Reference Signal 9-34 Position of the Reference Point (SYNC Bit=1) during a Reversal of Direction before Reaching the Reference Pulse in a Positive Direction . . 9-34 Schematic of a Reference Point Approach Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Enabling the Outputs - Reaching the Setpoints - Resetting the Outputs . 9-36 Approaching a Setpoint in Up-Count Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Approaching a Setpoint in Down-Count Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Approaching a Setpoint in Up-Count Direction and Subsequent Reversal of Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Requirement for New Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41 Positioning with the IP 263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 Course of a Following Error during a Positioning Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61 Velocity Profile of IP 267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b xvii Contents Tables 3-1 3-2 3-3 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 xviii Installing, Dismantling and Replacing the Hardware of an ET 200 Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Load Voltage to the Terminal Block of a Bus Unit . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment of the Front Connector of the 482 Digital I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Siemens) Station . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Siemens) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Siemens) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Siemens) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function of Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting Outputs with Load Circuit Turned on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Fault Messages from IM 318-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics with STEP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of Station Diagnostics and Module Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Names of the Type Files for the ET 200U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard) Station . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard) Station . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard) Station . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of Parameters in the DP-IDENTIFIER Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meaning of the Parameters in the Parameterization Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . Function of Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting Outputs with Load Circuit Turned On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Fault Messages on ET 200U Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics with STEP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of Station Diagnostics and Module Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modes of the M 318-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements for Operating an IM 318-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus Parameters to be Set if at Least One FMS Master is on the Bus . . . . Differences between the Various Modes of the IM 318-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Station Number and Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Object List of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) . . . . . . . . "Input" or "Output" Object of the "Simple-Variable" Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Input" or "Output" Object of the "Array" Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding the I/O Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding the I/O Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding the I/O Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding the I/O Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . "Diagnostics Data" Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Messages of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) 6-19 Meaning of Station Status 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meaning of Station Status 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meaning of the "Station Diagnostics" Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Content of Station Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meaning of the "Module Diagnostics" Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Content of Module Diagnostics (Slots 0 to 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Content of Module Diagnostics (Slots 8 to 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Content of Module Diagnostics (Slots 16 to 23) . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Content of Module Diagnostics (Slots 24 to 31) . . . . . . . . . . . . "Parameter Data" Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3-16 3-21 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-19 4-24 4-26 4-29 4-30 5-10 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-16 5-22 5-27 5-29 5-32 5-33 6-4 6-5 6-5 6-6 6-8 6-13 6-14 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 .... 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-22 6-23 6-23 6-24 6-24 6-24 6-25 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Contents 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-15 7-16 Meanings of the Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 "DP Inputs" Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 "FMS Inputs" Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 "DP Outputs" Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 "FMS Outputs" Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 "Diagnostics Event" Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Master-Slave, Cyclic, Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 Master-Slave, Cyclic, Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 Master-Slave, Cyclic, with Slave Initiation, Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 Master-Slave, Cyclic, with Slave Initiation, Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Master-Slave, Acyclic, with Slave Initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Master-Slave, Acyclic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Master-Slave, Acyclic, with Event Acknowledgement for Cyclic Links . . . 6-32 Types of Link of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 LED Fault Messages from ET 200U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 Settings for the Operating Mode Switch for Analog Input Modules 464-8 to 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Settings for the Operating Mode Switch for Analog Input Module 464-8MA21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Settings for the Operating Mode Switch for Analog Input Module 464-8MF21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Representation of an Analog Input Value as Bit Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Analog Input Modules 464-8MA11, -8MF11, -8MB11 (Bipolar Fixed-Point Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Analog Input Modules 464-8MC11, -8MD11 (Bipolar Fixed-Point Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Analog Input Module 464-8ME11, 4 4 to 20 mA (Absolute Value) . . . . . . . 7-18 Analog Input Module 464-8MF11, 2 PT 100 (Unipolar) Analog Input Module 464-8MF21, 2 PT 100 "No Linearization" (Unipolar) 7-19 Analog Input Module 464-8MF21, 2 PT 100 "with Linearization" (Bipolar), to DIN IEC 751 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Analog Input Module 464-8MA21, 4 "50 mV with Linearization and with Temperature Compensation (Bipolar); Thermoelement Type K (Nickel-Chromium/Nickel-Aluminium, according to IEC 584) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Analog Input Module 464-8MA21, 4 x "50 mV with Linearization and with Temperature Compensation (Bipolar); Thermoelement Type J (Iron/Copper- Nickel (Konstantan) according to IEC 584) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Analog Input Module 464-8MA21, 4 x "50 mV with Linearization and with Temperature Compensation (Bipolar); Thermoelement Type L (Iron/Copper- Nickel (Konstantan), according to 43710) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Analog Input Module 466-8MC11, 4 x 0 to 10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Representation of an Analog Output Value as a Bit Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 Output Voltages and Currents for Analog Output Modules (Fixed-Point Number Bipolar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Output Voltages and Currents for Analog Output Modules (Unipolar) . . . . 7-28 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b xix Contents 8-1 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 xx Binary representation of the measured value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Data from the Counter Modules to the CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Data from the CPU to the Counter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Traverse Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reaction of the Counter Module during Transfer of the Setpoints . . . . . . . Meaning of the Bytes of a Slot Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designation of the Operating Modes of the IP 266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58 9-26 9-26 9-31 9-32 9-40 9-42 9-62 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b System Overview 1-1 1 Component Described in this Manual of the ET 200 Distributed I/O System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1.1 What is ET 200? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1.2 What is ET 200U? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-3 1-3 1.3 What is DP Siemens and DP Standard? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is DP Siemens and DP Standard? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differences between DP Siemens and DP Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Does DIN 19245 Have to Offer? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is FMS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-5 Component of the ET 200 Distributed I/O System Described in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Figures 1-1 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b System Overview 1 The system overview contains information on the performance characteristics and features of the ET 200U distributed I/O station. It also contains information on the ET 200U distributed I/O station seen as a component of the ET 200 distributed I/O system. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 1-1 System Overview 1.1 What is ET 200? The ET 200 distributed I/O system is based on the PROFIBUS standard (DIN 19245, Part 1) and the PROFIBUS-DP standard draft (DIN 19245, Part 3). The SIEMENS PROFIBUS is called SINEC L2. The field bus which is the basis for the ET 200 distributed I/O system is a variant of the SINEC L2 with the name SINEC L2-DP ("DP" = Distributed periphery). This variant is designed for the shortest reaction times in communication with distributed I/Os. + IM 308-B ET 200B ET 200C ET 200U Further field devices SINEC L2-DP Field Bus (Two-wire or fibre optic cable) Figure 1-1 Component Described in this Manual of the ET 200 Distributed I/O System 1-2 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b System Overview 1.2 What is the ET 200U? Components ET 200U is the designation for a slave station consisting of the following: ET 200U interface module Power supply Bus units with up to 32 modules from the S5-100U I/O module spectrum. Characteristics The ET 200U distributed I/O station has the following characteristics: IP 20 degree of protection Accommodation of a maximum of 32 modules from the S5-100U module spectrum (including CPs and IPs) Maximum address space per ET 200U distributed I/O station 32 input bytes and 32 output bytes Multi-tier configuration possible using the IM 315 and IM 316 interface modules Direct connection of a programmer or ET 200 Handheld for testing and start-up (programmer with a CP 5410-S5DOS/ST programmer interface module) The station number of the ET 200U distributed I/O is switch-selectable The ET 200U module, Order No. 8MB11 is operated with DP Siemens ( Section 1.3) The ET 200U module, Order No. 8MB12 can be operated either with DP Siemens or with DP Standard ( Section 1.3) ET 200U module, Order No. 8MC11 can be operated either with FMS or with DP Standard ( Section 1.3) High data throughput: Example 20 ET 200U distributed I/O stations with 8 input bytes and 8 output bytes (= 2560 bits of user data) are connected to the bus. The baud rate set is 1500 Kbaud: I.e., a complete data cycle lasts 5.9 ms. During the data cycle the IM 308-B master interface module and the distributed I/Os exchange input/output data. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 1-3 System Overview 1.3 What is DP Siemens and DP Standard? What is DP Siemens and DP Standard? DP Siemens is the bus protocol developed by Siemens. In cooperation with the PROFIBUS User Organization, this bus protocol has been extended into an open, multi-vendor system. This extended bus protocol has been filed with the German Electrotechnical Commission (DKE) and it has been passed as National draft standard DIN 19245, Part 3. In this manual, the new bus protocol is called DP Standard. Differences between DP Siemens and DP Standard The user interfaces of DP Siemens and DP Standard are very similar. All functions which were available with an ET 200U(DP Siemens) are also provided for an ET 200U(DP Standard). The DIN 19245 draft standard, Part 3, offers additional advantages: Slave stations which meet the DIN 19245 draft standard, Part 3, can be connected to the ET 200 distributed I/O system Master stations which meet the DIN 19245 draft standard, Part 3, are able to communicate with the ET 200U(DP Standard) slave station What Does DIN 19245 Have to Offer? The PROFIBUS DIN 19245 field bus standards cover a great variety of functions, thus making the bus system suitable for universal use, from the control and cell level right up to the field level. The ET 200 distributed I/O system is based on DIN 19245, Part 1 and supplements the definitions contained therein for the special applications in the field of distributed I/O systems. DIN 19245, Part 1 describes the bus access and line protocol as well as the definitions for the required transmission hardware technique. DIN 19245, Part 3 offers a solution for distributed I/O applications calling for short system response times. The major task of DIN 19245, Part 3, is the fast cyclic data exchange between the central PLCs (master station) and the I/O units (slave station). DIN 19245, Part 3, offers the following features: Transmission of 1024-bit I/O data for 32 stations in less than 10 ms. Extensive diagnostics Reduced parameterization and configuring effort 1-4 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b System Overview What is FMS? At Siemens, FMS is defined as the PROFIBUS DIN 19245 bus protocol, Parts 1 and 2. DIN 19245, Part 1, describes the bus access and transmission protocol and the conventions for the transmission hardware required. DIN 19245, Part 2, defines the application protocol and the user interface. PROFIBUS-FMS has been developed especially for automation applications. It enables automation systems of different manufacturers to communicate with one another. PROFIBUS-FMS permits good connectivity to higher- level automation systems. The DP protocol offers faster response times than FMS so that FMS is intended rather for applications where time is not a crucial factor. Definition In this manual, the following three terms are used to distinguish the different systems: ET 200U: Slave station with IM 318-B interface module, in general ET 200U (DP Siemens): "318-8MB11" or "318-8MB12" which uses the "DP Siemens" bus protocol just like a "318-8MB11". ET 200U (DP Standard): "318-8MB12" or "318/8MC11" which uses the "DP Standard" bus protocol. DP Standard refers to the DIN 19245 draft standard, Part 3. ET 200U (DP Standard/ FMS): The "318-8MC11" uses both the "DP Standard" and "FMS" bus protocols. The ET 200U (DP Standard/FMS) can handle the sensor/actuator profile up to device class 4. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 1-5 System Overview 1-6 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Technical Description 2 2.1 Design of the ET 200U Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2.2 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spectrum of I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 2-4 Design of the ET 200U Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Figures 2-1 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Technical Description 2 The ET 200U distributed I/O station consists of the ET 200U interface module and the I/O modules. This chapter contains a description of the controls and display elements of the ET 200U interface module. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 2-1 Technical Description 2.1 Design of the ET 200U Interface Module "RUN" LED (green) This LED lights up when the ET 200U interface module is in the RUN mode (STOP/RUN switch in the "RUN" position and power supply switched on) "BUS-FAULT" LED (red) "IM-FAULT" LED (red) STOP/RUN switch SINEC L2-DP interface Terminals for 24 V supply and functional earth Switch for setting the station number and S the baud rate of the I/O bus (... 8MB11) ( Section 4.2.1) or S DP Siemens / DP Standard characteristics (... 8MB12) ( Section 5.2.1) or S Switching from FMS to DP Standard bus parameters and vice versa (... 8MC11) ( Section 6.2). Field for station number labels Plug connector for connection of a bus unit The LED indications are described in detail in the following Sections: S ET 200U(DP Standard) in Section 4.3.1, S ET 200U(DP Standard) in Section 5.3.1, S ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) in Section 6.4. 2-2 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Technical Description Figure 2-1 Design of the ET 200 Interface Module ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 2-3 Technical Description 2.2 Technical Specifications For detailed technical specifications see Chapter 8. Spectrum of I/O Modules All I/O modules which can be configured with COM ET 200 can be used for configuring the ET 200U distributed I/O station. For an overview of the I/O modules which can be connected see Chapters 8 and 9. Exception: If the ET 200U is operated as a combi slave, no CPs or IPs are permitted in the ET 200U ( Section 6). 2-4 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration 3 3.1 Mechanical Configuration of the ET 200U Distributed I/O Station . . . . . . . Installation, Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing One Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing PS 931 Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing PS 935 Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing an I/O Module on a Bus Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expanding an ET 200U Slave Station to Several Tiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing with Multi-Tier Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-9 3-11 3.2 Wiring the ET 200U Distributed I/O Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screw-Type Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crimp Snap-In Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dismantling Crimp Snap-In Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a PS 931 or PS 935 Power Supply Module to the Main Power Connecting an ET 200U Interface Module to a PS 931 or PS 935 Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Four-Channel Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Four-Channel Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Four-Channel Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Eight-Channel Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Eight-Channel Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Eight-Channel Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the 482 Digital Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 3-12 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 Electrical Configuration of the ET 200U Distributed I/O Station . . . . . . . . . Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Electrical Configuration of an ET 200U Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . Grounded Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ungrounded Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Potentials in Floating/Nonfloating Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nonfloating Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floating Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 3-23 3-23 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-28 3-30 3.3 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-15 3-16 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-19 3-20 3-21 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Figures 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 Installation on a Standard Mounting Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System to Prevent Plugging In the Wrong Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing an ET 200U Interface Module from a Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Bus Units from a Standard Mounting Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Tier Configuration in a Cabinet Using IM 316 Interface Modules . . . Multi-Tier Configuration with a Row of Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Numbering with Multi-tier Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screw-Type Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting Crimp Snap-In Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dismantling Crimp Snap-In Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a Power Supply Module to the Mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Wire Connection of a Sensor to Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Wire Connection of a Lamp to Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a Sensor to Channel 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a Lamp to Channel 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a Sensor and Load to the 482 Digital I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . Configuration with a 115 V AC/230 V AC Power Supply for an ET 200U Interface Module, Sensors, and Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounded Configuration with a 24 V DC Power Supply for an ET 200U Interface Module, Sensors, and Actuators (Safe Electrical Isolation According to VDE 0160) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ungrounded Configuration with a 24 V DC Power Supply for an ET 200U Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simplified Illustration of a Configuration with Nonfloating I/O Modules . . . Simplified Illustration of a Configuration with Floating I/O Modules . . . . . . 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-10 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-22 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-29 3-31 Tables 3-1 3-2 3-3 Installing, Dismantling and Replacing the Hardware of an ET 200 Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Load Voltage to the Terminal Block of a Bus Unit . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment of the Front Connector of the 482 Digital I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3-16 3-21 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration 3 This section discusses the following aspects of an ET 200U distributed I/O station: Installing a station mechanically Wiring a station Installing a station electrically The degree to which you can expand a slave station is limited by the following factors: The number of modules you can connect (a maximum of 16 bus units or 32 modules) The addressing range of an ET 200U slave station (a maximum of 32 input bytes and 32 output bytes) The current consumption of the individual modules (total current consumption from 9 V DC, I/O bus 700 mA at 60 C 900 mA at 40 C) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-1 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration 3.1 Mechanical Configuration of the ET 200U Distributed I/O Station When installing an ET 200U distributed I/O station, snap the power supply module, the ET 200U interface module, and the bus units into place on a standard mounting rail according to DIN EN 50022. Plug the I/O modules into the bus units. Installation, Dismantling Mount the rails on a metal plate that is at least 2 mm (0.08 in.) thick to ensure a good reference potential for the ground connection and the current leads. There are different installation heights depending on whether you use bus units with screw-type or crimp snap-in terminals. Table 3-1 lists prerequisites for installing, dismantling, and replacing the hardware of an ET 200U station. Table 3-1 Installing, Dismantling and Replacing the Hardware of an ET 200 Station Installing, Dismantling and Replacing: I/O Modules Prerequisites Put the RUN/STOP switch of the ET 200U interface module in the STOP position. Turn off the load power supply of the I/O module. Bus Units, Interface Modules, Power Supply Modules Disconnect the power supply for the ET 200U station. Please note the following if you wish to pull or plug-in I/O modules under load voltage: Note Pulling and plugging-in I/O modules under load voltage is permissible under defined conditions: The ET 200U interface module must be in the STOP position. All bus units in a slave station must be version w 4. Only digital or analog modules may be pulled and plugged-in under load voltage. 3-2 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Installing One Tier To install the ET 200U distributed I/O station, you need the following hardware: A power supply module An ET 20U interface module Bus units I/O modules A power supply is necessary only if no 24 V DC line voltage is available. Begin your installation at the left end of the standard mounting rail. Add modules from left to right. This section discusses the following subjects: Installing a power supply module and an ET 200U interface module Installing bus units Installing I/O modules on bus units You will find notes on dismantling the ET 200U distributed I/O station at the end of the assembly instructions. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-3 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Installing PS 931 Power Supply Module and ET 200U Interface Module The design of the backplane makes it easy to mount a PS 931 power supply module and an ET 200U interface module on a standard mounting rail. Proceed as follows (see Figure 3-1 ): 1. Working from the left end of the standard mounting rail, hang the power supply module on the rail. 2. Swing the module back until the slide on the module snaps onto the rail. 3. Using the same method, hang an ET 200U interface module onto the rail next to the power supply module. Installing PS 935 Power Supply Module and ET 200U Interface Module Other than the PS 931, the PS 935 power supply module is located on the right-hand side of the ET 200U interface module. 1. Connect the ET 200U interface module and the PS 935 power supply module via the ribbon cable of the PS 935. The ET 200U interface module is then located on the left-hand side of the PS 935. 2. Attach the ET 200U interface module together with the PS 935 onto the standard mounting rail and 3. Swing both modules back until the slide snaps onto the rail. Figure 3-1 Installation on a Standard Mounting Rail 3-4 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Installing Bus Units After you have installed the power supply unit and the interface module, proceed as follows: 1. Attach the first bus unit to the standard mounting rail (on the right-hand side of the ET 200U interface module or PS 935 power supply module). 2. Swing the module back until the slide on the module snaps onto the rail. 3. Install additional bus units to the right of the first bus unit using the same method. Hooks on the sides of the bus units ensure a mechanical connection between the units. 4. On the upper left of the bus unit is a ribbon cable. Pull the connector of the ribbon cable out of its holder (see Figure 3-2). 5. Plug the connector of the ribbon cable into the male connector on the right side of the ET 200U interface module / PS 935 power supply module or into the male connector of the bus unit on the left (see Figure 3-2). Figure 3-2 Connecting the Bus Units ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-5 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Installing an I/O Module on a Bus Unit When installing an I/O module on a bus unit, proceed as follows (see Figure 3-3): 1. Using a screw driver, set the coding key on the bus unit to the type of module that you are installing. The module type (2 to 8) is printed on the front of the I/O module. Setting the coding key to the correct module type prevents installing the wrong type of module when you change modules. (1) 2. Hang the module on the top of the bus unit. (2) 3. Swing the module back. (3) 4. Press the module into place. 5. Fasten the screw on the bottom front of the module to attach the module to the bus unit. Figure 3-3 System to Prevent Plugging In the Wrong Module 3-6 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Dismantling When dismantling an ET 200U slave station, begin by removing the power supply unit and the ET 200U interface module: 1. Turn off the 115 V AC/230 V AC voltage supply. 2. Disconnect the ET 200U interface module from the power supply unit. 3. Using a screwdriver, press down on the slide on the bottom of each module). 4. Swing the module up and off of the standard mounting rail. Figure 3-4 Removing an ET 200U Interface Module from a Rail Remove I/O module: 1. Loosen the screw at the bottom of the module and swinging the module up and out of the bus unit. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-7 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Remove bus units: 2. Disconnect the ribbon cable of each bus unit from its neighboring bus unit or from the ET 200U interface module (see 1 in Figure 3-5). 3. Using a screwdriver, press down on the bottom of the slide on each unit (2), (3). 4. Swing the bus unit or the ET 200U interface module up and off of the standard mounting rail (4). Figure 3-5 Removing Bus Units from a Standard Mounting Rail 3-8 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Expanding an ET 200U Slave Station to Several Tiers If your ET 200U slave station has too many modules to fit into one tier, you can expand your station to a maximum of four tiers with a maximum total of 16 bus units. As long as you stay within the limit of 16 bus units, it does not matter how many bus units are installed in one tier. To connect the tiers to each other, you need one interface module IM 315 or IM 316 per tier. You install the interface modules that connect the tiers as follows: 1. Hang the module on standard mount. rail to the right of the last bus unit. 2. Swing the module back until the slide on the module snaps into place. 3. Connect ribbon cable from interface module to the last bus unit in the tier. You must choose between two interface modules to connect the tiers of your multi-tier configuration, depending on how many tiers you have. The following table compares the two types of interface modules. Interface Module No. of Tiers Connecting Cable IM 315 Two 0.5 m (1.6 ft.) Permanently Connected to Two Modules IM 316 Three to Four 712-8 (Order No. 6ES5 712-8...) Expand your station as follows: 4. Install an IM 315 or IM 316 interface module to the right of the last bus unit on each tier. 5. If you are using IM 316 interface modules, use a 712-8 connecting cable to connect the two modules and secure the connectors of the cable with two screws each (see Figure 3-6). Make sure that you include at least 210 mm (8.3 in.) net clearance between the tiers (see Figures 3-6 and 3-7). Figure 3-6 shows a multi-tier configuration using IM 316 interface modules in a cabinet. Cabinet installation can be necessary under following conditions: In danger of coming into contact with live parts (e.g., supply terminals) When environmental conditions are harsh (e.g., dust, splashing water, corrosive gases and vapors) When you select a cabinet, make sure that you choose one that can dissipate enoughheatto ensureproperfunctioningof yoursystem.If necessary, useafan. To measurecabinetventilation,determinethetotalpowerloss(heatdissipation) asthesumof alltypicalpowerlosses(heatdissipation) (see Catalog ST 52.1). To ensure interference immunity, install your ET 200U slave station on a metal plate. If this is not possible, you must at least connect the standard mounting rails to each other using a low resistance conductor. You can also use mounting plates of the 8LW or 8LX systems (see Catalog NV 21). You can also install the standard mounting rails vertically so that the modules are installed on top of each other. In such an arrangement, heat dissipation through convection is less than in a horizontal configuration. For this reason, the permissible ambient temperature is limited to 40 C (104 F). ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-9 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration If you use the vertical configuration, you must maintain the same minimum clearances as with the horizontal configuration. (see Fig. 3-6 or Fig. 3-7). Metal Plate IM 316 Interface Module Minimum 210 mm (8.3 in.) "In" Socket Minimum 210 mm (8.3 in.) Connecting Cable 712-8 PS IM 318 "Out" Socket Figure 3-6 Multi-Tier Configuration in a Cabinet Using IM 316 Interface Modules Row of Devices and/or a Cable Duct. a Minimum 210 mm (8.3 in.) + a Minimum 45 mm (1.8 in.) PS IM 318 Figure 3-7 Multi-Tier Configuration with a Row of Devices 3-10 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Addressing with Multi-tier Configuration The ET 200U can be configured in a maximum of 4 tiers with up to 32 slots. The slots are numbered consecutively, starting with the slot next to the ET 200U module which has the number "0". The numbers are assigned in any case, whether a module is plugged in or not. If the ET 200U is configured in more than one tier, numbering of the expansion tiers is continued with the slot at the far left end. 12 13 14 15 6 PS IM 318 0 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 3-8 Numbering with Multi-tier Configuration When expanding the configuration, it is essential that you always mount the additional bus units in the top tier on the right. Otherwise the slot numbers of the bus units to the right of the the expansion will be changed. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-11 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration 3.2 Wiring the ET 200U Distributed I/O Station This section discusses the following subjects: How to connect lines to the terminal block of an ET 200U slave station (using screw-type or crimp snap-in terminals) How the power supply modules are connected to the main power How to connect digital modules Wiring Methods You can use one of the following two types of connections to wire the terminal block of a bus unit: Screw type Crimp snap-in Screw-Type Connections Using this wiring method, you can clamp two lines to each terminal point of a bus unit. To screw them tight, it is best to use a screw driver with a blade that is 5 mm (approximately 3/16 in.) wide. Figure 3-9 illustrates a screw- type connection. The following table lists the permissible cross sections of lines you can connect to this type of terminal. Type of Conductor Permissible Cross Section Stranded with Core End Sleeves 2 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (Approximately AWG 20 to AWG 16) Solid 2 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 (Approximately AWG 20 to AWG 14) M3 Screw Wire Clamp Lines Figure 3-9 Screw-Type Connection 3-12 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Crimp Snap-In Connections Bus units with crimp snap-in connections have the same overall height as I/O modules. You can connect stranded conductors with a cross section of 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (approximately AWG 20 to AWG 16) to crimp snap-in contacts. To insert a contact into a terminal block, remove the module that is plugged in and proceed as follows (see also Figure 3-10): 1. Using a screw driver, press the terminal block down. (1) 2. Turn the terminal block approximately 180 until the back of the module is visible. (2) 3. Push the contact into the desired recess until the locating spring engages. The locating spring must point into the slot. (3) 4. Pull lightly on the line to ensure that the contact is properly engaged. 5. Turn the terminal block back approximately 180 and push it up until it snaps into position. Figure 3-10 Inserting Crimp Snap-In Contacts ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-13 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Dismantling Crimp Snap-In Contacts To dismantle crimp snap-in contacts, bring the terminal block into the position illustrated in Figure 3-11 and proceed as follows: 1. Put the extraction tool into the slot next to the contact so that you can compress the barb. (1) 2. Place the line in the groove of the extraction tool and pull the tool and line out. (2) 3. To use the contact again, straighten out the deformed barb. Figure 3-11Dismantling Crimp Snap-In Contacts 3-14 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Connecting a PS 931 or PS 935 Power Supply Module to the Main Power To connect a PS 931 power supply module to the main power, proceed as follows (see Figure 3-12): 1. Set the voltage selector to the line voltage that you are using. 2. Lift the protective cover. (1) 3. Connect the power cable to terminals L1, N and (2), (3), (4) and 4. Close the protective cover. (5) Figure 3-12 Connecting a Power Supply Module to the Mains Connecting an ET 200U Interface Module to a PS 931 or PS 935 Power Supply Module Connection of the ET 200U interface module to a power supply module is different for the PS 931 and PS 935. PS 931 1. Connect the L+ and M terminals of the PS 931 power supply module to the correspond. terminals on the ET 200U interf. module. PS 935 1. Connect the L+ terminal of the PS 935 power supply module to the correspond. terminals on the ET 200U interf. module. 2. For a grounded configuration, connect the terminal of the ET 200U interface module to the standard mounting rail. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-15 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Connecting Digital Modules You plug all I/O modules into bus units. You wire the terminal blocks of the bus units. The information that follows describes connections to screw-type terminals. However, you can also use crimp snap-in connections. In both cases, you will find the terminal assignments on the blocks. Table 3-2 shows the assignment that always applies when you connect the load voltage. Table 3-2 ! Connecting the Load Voltage to the Terminal Block of a Bus Unit Load Voltage Terminal 1 Terminal 2 24 V DC L+ M 115 V AC/230 V AC L1 N Caution After the L+ supply is switched off, energy is stored in digital outputs in an internal capacitor for about 100 ms. This energy can be sufficient to activate small loads (e.g. pulse valves) when an output is triggered. Connecting Four- Channel Digital Modules Because all four-channel modules are designed for a two-wire connection, you can wire directly to a sensor or an actuator without using an external distribution block. All 24 V DC four-channel digital modules have a red F LED to indicate faults. This LED signals a failure of the load voltage. Where inputs are concerned, this LED also indicates a short circuit of M in the sensor lines. Where outputs are concerned, this LED indicates an output error. The 115 V AC/230 V AC input modules have no fault LED. The 115 V AC/230 V AC output modules have an LED to indicate a defective fuse. The four channels of a module are numbered from .0 to .3. A pair of terminals on the terminal block is assigned to each channel. The terminal assignment and the connection diagram are printed on the front panel of the module. When there is a short in the output circuits, the four-channel output modules generate a fault signal. You can evaluate this fault signal as a diagnostics signal via the I/O bus. 3-16 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Connecting Four- Channel Input Modules Figure 3-13 illustrates the following example for connecting a sensor to a four-channel input module: Example: A sensor is connected to an input module with start address 3.0. The sensor is connected to channel 2 (address I 3.2). Channel 2 1 3 2 L+ M 5 4 7 6 9 8 10 Sensor Figure 3-13 Two-Wire Connection of a Sensor to Channel 2 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-17 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Connecting Four- Channel Output Modules Figure 3-14 illustrates the following example for connecting a lamp to a four-channel output module: Example: A lamp is connected to an output module with start address 1.0. The lamp is connected to channel 2 (address Q 1.2). Channel 2 1 3 2 L+ M 5 4 7 6 9 8 10 Lamp Figure 3-14 Two-Wire Connection of a Lamp to Channel 2 3-18 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Connecting Eight- Channel Digital Modules Because eight-channel modules do not have a two-wire connection, you need an external distribution block for them. Connecting Eight- Channel Input Modules When connecting eight-channel input modules, you must connect a sensor to terminal 1 via the L+ terminal strip. Example A sensor is connected to an input module with start address 3.0. The sensor is connected to channel 4 (address I 3.4). The eight channels of a module are numbered from .0 to .7. One terminal on the terminal block is assigned to each channel. The terminal assignment and the connection diagram are printed on the front panel of the module. Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 4 1 3 2 L+ 5 4 7 6 9 8 10 Sensor M L+ Terminal Strip Figure 3-15 Connecting a Sensor to Channel 4 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-19 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Connecting Eight- Channel Output Modules When connecting eight-channel output modules, you must connect actuators to terminal 2 of the terminal block via the M terminal strip. This situation does not apply to the 8 5 to 24 V DC/0.1 A digital output module. Figure 3-15 illustrates the following example for connecting a lamp to an eight- channel output module: Example A lamp is connected to an eight-channel output module with start address 5.0. The lamp is connected to channel 6 (address Q 5.6). Channel 0 Channel 6 Channel 1 1 3 2 5 4 7 6 9 8 10 Lamp L+ M M Terminal Strip Figure 3-16 Connecting a Lamp to Channel 6 3-20 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Connecting the 482 Digital Input/ Output Module You wire the 482 digital input/output module on a 40-pin connector using screw-type or crimp snap-in connections. Because the module has no two- wire connection, you need to use an external distribution block. One terminal on the 40-pin connector is assigned to each channel. The channel numbers are printed on the front panel of the module. The 16 channels of the input side (IN) and the output side (OUT) of the 482 digital I/O module are numbered. n + 1.0 Byte "Module Address + 1" .... n + 1.7 and and n.0 Byte "Module Address" .... n.7 Table 3-3 Terminal Assignment of the Front Connector of the 482 Digital I/O Module Connection (OUT) Assignment 1 L + (for connections 2 to 9) 2 "Module address + 1" - bit 0 3 Connection (IN) Assignment 1 L+ /0.5A 2 "Module address + 1" - bit 0 "Module address + 1" - bit 1 /0.5A 3 "Module address + 1" - bit 1 4 "Module address + 1" - bit 2 /0.5A 4 "Module address + 1" - bit 2 5 "Module address + 1" - bit 3 /0.5A 5 "Module address + 1" - bit 3 6 "Module address + 1" - bit 4 /0.5A 6 "Module address + 1" - bit 4 7 "Module address + 1" - bit 5 /0.5A 7 "Module address + 1" - bit 5 8 "Module address + 1" - bit 6 /0.5A 8 "Module address + 1" - bit 6 9 "Module address + 1" - bit 7 /0.5A 9 "Module address + 1" - bit 7 10 M (for connections 2 to 9) 10 Not assigned 11 L+ (for connections 12 to 19) 11 Not assigned 12 "Module address" - bit 0 /0.5A 12 "Module address" - bit 0 13 "Module address" - bit 1 /0.5A 13 "Module address" - bit 1 14 "Module address" - bit 2 /0.5A 14 "Module address" - bit 2 15 "Module address" - bit 3 /0.5A 15 "Module address" - bit 3 16 "Module address" - bit 4 /0.5A 16 "Module address" - bit 4 17 "Module address" - bit 5 /0.5A 17 "Module address" - bit 5 18 "Module address" - bit 6 /0.5A 18 "Module address" - bit 6 19 "Module address" - bit 7 /0.5A 19 "Module address" - bit 7 20 M (for connections 12 to 19) 20 M ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-21 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Example The module start address is 6.0. Inputs and outputs have the same address (in the ET 200 distributed I/O station, the inputs and outputs of this module can also have different addresses). A sensor is connected to input I 6.4 and a lamp is connected to output Q 7.3. See Figure 3-17 for the front connections. OUT IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 L+ Lamp 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 M Sensor L+ M M Terminal L+ Terminal Figure 3-17 Connecting a Sensor and Load to the 482 Digital I/O Module 3-22 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration 3.3 Electrical Configuration of the ET 200U Distributed I/O Station Power Supply The ET 200U distributed I/O station has the following electrical circuits: The control circuit for logic control (24 V DC for the ET 200U interface module) The control circuit for sensors (24 V DC) and The load circuit for actuators. To supply the control and load circuits, use one of the following: The PS 931 power supply module or The PS 935 power supply module or A Siemens load power supply of the 6EV1 series (see Catalog ET1). If you connect any other load power supply, the voltage must be in a range of 20 V to 30 V (including ripple) and the load power supply must be safely isolated to DIN VDE 0160. Note If you use switch-mode power supply units to supply floating analog modules and BERO poximity limit switches, you must first run this supply through a line filter. General Electrical Configuration of an ET 200U Slave Station Figures 3-18 through 3-20 show the following configurations for an ET 200U slave station: Configuration with a 115 V AC/230 V AC power supply for an ET 200U interface module, sensors, and actuators Grounded configuration with a 24 V DC power supply for an ET 200U interface module, sensors, and actuators and Ungrounded configuration with a 24 V DC power supply for an ET 200U interface module. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-23 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration When planning the electrical configuration of your ET 200U distributed I/O station, note the following: You must provide a main switch (1) for the ET 200U interface module, the sensors, and the actuators according to VDE 0100. You can connect the main power for the ET 200U interface module and the load circuit without providing additional fuse protection (2) if your radial lines have the following specifications: - No more than 3 meters (9.8 ft.) long - Inherently ground-fault resistant - Inherently short-circuit proof You need a load power supply (3) for 24 V DC load circuits. You need a back-up capacitor (rating: 200 F per 1 A load current) for nonstabilized load power supply units. If you have AC load circuits with more than five actuating coils, galvanic isolation by means of a transformer (4) is recommended. You should ground the load circuit at one end (see Figure 3-19). Use a low resistance conductor to connect the standard mounting rail to the cabinet chassis ground (10). You should fuse the load voltage for sensor and actuator circuits separately (6), (7). A line fuse (9) is necessary to provide protection for the supply voltage. If the PS 935 power supply module is used, then the ET 200U interface module and the PS 935 power supply module are connected only via terminal L+ (11). The M line is not provided with the PS 935 module. 3-24 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration (1) L1 L2 L3 N PE (9) (2) (3) PS (4) (5) ET 200U interf. mod. * (10) (11) DE DE DA DA Terminal 1 Terminal 2 (6) (7) AC 230 V *: M line not provided with PS 935 Figure 3-18 Configuration with a 115 V AC/230 V AC Power Supply for an ET 200U Interface Module, Sensors, and Actuators ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-25 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Grounded Configuration For a grounded configuration, on the load power supply (M terminal) or on the isolating transformer in the secondary circuit, provide a removable connection (5) to the protective ground conductor (see Figure 3-19). Ground all machine parts. (1) L1 L2 L3 N PE (2) ET 200U interf. mod. (3) (5) M (9) L+ DI (10) DI DQ DQ Terminal 1 Terminal 2 (6) (7) M L+ Figure 3-19 Grounded Configuration with a 24 V DC Power Supply for an ET 200U Interface Module, Sensors, and Actuators (Safe Electrical Isolation According to VDE 0160) 3-26 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Ungrounded Configuration An ungrounded configuration differs from a grounded one in that it has no connection between PE (the protective ground) and the chassis ground of the power supply. You must provide fault voltage monitoring for load circuits that are not grounded (8). (1) L1 L2 L3 N PE (2) (8) (3) >U M L+ (9) ET 200U interf. mod. Load circuit Figure 3-20 Ungrounded Configuration with a 24 V DC Power Supply for an ET 200U Interface Module ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-27 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Voltage Potentials in Floating/Nonfloating Configurations The following sections discuss the differences in nonfloating and floating configurations. Nonfloating Configuration A configuration in which the control circuit and the load circuit have the same chassis ground is a nonfloating configuration. Example You are using a load power supply as the common power supply for the control and load circuits. In this way, you have set up your ET 200U distributed I/O station as a nonfloating configuration. In a nonfloating configuration, you can use both nonfloating and floating modules. In either case, the common reference potential removes the isolation. This section deals with a configuration that has nonfloating modules. A configuration with nonfloating modules can be one of the following two types: Ungrounded and Grounded For an ungrounded configuration, you must provide isolation to ground with voltage limitation (see Figure 3-20). Do not connect the ground terminal of the ET 200U interface module to the grounded standard mounting rail. For a grounded configuration, connect the ground terminal of the Et 200U interface module to the grounded standard mounting rail (see Figure 3-19). Note If the ET 200U interface module is earthed, then the GND line of the I/O bus is also grounded, because ground connection and M connection are jumpered internally on the ET 200U interface module. The ET 200U interface module and the standard mounting rail are galvanically isolated; i.e. even if the standard mounting rail is grounded, an ungrounded configuration for the ET 200U interface module is still ensured. The standard mounting rail must always be grounded. If you configure your ET 200U distributed I/O station as a nonfloating station, connect the chassis ground of the load circuit to the chassis ground of the control circuit externally. 3-28 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Nonfloating I/O modules work according to the following principle (see Figure 3-21): S Input modules: Reference potential is the M line (chassis ground of the control circuit). A voltage drop on line affects the input signal level VI. S Output modules: Reference potential is terminal 2 (M) of the terminal block. A voltage drop DV2 on line increases the chassis ground of the output driver and in this way lowers the resulting control voltage VST (see Figure 3-21). For a nonfloating configuration, make sure that the voltage drop on lines and never exceeds 1 V. Otherwise the reference potentials shift and the modules can malfunction (see Figure 3-21). +9V Data GND VST ET 200U interf. mod. L+ M VE 1 2 1 2 D V1 L+ 24 V DC Supply M D V2 Figure 3-21 Simplified Illustration of a Configuration with Nonfloating I/O Modules ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-29 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration Floating Configuration A configuration in which the control circuit and the load circuit are galvanically isolated is a floating configuration. A floating configuration is necessary under the following conditions: When you need to increase interference immunity of load circuits When you cannot interconnect load circuits (e.g., because the sensors have different reference voltages, or power is supplied from batteries, or the positive pole of the battery is grounded) and When you are using AC load circuits A floating configuration can be one of the following two types: Ungrounded and Grounded For an ungrounded configuration, you must provide isolation monitoring to ground with voltage limitation (see Figure 3-20). Do not connect the ground terminal of the IM 318-B interface module to the grounded standard mounting rail. For a grounded configuration, connect the ground terminal of the ET 200U interface module to the grounded standard mounting rail. When the load circuit is grounded, the grounding of the ET 200U interface module removes the galvanic isolation. A floating configuration has the following characteristics: Differences in potential do not result in compensating currents. Equipotential bonding conductors are not necessary between the devices (e.g., between tiers or stations). Dangerous contact voltages with respect to ground are possible. Avoid them through such measures as grounding specific system parts or by using isolation monitoring with voltage limitation. 3-30 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Mechanical and Electrical Configuration +9V Data GND ET 200U interface module 1L+ M L+ M L1 2L+ N M Figure 3-22 Simplified Illustration of a Configuration with Floating I/O Modules ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 3-31 Mechanical and Electrical Configuration 3-32 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): Address Assignment, Starting Up and Diagnosing Faults Using COM ET 200 4 Prerequisites for this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is DP Siemens? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-2 4.1 Assigning Addresses Using COM ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 4-3 4.1.1 Using the CONFIGURING Screen for ET 200U(DP Siemens) . . . . . . . . . . "Station Number" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Area" ....................................................... "Station Type" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Next Available Address" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Address Assignment Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condition 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condition 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example Division of the Digital/Analog I/O Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DP Siemens Address ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finish Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-6 4-7 4-7 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-9 4-9 4-14 4.1.2 How to Proceed if the Configuration is Modified at a Later Point . . . . . . . . Expanding the Slave Station at a Later Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expanding an Already Configured Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying an Already Configured Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-16 4.2 Starting Up and Testing with COM ET 200 for ET 200U(DP Siemens) . . . In this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 4-17 4.2.1 Setting the Station No. and Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Station Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 4-18 4-19 4.2.2 Starting Up an ET 200U Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 4.2.3 Using the SYSTEM START-UP/TEST Screen for an ET 200U(DP Siemens) Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STATUS/FORCE Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STATUS Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FORCE Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FORCE with Load Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-23 4.3 Diagnosing Faults for ET 200U(DP Siemens) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 4-25 4.3.1 Using LEDs to Diagnose Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U (DP Siemens): Address Assignment, Starting Up, Diagnosing Faults 4.3.2 Using COM ET 200 to Diagnose Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 4.3.3 Diagnosing Faults with STEP 5 (Station Diagnostics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Remarks on Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features of Requesting Diagnostics Using Page Addressing . . . Structure and Request of Station Diagnostics for ET 200U . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Station Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Station Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Manufacturer Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Station Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Station Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Module Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Module Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-31 4-33 4-34 4-34 4-35 4-35 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U (DP Siemens): Address Assignment, Starting Up, Diagnosing Faults Figures 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 ET 200U(DP Siemens): CONFIGURING Screen (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200U(DP Siemens): CONFIGURING screen (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200U(DP Siemens): CONFIGURING Screen (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of Process I/O Image with ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the Bank of Switches for Setting the Station Number . . . . . . . SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: MODULE SELECTION Screen . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: STATUS/CONTROL Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault LEDs on the IM 318-B Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAGNOSTICS: OVERVIEW screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INDIVIDUAL DIAGNOSTICS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of the Station Status (Station Status 1 and Station Status 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnost. Word after Request of the Station Status (Station Status 3 and Master Address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of the Manufacturer Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Station Diagnostics . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Header and Slots 0 to 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Slots 8 to 15 and 16 to 23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Slots 24 to 31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-18 4-21 4-22 4-26 4-27 4-28 Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Siemens) Station . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Siemens) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Siemens) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Siemens) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function of Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting Outputs with Load Circuit Turned on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Fault Messages from IM 318-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics with STEP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of Station Diagnostics and Module Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-19 4-24 4-26 4-29 4-30 4-32 4-32 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-36 4-36 Tables 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): Address Assignment, Starting Up and Diagnosing Faults Using COM ET 200 Prerequisites for this Chapter 4 This chapter is based on the "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual. The fundamentals of the COM ET 200 are described in the "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual. A major feature of COM ET 200 is the address assignment. Notes on the type of address assignment (linear addressing or page addressing) are given in the "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual. Address assignment, starting-up and the fault diagnosing procedures depend on the type of slave station. This chapter deals with the procedures applicable for ET 200U(DP Siemens), using COM ET 200. In this Chapter This chapter describes how to use COM ET 200 and STEP 5 for an ET 200U(DP Siemens) module: The following features are described: Address assignment using the CONFIGURING screen ( Section 4.1) Starting-up and testing using the START-UP/TEST screen ( Section 4.2) Diagnosing faults using the DIAGNOSTICS screen ( Section 4.3) For Reference To quickly look up important parameters, please refer to: Address IDs for ET 200U(DP Siemens) ( Table 4-1, Section 4.1.1) Setting the station number and switches (bank of switches) ( Section 4.2.1) Explanation of LEDs ( Table 4-7, Section 4.3.1) Diagnostics word for ET 200U(DP Siemens) ( Table 4-9, Section 4.3.3) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-1 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 What is DP Siemens? DP Siemens is explained in detail in Chapter 1. An ET 200U interface module with the Order No. 6ES5 318-8MB11 or 6ES5 318-8MB12 (which operates as a "6ES5 318-8MB11" using the "DP Siemens" bus protocol) is called ET 200U(DP Siemens). DP Siemens is the bus protocol developed by Siemens. In cooperation with the PROFIBUS User Organization, this bus protocol has been extended into an open and, multi-vendor system. This extended bus protocol has been filed with the German Electrotechnical Commission (DKE) and it has been passed as National draft standard DIN 19245, Part 3. For details on ET 200U(DP Standard), please refer to Chapter 5. The ET 200U with the Order No. 6ES5 318-8MB12 is able to use both protocols. To set the required bus protocol, use switch 8 on the bank of switches. The bank of switches is described in Section 4.2.1. Requirements for Operation An ET 200U(DP Siemens) can be started up using any version or revision level of COM ET 200 and the IM 308-B master interface module. Note It is always possible to operate the ET 200U(DP Siemens) and ET 200U(DP Standard) distributed I/O units in parallel on one bus. 4-2 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 4.1 Assigning Addresses Using COM ET 200 In this Section This section describes the typical address assignment for ET 200U(DP Siemens). You will learn how to use the COM ET 200 CONFIGURING screen to configure the ET 200U(DP Siemens) distributed I/O station. Section 4.1.1 deals with configuring the ET 200U(DP Siemens). Section 4.1.2 deals with special configuring requirements. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-3 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 4.1.1 Using the CONFIGURING Screen for ET 200U(DP Siemens) In the CONFIGURING screen, you assign for each ET 200U(DP Siemens): the specific modules to specific slots of the slave station and the start addresses of the individual modules. The following steps describe the procedure you must follow to configure your ET 200U slave station, from creating the configuration data to storing it: 1. Make the appropriate entries in the ET 200 SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen ( "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual). After you confirm the ET 200 system parameters with the <F6> (ENTER) key 2. Press <F8> to return to the FUNCTIONS screen. 3. From the FUNCTIONS screen, press <F2> to go to the CONFIGURING screen. Result: The CONFIGURING screen appears. SIMATIC S5 / COM ET 200 Program file selected: TEST@@@@ET.200 CONFIGURING Station number: 3 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 ENTER HELP EXIT Figure 4-1 ET 200U(DP Siemens): CONFIGURING Screen (1) 4-4 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 "Station Number" An ET 200U(DP Siemens) must have a station number only in the range from 3 to 124. You cannot enter the station number of an additional active station here (if you specified one in the ET 200 SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen). When pressing <F7> (HELP) - the cursor must be positioned in the "station number" field - a window is displayed showing all station numbers and station types assigned so far. You can select a station and output its configuration. If station numbers have not been assigned yet, the message NO STATIONS CONFIGURED is output. 4. If necessary, correct the station number that appears on the screen and press <F6> (ENTER) to complete your entry. Result: If the station whose number you entered has already been configured, its configuration appears on the screen after you complete your entry. If the station whose number you entered has not already been configured, two additional entry fields appear: Program file selected: TEST@@@@ET.200 CONFIGURING Station number: 3 F1 F2 Station type: Area: F3 SIMATIC S5 / COM ET 200 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 ENTER HELP EXIT Figure 4-2 ET 200U(DP Siemens): CONFIGURING screen (2) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-5 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 "Area" If you entered "N" for the ET 200 system parameter "Dual-port RAM addr.", you must select one of the permissible areas for linear addressing (P or Q). If you entered "Y" for the ET 200 system parameter "Dual-port RAM addr.", you must enter the abbreviation of the peripheral area (P or Q) and the dual- port RAM page number. The permissible dual-port RAM page numbers are derived from the basic dual-port RAM page number). Examples: "P0" for dual-port RAM page number 0 in the P peripheral area. "Q1" for dual-port RAM page number 1 in the Q peripheral area. "Station Type" Press <F7> (HELP) to select the station type: 5. If you want to configure an ET 200U(DP Siemens), select "ET 200U". 6. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm your entries.. Result: COM ET 200 accepts the entries and fills the screen (: Configuration field): SIMATIC S5 / COM ET 200 Program file selected: TEST@@ET.200 CONFIGURING Station number: 3 Area: Station type: ET 200U P Station name: Next available address: DI: DQ: Configuration: AI: AQ: Module address: I: Q: 0. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 STATION + STATION - DELETE STATION NEW STATION ADDRESS ASSIGN. ENTER HELP EXIT Figure 4-3 ET 200U(DP Siemens): CONFIGURING Screen (3) 4-6 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 7. Assign a station name if desired (all keyboard characters are permissible). "Next Available Address" Under the "Station name" field is the "Next available address" field with areas for four entries. When you configure for the first time in the program file that you set up, all four first available addresses are assigned as 0. If a slave station has already been configured, each entry field shows the address of the first available byte for the following areas: DI (digital input modules) DQ (digital output modules) AI (analog input modules) AQ (analog output modules) COM ET 200 updates the "Next available address" input fields immediately after you enter a valid address ID for a slot in the "Configuration" field of this screen. However, before you configure an ET 200U (DP Siemens) slave station, you must take the following steps: Separate the areas for digital and analog modules so that addresses do not overlap. Communications processors (CPs) and intelligent I/O modules (IPs) count here as analog modules. Determine the structure of your stations. Additions and changes that you make later result in address assignments that can be confusing to read or otherwise unclear. Special Address Assignment Conditions CPUs 941, 942, 943 and 944 of the S5-115U/H PLC series generate the process I/O image word-by-word. This may result in two slave stations being addressed within one word or the address of the first slave station ending exactly in the middle of one word and the address of the second slave station starting at the same position. PII PIQ Address 0: Station 1 Address 0: Station 1 1: Station 2 1: Station 2 Station 2 2: Station 2 2: 3: Station 2 3: Station 2 4: Station 2 4: Station 2 Figure 4-4 Example of Process I/O Image with ET 200 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-7 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 If an input/output value is read in via the process I/O image, the following conditions may result: Condition 1 Assumption: Failure of station 1 in the PII or in the PIQ The CPUs 941 to 944 detect a failure of station 1 since they read in/write the process I/O image word-by-word. Therefore, the CPUs do not read/write address 0 in the process I/O image of station 2, although station 2 is available. The CPU stops with timeout (if in COM ET 200 "timeout = yes"). After a transition from STOP to RUN, the CPU switches again to RUN. Station 1 and address 1 of station 2 are not entered in the process I/O image. Condition 2 Assumption: Failure of station 2 PII: The CPUs 941 to 944 detect a failure of station 2 since they read in the process I/O image word-by-word. The CPU stops with timeout (if in COM ET 200 "timeout = yes"). The CPU remains in the STOP mode even after a transition from STOP to RUN. PIQ: The CPUs 941 to 944 detect a failure of station 2 since they read in/ write the process I/O image word-by-word. Therefore, the CPUs do not read/write address 0 in the process I/O image of station 1, although station 1 is available. The CPU stops with timeout (if in COM ET 200 "timeout = yes"). After a transition from STOP to RUN, the CPU switches again to RUN. Station 2 and address 0 of station 1 are not entered in the process I/O image. Note To avoid the above conditions, note the following when addressing CPUs 941 to 944: 1. Use load and transfer commands. These commands work on a byte-by- byte basis and are thus able to identify the presence of each individual byte. 2. Assign an even number as address start in a slave station (e.g. 0, 2, 4, 6, ...) and do not use the uneven address numbers. This enables you to access the process I/O image. Example Division of the Digital/Analog I/O Areas Example division of the digital and analog I/O areas: 1. Accept "0" as the next available address for DI and DQ modules. 2. Enter "128" as next available address for AI and AQ modules. This division corresponds to the usual SIMATIC division of the P area. However, you can separate the areas according to your needs. 4-8 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 Configuring The numbers above the input fields in the "Configuration" field designate the slots of the ET 200U (DP Siemens) slave station. 1. Assign a proper address ID to each module in the ET 200U(DP Siemens) station (see following tables). Assign the slots in ascending order. Do not skip any slot. If you have a slot that you are not going to use, enter "000" as the address for that slot. Note Please refer to Section 3.1 for the numbering of slots in case of a multi-tier configuration. If you are using page addressing, note the following: With page addressing, peripheral byte 255 is assigned for selecting the page. DP Siemens Address ID You can use more than one alternatives to enter the address ID of an ET 200U(DP Siemens) station: as decimal number or as module code, e.g. 8DE or 1AE. COM ET 200 automatically converts the module code into a decimal number or press <F7> (HELP) to obtain a list of all available I/O modules with address ID. You can then select the required ID (first position the cursor in the address ID input field). Note ET 200U(DP Standard) and ET 200U(DP Siemens) use different decimal address IDs. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-9 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 Table 4-1 Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Siemens) Station Order Number of Module Address ID ET 200U (DP Siemens) Address Scope (Byte) Delay Time (ms)1 Address Area Current Consumption (mA) Power Loss (W) Digital Inputs 6ES5 ...: 420-8MA11 4DI or 008 1 2.5 to 5 Digital 16 0.8 421-8MA12 8DI or 009 1 2.3 to 4.5 Digital 34 1.6 422-8MA11 027 2* 3 to 4 Digital or analog 50 4.5 430-8MB11 4DI or 008 1 1.4 to 5 Digital 5 2 430-8MC11 4DI or 008 1 10 to 20 Digital 16 2.8 430-8MD11 4DI or 008 1 10 to 20 Digital 16 2.5 431-8MA11 8DI or 009 1 4 to 5.5 Digital 32 2 431-8MC11 8DI or 009 1 10 to 20 Digital 32 2.5 431-8MD11 8DI or 009 1 10 to 20 Digital 32 3.6 433-8MA11 8DI or 009 1 1 to 10 Digital 6 2.4 437-8EA12 4DI or 008 1 40 Digital 50 0.45 Digital Outputs 6ES5 ...: 440-8MA11 048 1 <1 Digital 15 3 440-8MA21 048 1 <1 Digital 15 4.8 441-8MA11 8DQ or 017 1 <1 Digital 14 3.5 450-8MB11 048 1 <1 Digital 15 5 450-8MD11 4DQ or 016 1 <1 Digital 14 3.5 451-8MA11 8DQ or 017 1 <1 Digital 24 4 451-8MD11 8DQ or 017 1 <1 Digital 25 3.5 451-8MR11 8DQ or 017 1 <1 Digital 30 1.6 451-8MR12 8DQ or 017 1 <1 Digital 30 1.6 452-8MR11 4DQ or 016 1 <1 Digital 14 2 453-8MA11 8DQ or 017 1 <1 Digital 20 1 457-8EA12 048 1 <1 Digital 55 0.5 * The address scope is necessary for the inputs and the outputs (i.e. if the address scope is 2 bytes, 2 bytes are used for the inputs and 2 bytes are used for the outputs). Since COM ET 200 assigns the addresses for these modules optionally, inputs and outputs can have different start addresses. 1 For an input module, the delay time is the time between a signal change at an input and a change of state on the I/O bus. For an output module, the delay time is the time between a signal change on the I/O bus and a change of state at an output. 4-10 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 Table 4-2 Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Siemens) Order Number of Module Address ID ET 200U (DP Siemens) Address Scope (Byte) Delay Time (ms)1 Address Area Analog Current Consumption (mA) Power Loss (W) Analog Inputs 6ES5 ...: 464-8MA111 1-channel: 1-ch.: 1-channel: 464-8MA211 1AI or 012, 2 464-8MB111 2-channel: 464-8MC111 70 0.7 60 100 0.7 2-ch.: 2-channel: 70 0.7 2AI or 013, 4 120 70 0.7 464-8MD111 4-channel: 4-ch.: 4-channel: 70 0.7 464-8ME111 4AI or 015 8 240 70 464-8MF112 1-channel: 1AI or 012, 1-ch: 2 1-channel: 60 Analogg 70 0.9 464-8MF212 2-channel: 2AI or 013 2-ch.: 4 2-channel: 120 Analogg 100 0.9 466-8MC11 2AI or 013 4 20 Analog 100 0.9 467-8EE112 1-channel: 1AI or 012, 1-ch.: 2 1-channel: Analog 320 2-channel: 2AI or 013 2-ch.: 4 2-channel: 0.7 to 1 0.7 to 3 Analog Outputs 6ES5 ...: 470-8MA11 2AQ or 021 4 0.1 Analog 3.1 470-8MA12 2AQ or 021 4 0.15 Analog 3.1 470-8MB11 2AQ or 021 4 0.1 Analog 3.8 470-8MB12 2AQ or 021 4 0.15 Analog 3.8 470-8MC11 2AQ or 021 4 0.1 Analog 3.8 470-8MC12 2AQ or 021 4 0.15 Analog 3.8 470-8MD11 2AQ or 021 4 0.1 Analog 3.1 470-8MD12 2AQ or 021 4 0.15 Analog 3.1 470-8MD21 2AQ or 021 4 Analog 477-8EC11 2AX or 029 4* Analog 350 3.2 * The address scope is necessary for the inputs and the outputs (i.e. if the address scope is 2 bytes, 2 bytes are used for the inputs and 2 bytes are used for the outputs). Since COM ET 200 assigns the addresses for these modules optionally, inputs and outputs can have different start addresses. 1 With these analog modules, you can use one, two, or four channels. 2 With these analog modules, you can use one or two channels. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-11 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 Table 4-3 Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Siemens) Order Number of Module Address ID ET 200U (DP Siemens) Address Scope (Byte) Delay Time (ms)1 Address Area Current Consumption (mA) Power Loss (W) Input/Ouput Module: 482-8MA11 -8MA12 -8MA13 027 2* Digital or analog 4DI/4DI or 008/008 - Digital 50 4.5 Power Supply Module: 935-8ME111 7.5 Simulator Module: 788-8MA11 8DI or 009 8DQ or 017 < 0.2 Digital 1 0.3 30 Timer Module: 380-8MA11 4DX or 024 1* 385-8MA11 4DX or 024 1* 385-8MB11 2AX or 029 4* Digital 10 Digital 20 2.5 Analog 70 1.9 0.3 Counter Modules: 0.18 Comparator Module: 461-8MA11 4DI or 008 1 5 Digital 35 PID Controller Modules:2 262-8MA11 -8MA12 223 8* 100 to 200 Analog 20 262-8MB11 -8MB12 223 8* 100 to 200 Analog 20 120 Position Control Modules: 263-8MA111 223/000 8* Analog 266-8MA11 223 8* Analog 267-8MA11 093 4* Analog 4 150 * The address scope is necessary for the inputs and the outputs (i.e. if the address scope is 2 bytes, 2 bytes are used for the inputs and 2 bytes are used for the outputs). Since COM ET200 assigns the addresses for these modules optionally, inputs and outputs can have different start addresses. 1 The module occupies 2 slots. 2 You can address a PID controller module in an ET 200 system at least every 200 ms. You cannot use function blocks FB61 and FB62. 4-12 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 Table 4-4 Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Siemens) Order Number of Module Address ID ET 200U (DP Siemens) Address Scope (Byte) Delay Time (ms)1 Address Area Current Consumption (mA) Power Loss (W) IP 264 Electronic Cam Controller: 264-8MA111 223/000 8* Analog 120 4 223 8* Analog 223 8* Analog 180 1.6 521-8MA21 223 8* Analog 140 1.2 330-8MA11 or no module plugged in 000 0 IP 265 High Speed Sub Control : 265-8MA012 CP 521 BASIC: 521-8MB11 CP 521 SI: 0 * The address scope is necessary for the inputs and the outputs (i.e. if the address scope is 2 bytes, 2 bytes are used for the inputs and 2 bytes are used for the outputs). Since COM ET200 assigns the addresses for these modules optionally, inputs and outputs can have different start addresses. 1 The module occupies 2 slots. 2 IP 265 can be operated in Slow Mode only. Please refer to Section 4.2.1 for the Slow Mode setting. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-13 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 When configuring, if you put the cursor in an input field of a slot that has already been configured, COM ET 200 automatically fills in the module start addresses in the "Module address: I: Q: " output field as follows: In the "I" field module start address for the input modules In the "Q" field module start address for the output modules Finish Configuration After you have defined the parameters, configuration is completed: 1. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the configuration for each configured station. Result: The configuration is stored in the file that has been preset. COM ET 200 automatically guarantees that areas that must be transferred consistently are also marked as consistent areas (e.g. that each analog value is transferred separately in one message frame, i.e. consistently over an area of two bytes). By pressing the function keys you can activate the following functions: If you want to do the following: Then press the following key: Name of the function key Display the configuration of the next higher (configured) station <F1> STATION + Display the configuration of the next lower (configured) station <F2> STATION - Delete the configuration of the station that you are currently configuring <F3> DELETE STATION Configure a new station (COM ET 200 selects the number of the next nonconfigured station automatically) <F4> NEW STATION Switch to the STATION-ORIENTED ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT screen <F5> ADRESS ASSIGN. Confirm the station configuration that you just input <F6> ENTER Know what entries are permitted in a specific input field <F7> HELP Return to the FUNCTIONS screen <F8> EXIT 4-14 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 4.1.2 How to Proceed if the Configuration is Modified at a Later Point Expanding the Slave Station at a Later Point You know what the final configuration of a station will be, but you do not have all the modules available, or you want to add some modules later. 1. Configure the station according to your final plan. In this way you specify the module start addresses for all the I/O modules initially, even for those that you have not added on yet. 2. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the configuration. 3. Put the cursor in the input field for the slot that is not occupied yet. 4. Overwrite the address ID with "000". 5. Press <F6> (ENTER) to reconfirm the configuration. Overwriting the address ID with "000" maintains the address space for the original module. When you plug in the missing module later, you must reconfigure as follows: 1. Replace the "000" ID with the original address ID. 2. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the configuration. Expanding an Already Configured Slave Station You want to add some I/O modules to a station that you have already configured. 1. In the CONFIGURING screen, press <F4> (NEW STATION) to select the number of the station that you want to expand. COM ET 200 displays the configuration of the selected station. The "1st available address" input field shows the address that will be assigned to the additional module. 2. Enter the address ID of the additional module at the next available slot. 3. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the configuration. After you enter the new configuration, additional modules may have addresses that are out of sequence with the addresses of the originally configured modules. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-15 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 Modifying an Already Configured Slave Station You want to replace one module with a different module in a station that you have already configured. 1. In the CONFIGURING screen, press <F4> (NEW STATION) to select the number of the station that you want to change. COM ET 200 displays the configuration of the selected station. The "1st available address" input field shows the address that will be assigned to the new module. 2. Overwrite the address ID of the old module with the address ID of the new module. 3. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the configuration. The new module has a module start address that is not consecutive in the order of the addresses of the stations that you configured previously. The start address reflects a jump in addressing. The address space that the old module took up is released and could be used for a module with the same address ID. If you wanted to put a module in such a slot, you would have to edit the "1st available address" field. However, this is not recommended. 4-16 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 4.2 Starting Up and Testing with COM ET 200 for ET 200U(DP Siemens) In this Section The following describes How the station number and switch 8 are set ( Section 4.2.1) How you connect the ET 200U to the programmer ( Section 4.2.2) and How you use the COM ET 200 "START-UP/TEST" screen ( Section 4.2.3). ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-17 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 4.2.1 Setting the Station No. and Switch 8 Setting the Station Number Use the bank of switches of the ET 200U interface module to set the station number of your ET 200U station ( Figure 4-5). Set the station number in binary code. Each of the first seven switches on the bank of switches has a different positional value. When switch is pressed (ON): the positional value is switched on 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Positional value: 1 8 Table 4-5 Positional value: 2 Positional value: 4 Positional value: 8 When switch is "ON" Positional value: 16 Positional value: 32 Positional value: 64 Figure 4-5 Location of the Bank of Switches for Setting the Station Number 4-18 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 Setting Switch 8 The function of switch 8 varies, depending on the ET 200U interface module ordered: Table 4-5 Example Function of Switch 8 Order No. Function 318-8MB11 ON: The I/O bus speed is reduced ("Slow Mode"). 318-8MB12 DP-Norm (DP Standard): Bus protocol to Draft Standard PROFIBUS-DP (can be used as from COM ET 200 version 4.0). DP-Siemens: Bus protocol to DP Siemens. The ET 200U automatically switches into the slow mode when it identifies an IP 265. Set station number 52 and DP-Siemens: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press switch (position "ON") Positional value: 4 +16 +32 52 8 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-19 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 4.2.2 Starting Up an ET 200U Slave Station After setting the station number on the bank of switches on the IM 318-B interface module, proceed as follows to start up and test your ET 200U slave station: 1. Use a CP 5410 S5-DOS/ST programmer-bus interface to link your programmer directly to the ET 200U interface module. 2. Call up the SYSTEM START-UP/TEST screen of the COM ET 200 software package (press <F5> in the FUNCTIONS screen). 3. In the Station number: input field, enter the number of the connected ET 200U slave station. 4. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the input. Result: COM ET 200 establishes a link to the connected station, assigns parameters to the station, and displays the SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: MODULE SELECTION screen if the configuration in the program file and the actual station configuration match. If the two configurations do not match, COM ET 200 reports an error in the message line. In such a case, you must go to the CONFIGURATION screen to correct the station configuration. ! Caution If you use a programmer on the bus to start up an ET 200U slave station while the bus is operating continuously, note the following: The IM 308-B interface module (in the master station) cannot control the slave station as long as the programmer has access to the slave station. The following section describes the start-up and test for an ET 200U(DP Siemens) slave station. 4-20 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 4.2.3 Using the SYSTEM START-UP/TEST Screen for an ET 200U(DP Siemens) Slave Station For starting up an ET 200U slave station, COM ET 200 provides two screens. Select up to 6 slots in the SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: MODULE SELECTION screen. Then call up the SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: STATUS/CONTROL screen. Proceed as follows: 1. Using the cursor control keys and <F5> (SELECT), select a maximum of 6 slots (modules) whose input data you want to evaluate or whose outputs you want to force. Result: The selected modules are marked with an asterisk "*". Pressing <F5> (SELECT) a second time cancels the selection. Program file selected: TEST@@ET.200 SYSTEM START-UP / TEST: MODULE SELECTION SIMATIC S5 / COM ET 200 Station number: 4 Station name: Station type: ET 200U PRESS Configuration: 0.* 027 1.* 4AX 2.* 4DI 3.* 4DQ 4.* 8DX 5.* 4AI 6. 4AI 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 SELECT ENTER F7 F8 EXIT Figure 4-6 SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: MODULE SELECTION Screen ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-21 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 2. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the selection. Result: The SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: STATUS/CONTROL screen appears: Program file selected: B:TEST@@ET.200 SYSTEM START-UP / TEST: STATUS/CONTROL SIMATIC S5 / COM ET 200 Station number: 4 Station type: ET 200U Station name: PRESS Station diagnostics: Station cannot be controlled by PLC Slot 00 01 02 03 04 05 F1 F1 Type 027 4AX 4DI 4DQ 8DX 4AI F2 F2 Outputs KM= 00000000 00000000 KH= 0000 0000 0000 0000 KM= 0000 KM= 00000000 F3 F3 Diagnost. Inputs KM= 01000100 01011100 KH= 10E0 0032 0104 0014 KM= 0000 * KM= 00001110 KH= 0004 0012 101B 1AA4 F4 F4 F5 F5 F6 F6 F7 F7 F8 F8 ENTER HELP EXIT Figure 4-7 SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: STATUS/CONTROL Screen 4-22 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 STATUS/FORCE Function Press<F7> (HELP) to change KF format (fixed point number) to KH format (hexadecimal number) and vice versa. 3. Specify the status of the outputs that you want to force. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the status. Result: At the end of every cycle, COM ET 200 transfers output data to the selected station. The software requests input data and (station) diagnostics data. If problems occur, fault messages appear as text in the STATION DIAGNOSTICS field. The assignment of the function keys changes: F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 STOP F8 EXIT To freeze the screen, that is, to stop the update of the input fields, proceed as follows: 4. Press <F6> (STOP). Now you can set the outputs again. STATUS Function COM ET 200 displays the state of the inputs in the INPUTS field in KM format for digital modules or in KH format for analog modules. Example Inputs for a 464-8MA21 module (module ID 4AI, analog module): Channel KH = 4 3 2 1 0001 1E00 00A0 0250 FORCE Function In the OUTPUTS field, you can change the state of individual outputs (always shown as 0 when this screen appears). COM ET 200 displays the state of the outputs in KM format for digital modules or in KH format for analog modules. Example Outputs for a 482-8MA12 module (module ID 027, digital module): FORCE with Load Circuit Bit 15 KM = 0110 8 7 0010 0001 0 0001 You can execute the FORCE function with the load circuit turned on or off as follows: FORCE with load circuit turned off :You can observe the effect of the forced outputs for digital modules by checking the output LEDs. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-23 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 FORCE with load circuit turned on :You can observe the effect of the forced outputs directly at the I/Os. Caution ! Setting outputs when the load circuit is turned on can result in dangerous system states. Set or reset outputs only under the circumstances listed in the following table! Table 4-6 Resetting Outputs with Load Circuit Turned on Version Outputs are Reset ... IM 308-B (up to version 4) or E(E)PROM programmed as version v 2* When you power up the IM 308-B IM 308-B (from version 5) and E(E)PROM programmed as version w 3* When you call up the "MODULE *: 4-24 Outputs are not Reset ... master interface module (STOP RUN transition) When you call up the "MODULE SELECTION" screen. When you reset the outputs in the "MODULE SELECTION" screen. When you exit from the "MODULE SELECTION" screen with <F8> (EXIT). SELECTION" screen. When you reset the outputs in the "MODULE SELECTION" screen. When you exit from the "MODULE SELECTION" screen with <F8> (EXIT). When you power up the IM 308-B master interface module (STOP to RUN transition) The E(E)PROM version is defined when programming the E(E)PROM. If you have selected <F3> (as in version 2) after the message "Evaluation of diagnosis in CPU to DP Standard? (<F3>: as in version 2)" has been displayed, the E(E)PROM is programmed as in version 2. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 4.3 Diagnosing Faults for ET 200U(DP Siemens) In this Section This section describes three alternatives for diagnosing faults: Using LEDs to diagnose problems ( Section 4.3.1) Using COM ET 200 to diagnose problems( Section 4.3.2) Diagnosing faults with STEP 5 ( Section 4.3.3) Diagnosing faults with COM ET 200 in a STEP 5 program is described in detail in the "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-25 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 4.3.1 Using LEDs to Diagnose Problems Figure 4-8 Fault LEDs on the ET 200U Interface Module Table 4-7 LED Fault Messages on ET 200U Interface Module LED Optical Signal Explanation RUN Lit Normal operation (load voltage supply available) BUS-FAULT Lit Response time has run out and the IM 318-B interface module was not addressed. During system start-up or power up: IM 318-B not parameterized yet. No connection between SINEC L2-DP bus and slave station. IM-FAULT 4-26 Lit or flashing There is a fault in the I/O bus (e.g. a bus unit is defective). BUS-FAULT and IM-FAULT Lit There is a hardware fault in the ET 200U interface module. BUS-FAULT and IM-FAULT Flashing The configured station address is not within the permitted range (3 to 124). ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 4.3.2 Using COM ET 200 to Diagnose Problems The COM ET 200 software provides the DIAGNOSTICS screen for diagnostics functions. The following are prerequisites for using the diagnostics function: You have a programmer with a CP 5410 S5-DOS/ST programmer-bus interface connected to the SINEC L2-DP bus. You indicated "Programmer connected to the bus: Y" in the ET 200 SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen. 1. Press <F6> (DIAGNOSE) in the FUNCTIONS screen to call up the DIAGNOSTICS: OVERVIEW screen. Result: The "DIAGNOSTICS: OVERVIEW" screen appears. SIMATIC S5 / COM ET 200 Program file selected: C: TEST@@ET.200 DIAGNOSTICS: OVERVIEW Station type: DP Master / V x.y Station number: 1 System name: Test system 4712 Station number: 3 5 14 15 26 F1 37 F2 48 F3 123 F4 Channel diagnost. Figure 4-9 F5 F6 F7 F8 EXIT DIAGNOSTICS: OVERVIEW Screen ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-27 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 COM ET 200 displays the following: The station number and the system name of the master station The firmware version of the IM 308-B interface module (in the master station) The numbers of the stations for which diagnostics data is available 2. Press <F1> (CHANNEL DIAGNOST.) Result: COM ET 200 asks for a station number. 3. In the STATION NUMBER input field, enter the number of the faulty station that you want to investigate further. 4. Press <F6> (ENTER) to be able to evaluate the diagnostics messages of this station. Result: COM ET 200 goes to another screen. The screen that appears next depends on the type of station you are investigating. Program file selected: TEST$$ET.200 Individual Diagnostics SIMATIC S5 / COM ET 200 Station number: 123 Station type: ET 200U Station name: Test station 1 Station diagnostics: Parameterization error Configuration: Faulty modules are marked with '*' 0. 8DI 8. 1.* 8DI 9. 2.* 8DQ 10. 3. 8DQ 11. 4. 5. 6. 7. 12. 13. 14. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 15 . 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 EXIT Figure 4-10 4-28 INDIVIDUAL DIAGNOSTICS Screen ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 4.3.3 Diagnosing Faults with STEP 5 (Station Diagnostics) General Remarks on Diagnostics With STEP 5 you can systematically localize and evaluate a fault: Table 4-8 Diagnostics with STEP 5 Diagnostics ... Diagnostics overview Records all stations which have diagnostics data pending. Diagnostics for parameter assign. and addressability Records all stations which can be parameterized and addressed. Station status Provides data on the status of the slave stations. Station diagnostics Provides general data on the status of the slave stations. Module diagnostics Localizes the defective module in the ET 200U slave station. The diagnostics for parameter assignment and addressability and the diagnostics overview are described in the "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual, as they are applied to all slave stations. To avoid misunderstandings, the two diagnostics bytes of the diagnostics word are referred to in this chapter as the "diagnostics address" and "diagnostics address + 1". The load and transfer operations in this chapter refer to the default diagnostics address 252. If more than one diagnostics message is displayed, the last message remains on the screen. Special Features of Requesting Diagnostics Using Page Addressing When using page addressing, the diagnostics word is located in the basic page. Before you request diagnostics as described in this chapter, you must first of all "switch over" to the basic page number. Example The P area is addressed via pages. The basic page number of the IM 308-B interface module is "0" (P0). You want to request and evaluate diagnostics overview. You have accepted the default diagnostics address 252. L T L T KB PY KY PW 0 255 127,n , 252 L PW 252 L KH 0000 !=F BEC JU FBx FB ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Page selection age se ect o Request diagnostics overview ((n = 0,, 1,, 2 to 7)) q g Evaluate l the h diagnostics di i wordd F lt? Fault? Evaluate E l t the th fault f lt in i FBx FB 4-29 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 Structure and Request of Station Diagnostics for ET 200U The station status, the station diagnostics and the identifier-related diagnostics (module diagnostics) are described in this manual as they are typical for the ET 200U slave station. The diagnostics function is loaded and transferred: L KY (Station number),(code) Station number: 3 to 124 Code: 0, ..., 7 Afterwards the station diagnostics is transferred into the "diagnostics address" byte (here I/O byte 252) T PW 252 16 bytes per slave station are reserved for station status, station diagnostics and module diagnostics. The 16 bytes are organized in 8 words. They are structured as follows: Table 4-9 Code Diagnostics Address Diagnostics Address + 1 0 Station status 1 Station status 2 1 Station status 3 Master address 2 4-30 Structure of Station Diagnostics and Module Diagnostics Manufacturer identification 3 Header Station diagnostics 4 Header Module diagnostics (slots 0 to 7) 5 Module diagnostics (slots 8 to 15) Module diagnostics (slots 16 to 23) 6 Module diagnostics (slots 24 to 31) Unassigned 7 Unassigned Unassigned ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 Request Station Status The bytes "station status 1 to 3" give information on the station. In the "master address" byte, the address of the master station, which has parameterized the slave station is indicated. L KY n,0 T PW 252 The number of the slave station (n = station number) of which the station status is requested must be stored in the "diagnostics address" byte; in the "diagnostics address + 1" byte, the code for "station status 1 and station status 2" (= 0) has to be stored or L KY n,1 T PW 252 "Station status 3 and master address" (= 1) The IM 308-B then writes the diagnostics message into the I/O word "diagnostics address". Read Station Status L KH 0004 or L KH 0000 L PW 252 !=F BEC JU FBx ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b If code = 0 or If code = 1 and master station number = 1 Load diagnostics word No fault? Evaluate fault in FBx. 4-31 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 Diagnostics Word "Station status 1 and station status 2", code = 0 Diagnostics address "Station status 1" 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Diagnostics address + 1 "Station status 2" 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1: Slave must be reparameterized. 1: Slave station cannot continue operation if the fault has not been remedied. 1: Bit is always "1". 1: Response monitoring has been activated. 0: Bit is always "0". 0: Bit is always "0". 1: Slave station has not been configured with COM ET 200. 0: Bit is always "0". 1: Slave station cannot be accessed. 1: Slave station is not yet ready for data exchange. 1: The configuration data sent from the master to the slave station do not corre- spond with the structure of the slave station. 1: Station diagnostics or module diagnostics are in operation. 0: Bit is always "0". 0: Bit is always "0". 1: Slave station is not an ET 200U (parameter assignment error). 1: Slave station has been parameterized from another master. Figure 4-11 Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of the Station Status (Station Status 1 and Station Status 2) Diagnostics Word "Station status 3 and master address", code = 1 Diagnostics address "Station status 3" 7 6 5 4 3 2 Irrelevant 1 Diagnostics address + 1 "Master address" 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address of master which has parameterized the slave station Figure 4-12 Structure of the Diagnost. Word after Request of the Station Status (Station Status 3 and Master Address) 4-32 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 Request Manufacturer Identification The "manufacturer identification" byte describes the type of slave station. The number of the slave station (n = station number) from which the manufacturer identification is requested must be stored in the byte "diagnostics address"; in the byte "diagnostics address + 1" the code for the "manufacturer identification" (= 2) has to be stored. L KY n,2 T PW 252 Diagnostics Word "Manufacturer identification", code = 2 Diagnostics address Diagnost. address + 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Manufacturer identification for ET 200U(DP Siemens) slave station (8002H) Figure 4-13 Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of the Manufacturer Identification ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-33 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 Request Station Diagnostics The station diagnostics provides general information on the ET 200U slave station. The number of the slave station (n 0 station number) from which station diagnostics is requested must be stored in the "diagnostics address" byte; the code for "station diagnostics" (= 3) is to be stored in the "diagnostics address + 1" byte. L KY n,3 T PW 252 The IM 308-B interface module then writes the diagnostics message in the I/O word "diagnostics address". Read Station Diagnostics L KH 0201 L PW 252 !=F BEC JU FBx Load diagnostics word No fault? Evaluate fault in the FBx. Diagnostics Word "Header" and "Station diagnostics", code = 3 7 Diagnostics address "Header" 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Diagnost. address + 1 "Station diagnost." 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1: Slave station in slow mode. r - e Code for station diagnost. Length of station diagnostics incl. "Header" (Length = 2 bytes) 0: Bit is always "0". 0: Bit is always "0". 1: Module withdrawn or bus unit defective. 1: Load voltage missing or output short circuit of M (only for a module with diagnostics). 1: An output has been activated incorrectly (short circuit of L+; only for a module with diagnostics) 0: Bit is always "0". 0: Bit is always "0". Figure 4-14 Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Station Diagnostics 4-34 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 Request Module Diagnostics Module diagnostics tells you which module in the ET 200U slave station is faulty. The number of the slave station (n = station number) from which module diagnostics is requested must be stored in the "diagnostics address" byte; in the "diagnostics address + 1" byte, the code for "header" and "module diagnostics (slots 0 to 7)" (= 4) is to be stored L KY n,4 T PW 252 or "Module diagnostics (slots 8 to 15) and (slots 16 to 23)" (= 5) L KY n,5 T PW 252 or "Module diagnostics (slots 24 to 31)" (= 6) L KY n,6 T PW 252 The IM 308-B interface module then writes the diagnostics message into the I/O word "diagnostics address". Read Module Diagnostics L KH 4500 or L KH 0000 L PW 252 !=F BEC JU FBx If code = 4 or if code = 5, 6 Load diagnostics word No fault? Evaluate fault in the FBx. Diagnostics Word "Header" and "Module diagnostics (slots 0 to 7)", code = 4 7 Diagnostics address "Header" 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 Diagnost. address + 1 "Slots 0 to 7" 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 1: Module in slot "0" faulty. e fur grup- diag- e Code for module diagnostics Length of module diagnostics incl. "Header" (Length = 5 bytes) 1: Module in slot "1" faulty. 1: Module in slot "7" faulty. Figure 4-15 Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Header and Slots 0 to 7) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4-35 ET 200U(DP Siemens): AddressAssignment,Starting-Up,Diagnosing Faults Using COMET200 Diagnostics Word "Module diagnostics (slots 8 to 15 and 16 to 23)", code = 5 7 Diagnostics address "Slots 8 to 15" 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Diagnost. address + 1 "Slots 16 to. 23" 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1: Module in slot "16" faulty. 1: Module in slot "17" faulty. 1: Module in slot "23" faulty. 1: Module in slot "8" faulty. 1: Module in slot "15" faulty. Figure 4-16 Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Slots 8 to 15 and 16 to 23) Diagnostics Word "Module diagnostics (slots 24 to 31)", code = 6 Diagnostics address "Slots 24 to 31" 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Diagnost. address + 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Unassigned 1: Module in slot "24" faulty. 1: Module in slot "31" faulty. Figure 4-17 Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Slots 24 to 31) 4-36 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): Address Assignment, Starting UP and Diagnosing Faults Using COM ET 200 5 Prerequisites for this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is DP Standard? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-2 5-2 5.1 Assigning Addresses Using COM ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying the Type File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5-3 5-3 5.1.1 Using the CONFIGURING Screen for ET 200U(DP Standard) . . . . . . . . . "Station Number" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Area" ....................................................... "Station Type" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Next Available Address" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Address Assignment Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condition 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condition 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example Division of the Digital/Analog I/O Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DP Standard Address ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help for Input of Unknown Address IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finish Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-6 5-7 5-7 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-9 5-9 5-14 5-15 5-17 5.1.2 How to Proceed if the Configuration is Modified at a Later Point . . . . . . . . Expanding the Slave Station at a Later Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expanding an Already Configured Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying an Already Configured Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-19 5.2 Starting Up and Testing with COM ET 200 for ET 200U(DP Standard) . . In this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 5-20 5.2.1 Setting the Station No. and Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Station Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of an "318-8MB12" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 5-21 5-22 5-22 5.2.2 Starting Up an ET 200U Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 5.2.3 Using the SYSTEM START-UP/TEST Screen for an ET 200U(DP Standard) Slave Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Messages in the "...:STATUS/FORCE" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . STATUS/FORCE Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STATUS Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FORCE Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-26 5-26 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): Address Assignment, Starting Up, Diagnosing Faults FORCE with Load Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 5.3 Diagnosing Faults for ET 200U(DP Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 5-28 5.3.1 Using LEDs to Diagnose Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 5.3.2 Using COM ET 200 to Diagnose Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 5.3.3 Diagnosing Faults with STEP 5 (Station Diagnostics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Remarks on Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features of Requesting Diagnostics Using Page Addressing . . . Structure and Request of Station Diagnostics for ET 200U . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Station Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Station Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Manufacturer Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Station Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Station Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request Module Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Module Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 5-32 5-32 5-33 5-34 5-34 5-36 5-37 5-37 5-38 5-38 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): Address Assignment, Starting Up, Diagnosing Faults Figures 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 ET 200U(DP Standard): CONFIGURING Screen (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200U(DP Standard): CONFIGURING screen (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200U(DP Standard): CONFIGURING Screen (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of Process I/O Image with ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of Parameterization Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the Bank of Switches for Setting the Station Number . . . . . . . SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: MODULE SELECTION Screen . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: STATUS/CONTROL Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault LEDs on the ET 200U Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAGNOSTICS: OVERVIEW Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INDIVIDUAL DIAGNOSTICS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of the Station Status (Station Status 1 and Station Status 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnost. Word after Request of the Station Status (Station Status 3 and Master Address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of the Manufacturer Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Station Diagnostics . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Header and Slots 0 to 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Slots 8 to 15 and 16 to 23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Slots 24 to 31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-16 5-21 5-24 5-25 5-29 5-30 5-31 Names of the Type Files for the ET 200U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard) Station . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard) Station . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard) Station . . . . . . Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of Parameters in the DP-IDENTIFIER Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meaning of the Parameters in the Parameterization Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . Function of Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting Outputs with Load Circuit Turned On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Fault Messages on ET 200U Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics with STEP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of Station Diagnostics and Module Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-16 5-22 5-27 5-29 5-32 5-33 5-35 5-35 5-36 5-37 5-38 5-39 5-39 Tables 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): Address Assignment, Starting UP and Diagnosing Faults Using COM ET 200 Prerequisites for this Chapter 5 This chapter is based on the "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual. The fundamentals of the COM ET 200 are described in the "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual. A major feature of COM ET 200 is the address assignment. Notes on the type of address assignment (linear addressing or page addressing) are given in the "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual. Address assignment, starting-up and the fault diagnosing procedures depend on the type of slave station. This chapter deals with the procedures applicable for ET 200U(DP Standard), using COM ET 200. In this Chapter This chapter describes how to use COM ET 200 and STEP 5 for an ET 200U(DP Standard) module: The following features are described: Address assignment using the CONFIGURING screen ( Section 5.1) Starting-up and testing using the START-UP/TEST screen ( Section 5.2) Diagnosing faults using the DIAGNOSTICS screen ( Section 5.3) For Reference To quickly look up important parameters, please refer to: Address IDs for ET 200U(DP Standard) ( Table 5-2, Section 5.1.1) Setting the station number and switches (bank of switches) ( Section 5.2.1) Explanation of LEDs ( Table 5-10, Section 5.3.1) Diagnostics word for ET 200U(DP Standard) ( Table 5-12, Section 5.3.3) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-1 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 What is DP Standard? DP Standard is explained in detail in Chapter 1. An ET 200U interface module with the Order No. 6ES5 318-8MB12 or an ET 200U interface module with the Order No. 6ES5 318-8MC11, using the "DP-Standard" bus protocol is called ET 200U(DP Standard). DP Standard refers to the PROFIBUS-DP (DIN 19245, Part 3) draft standard. The bank of switches is used to select the bus protocol according to DP Standard. The bank of switches is described in Section 5.2.1. Requirements for Operation An ET 200U(DP Standard) can be started up using COM ET 200 (version 4.0) and the IM 308-B master interface module, version 5 (printed on the module) or as from software version 4.0 (can be read out using COM ET 200). An ET 200U station with Order No. 6ES5 318-8MB12 can be operated using previous versions of COM ET 200 and the IM 308-B. For this purpose, switch 8 must be set to "DP Siemens". The ET 200U station with Order No. 6ES5 318-8MB12 is then operated as an ET 200U(DP Siemens) station. For details on ET 200U(DP Siemens), please refer to Chapter 4. Note It is always possible to operate the ET 200U(DP Siemens) und ET 200U(DP Standard) distributed I/O units in parallel on one bus. 5-2 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 5.1 Assigning Addresses Using COM ET 200 In this Section This section describes the typical address assignment for ET 200U(DP Standard). You will learn how to use the COM ET 200 CONFIGURING screen to configure the ET 200U(DP Standard) distributed I/O station. Section 5.1.1 deals with configuring the ET 200U(DP Standard). Section deals 5.1.2 with special configuring requirements. Copying the Type File The relevant type file is required for configuring an ET 200U with Order No. "6ES5 318-8MB12" or "6ES5 318-8MC11" by means of COM ET 200. The type files have the following names: Table 5-1 Names of the Type Files for the ET 200U Name Meaning SI8008TD.200 SI8008TE.200 SI8008TF.200 SI8008TS.200 SI8008TI.200 Type file for "6ES5 318-8MB12" in German English French Spanish Italian SI8009TD.200 SI8009TE.200 SI8009TF.200 SI8009TS.200 SI8009TI.200 Type file for "6ES5 318-8MC11" in German English French Spanish Italian The type file for the "6ES5 318-8MB12" is supplied together with the COM ET 200, V 4.0. The type file for the "6ES5 318-8MC11" is available together with the "ET 200U Distributed I/O System" manual. It must be copied into the COM ET 200 directory: Installation under S5-DOS/ST (MS-DOS): Copy the type files into the COM ET 200 directory using the command PCOPY 0A:*.200 C:\COMET200. Installation under S5-DOS/ST (PCP/M): Copy the type files into the user area of the programmer, which also contains COM ET 200 using the command PIP C:=A:*.200g0rvw. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-3 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 5.1.1 Using the CONFIGURING Screen for ET 200U(DP Standard) In the CONFIGURING screen, you assign for each ET 200U(DP Standard): the specific modules to specific slots of the slave station and the start addresses of the individual modules. The following steps describe the procedure you must follow to configure your ET 200U(DP Standard) slave station, from creating the configuration data to storing it: 1. Make the appropriate entries in the ET 200 SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen ( "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual). After you confirm the ET 200 system parameters with the <F6> (ENTER) key 2. press <F8> to return to the FUNCTIONS screen. 3. From the FUNCTIONS screen, press <F2> to go to the CONFIGURING screen. Result: The CONFIGURING screen appears. SIMATIC S5 / COM ET 200 Program file selected: TEST@@@@ET.200 CONFIGURING Station number: 3 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 ENTER HELP EXIT Figure 5-1 ET 200U(DP Standard): CONFIGURING Screen (1) 5-4 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 "Station Number" An ET 200U(DP Standard) must have a station number only in the range from 3 to 124. You cannot enter the station number of an additional active station here (if you specified one in the ET 200 SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen). When pressing <F7> (HELP) - the cursor must be positioned in the "station number" field - a window is displayed showing all station numbers and station types assigned so far. You can select a station and output its configuration. If station numbers have not been assigned yet, the message NO STATIONS CONFIGURED is output. 4. If necessary, correct the station number that appears on the screen and press <F6> (ENTER) to complete your entry. Result: If the station whose number you entered has already been configured, its configuration appears on the screen after you complete your entry. If the station whose number you entered has not already been configured, two additional entry fields appear: Program file selected: TEST@@@@ET.200 CONFIGURING Station number: 3 F1 F2 Station type: Area: F3 SIMATIC S5 / COM ET 200 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 ENTER HELP EXIT Figure 5-2 ET 200U(DP Standard): CONFIGURING screen (2) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-5 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 "Area" If you entered "N" for the ET 200 system parameter "Dual-port RAM addr.", you must select one of the permissible areas for linear addressing (P or Q). If you entered "Y" for the ET 200 system parameter "Dual-port RAM addr.", you must enter the abbreviation of the peripheral area (P or Q) and the dual- port RAM page number. The permissible dual-port RAM page numbers are derived from the basic dual-port RAM page number). Examples: "P0" for page number 0 in the P peripheral area. "Q1" for page number 1 in the Q peripheral area. "Station Type" Press <F7> (HELP) to select the station type: If you want to use an ... as ET 200U(DP Standard), ... select the following: "IM 318-8MB12" ET 200U-DP "IM 318-8MC11'" ET 200U-DP/FMS 5. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm your entries. Result: COM ET 200 accepts the entries and fills the screen (: Configuration field): SIMATIC S5 / COM ET 200 Program file selected: TEST@@ET.200 CONFIGURING Station number: 3 Area: Station type: ET 200U-DP P Station name: Next available address: DI: DQ: AI: AQ: Configuration: Module address: (Shift F6: DP slave parameterization frame) I: Q: 0. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 STATION + STATION - DELETE STATION NEW STATION ADDRESS ASSIGN. ENTER HELP EXIT Figure 5-3 ET 200U(DP Standard): CONFIGURING Screen (3) 5-6 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 6. Assign a station name if desired (all keyboard characters are permissible). "Next Available Address" Under the "Station name" field is the "Next available address" field with areas for four entries. When you configure for the first time in the program file that you set up, all four first available addresses are assigned as 0. If a slave station has already been configured, each entry field shows the address of the first available byte for the following areas: DI (digital input modules) DQ (digital output modules) AI (analog input modules) AQ (analog output modules) COM ET 200 updates the "Next available address" input fields immediately after you enter a valid address ID for a slot in the "Configuration" field of this screen. However, before you configure an ET 200U (DP Standard) slave station, you must take the following steps: Separate the areas for digital and analog modules so that addresses do not overlap. Communications processors (CPs) and intelligent I/O modules (IPs) count here as analog modules. Determine the structure of your stations. Additions and changes that you make later result in address assignments that can be confusing to read or otherwise unclear. Special Address Assignment Conditions CPUs 941, 942, 943 and 944 of the S5-115U/H PLC series generate the process I/O image word-by-word. This may result in two slave stations being addressed within one word or the address of the first slave station ending exactly in the middle of one word and the address of the second slave station starting at the same position. PII PIQ Address 0: Station 1 Address 0: Station 1 1: Station 2 1: Station 2 Station 2 2: Station 2 2: 3: Station 2 3: Station 2 4: Station 2 4: Station 2 Figure 5-4 Example of Process I/O Image with ET 200 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-7 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 If an input/output value is read in via the process I/O image, the following conditions may result: Condition 1 Assumption: Failure of station 1 in the PII or in the PIQ The CPUs 941 to 944 detect a failure of station 1 since they read in/write the process I/O image word-by-word. Therefore, the CPUs do not read/write address 0 in the process I/O image of station 2, although station 2 is available. The CPU stops with timeout (if in COM ET 200 "timeout = yes"). After a transition from STOP to RUN, the CPU switches again to RUN. Station 1 and address 1 of station 2 are not entered in the process I/O image. Condition 2 Assumption: Failure of station 2 PII: The CPUs 941 to 944 detect a failure of station 2 since they read in the process I/O image word-by-word. The CPU stops with timeout (if in COM ET 200 "timeout = yes"). The CPU remains in the STOP mode even after a transition from STOP to RUN. PIQ: The CPUs 941 to 944 detect a failure of station 2 since they read in/ write the process I/O image word-by-word. Therefore, the CPUs do not read/write address 0 in the process I/O image of station 1, although station 1 is available. The CPU stops with timeout (if in COM ET 200 "timeout = yes"). After a transition from STOP to RUN, the CPU switches again to RUN. Station 2 and address 0 of station 1 are not entered in the process I/O image. Note To avoid the above conditions, note the following when addressing CPUs 941 to 944: 1. Use load and transfer commands. These commands work on a byte-by- byte basis and are thus able to identify the presence of each individual byte. 2. Assign an even number as address start in a slave station (e.g. 0, 2, 4, 6, ...) and do not use the uneven address numbers. This enables you to access the process I/O image. Example Division of the Digital/Analog I/O Areas Example division of the digital and analog I/O areas: 1. Accept "0" as the next available address for DI and DQ modules. 2. Enter "128" as next available address for AI and AQ modules. This division corresponds to the usual SIMATIC division of the P area. However, you can separate the areas according to your needs. 5-8 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Configuring The numbers above the input fields in the "Configuration" field designate the slots of the ET 200U (DP Standard) slave station. 1. Assign a proper address ID to each module in the ET 200U(DP Standard) station (see following tables). Assign the slots in ascending order. Do not skip any slot. If you have a slot that you are not going to use, enter "000" as the address for that slot. Note Please refer to Section 3.1 for the numbering of slots in case of a multi-tier configuration. If you are using page addressing, note the following: With page addressing, peripheral byte 255 is assigned for selecting the page. DP Standard Address ID You can use more than one alternative to enter the address ID of an ET 200U(DP Standard) station: as decimal number (according to the PROFIBUS-DP draft standard) or as module code, e.g. 8DE or 1AE. COM ET 200 automatically converts the module code into a decimal number or press <F7> (HELP) to obtain a list of all available I/O modules with address ID. You can then select the required ID (first position the cursor in the address ID input field). Note ET 200U(DP Standard) and ET 200U(DP Siemens) use different decimal address IDs. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-9 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Table 5-2 Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard) Station Order No. of Module Address ID ET 200U(DP Standard) Order Code Address Scope (Byte) Delay Time (ms)1 Address Area Decimal No. Current Consumption (mA) Power Loss (W) Digital Inputs 6ES5 ...: 420-8MA11 8DI 016 1 2.5 to 5 Digital 16 0.8 421-8MA12 8DI 016 1 2.3 to 4.5 Digital 34 1.6 23 3 to 4 Digital or analog 50 4.5 017 or 0802 422-8MA11 - 430-8MB11 8DI 016 1 1.4 to 5 Digital 5 2 430-8MC11 8DI 016 1 10 to 20 Digital 16 2.8 430-8MD11 8DI 016 1 10 to 20 Digital 16 2.5 431-8MA11 8DI 016 1 4 to 5.5 Digital 32 2 431-8MC11 8DI 016 1 10 to 20 Digital 32 2.5 431-8MD11 8DI 016 1 10 to 20 Digital 32 3.6 433-8MA11 8DI 016 1 1 to 10 Digital 6 2.4 437-8EA12 8DI 016 1 40 Digital 50 0.45 Digital Outputs 6ES5 ...: 440-8MA11 8DQ 032 1 <1 Digital 15 3 440-8MA21 8DQ 032 1 <1 Digital 15 4.8 441-8MA11 8DQ 032 1 <1 Digital 14 3.5 450-8MB11 8DQ 032 1 <1 Digital 15 5 450-8MD11 8DQ 032 1 <1 Digital 14 3.5 451-8MA11 8DQ 032 1 <1 Digital 24 4 451-8MD11 8DQ 032 1 <1 Digital 25 3.5 451-8MR11 8DQ 032 1 <1 Digital 30 1.6 451-8MR12 8DQ 032 1 <1 Digital 30 1.6 452-8MR11 8DQ 032 1 <1 Digital 14 2 453-8MA11 8DQ 032 1 <1 Digital 20 1 457-8EA12 8DQ 032 1 <1 Digital 55 0.5 1 For an input module, the delay time is the time between a signal change at an input and a change of state on the I/O bus. For an output module, the delay time is the time between a signal change on the I/O bus and a change of state at an output. 2 The module can also be input with an analog address ID. 3 The module occupies an additional 2 output bytes in the ET 200U station but not in the COM ET 200. 5-10 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Table 5-3 Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard) Station Order No. of Module Address ID ET 200U(DP Standard) Order Code Address Scope (Byte) Delay Time (ms)1 Address Area Analog Decimal No. Current Consumption (mA) Power Loss (W) Analog Inputs 6ES5 ...: 464-8MA111 1-channel: 1-channel: 1-ch.: 1-ch.: 464-8MA211 1AI, 080, 2 464-8MB111 2-channel: 2-channel: 464-8MC111 2AI, 464-8MD111 70 0.7 60 100 0.7 2-ch.: 2-ch.: 70 0.7 081, 4 120 70 0.7 4-channel: 4-channel: 4-ch.: 4-ch.: 70 0.7 464-8ME111 4AI. 083 8 240 70 464-8MF112 1-channel: 1AI, 1-channel: 080, 1-ch.: 2 1-ch.: 60 Analogg 70 0.9 464-8MF212 2-channel: 2AI. 2-channel: 081 2-ch.: 4 2-ch.: 120 Analogg 100 0.9 466-8MC11 2AI 081 4 20 Analog 100 0.9 467-8EE112 1-channel: 1AI, 1-channel: 080, 1-ch.: 2 1-ch.: Analog 320 2-channel: 2AI. 2-channel: 081 2-ch.: 4 2-ch.: 0.7 to 1 0.7 to 3 Analog Outputs 6ES5 ...: 470-8MA11 2AQ 097 4 0.1 Analog 3.1 470-8MA12 2AQ 097 4 0.15 Analog 3.1 470-8MB11 2AQ 097 4 0.1 Analog 3.8 470-8MB12 2AQ 097 4 0.15 Analog 3.8 470-8MC11 2AQ 097 4 0.1 Analog 3.8 470-8MC12 2AQ 097 4 0.15 Analog 3.8 470-8MD11 2AQ 097 4 0.1 Analog 3.1 470-8MD12 2AQ 097 4 0.15 Analog 3.1 470-8MD21 2AQ 097 4 Analog 477-8EC11 2AX 241 4* Analog 350 3.2 * The address scope is necessary for the inputs and the outputs (i.e. if the address scope is 2 bytes, 2 bytes are used for the inputs and 2 bytes are used for the outputs). Since COM ET 200 assigns the addresses for these modules optionally, inputs and outputs can have different start addresses. 1 With these analog modules, you can use one, two, or four channels. 2 With these analog modules, you can use one or two channels. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-11 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Table 5-4 Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard) Station Order No. of Module Address ID ET 200U(DP Standard) Order Code Address Scope (Byte) Delay Time (ms)1 Address Area Decimal No. Current Consumption (mA) Power Loss (W) Input/Output Module: 482-8MA11 -8MA12 -8MA13 - 049 or 1121 2* Digital or analog 016/016 - Digital 50 4.5 Power Supply Module: 935-8ME112 8DI/8DI 7.5 Simulator Module: 788-8MA11 8DI 016 0.3 < 0.2 1 Digital 30 Digital 10 Digital 20 2.5 Analog 70 1.9 0.3 8DQ 032 8DX 048 1* 385-8MA11 8DX 048 1* 385-8MB11 2AX 241 4* 016 1 5 Digital 35 Timer Module: 380-8MA11 Counter Modules: 0.18 Comparator Module: 461-8MA11 8DI PID Controller Modules:3 262-8MA11 -8MA12 4AX 243 8* 100 ... 200 Analog 20 262-8MB11 -8MB12 4AX 243 8* 100 ... 200 Analog 20 120 Position Control Modules: 263-8MA112 4AX/000 243/000 8* Analog 266-8MA11 4AX 243 8* Analog 267-8MA11 2AX 241 4* Analog 4 150 * The address scope is necessary for the inputs and the outputs (i.e. if the address scope is 2 bytes, 2 bytes are used for the inputs and 2 bytes are used for the outputs). Since COM ET200 assigns the addresses for these modules optionally, inputs and outputs can have different start addresses. 1 The module can also be addressed as 1-channel analog module 2 The module occupies 2 slots. 3 You can address a PID controller module in an ET 200 system at least every 200 ms. You cannot use function blocks FB61 and FB62. 5-12 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Table 5-5 Address IDs for the Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard) Order No. of Module Address ID ET 200U(DP Standard) Order Code Address Scope (Byte) Delay Time (ms)1 Address Area Decimal No. Current Consumption (mA) Power Loss (W) IP 264 Electronic Cam Controller: 264-8MA111 4AX/000 High Speed Sub Control IP 265-8MA01 243/000 8* Analog 120 4 265:2 4AX 243 8* Analog 4AX 243 8* Analog 180 1.6 521-8MA21 4AX 243 8* Analog 140 1.2 330-8MA11 or no module plugged in 000 000 0 CP 521 BASIC: 521-8MB11 CP 521 SI: 0 * The address scope is necessary for the inputs and the outputs (i.e. if the address scope is 2 bytes, 2 bytes are used for the inputs and 2 bytes are used for the outputs). Since COM ET200 assigns the addresses for these modules optionally, inputs and outputs can have different start addresses. 1 The module occupies 2 slots. 2 IP 265 can be operated in Slow Mode only. The Slow Mode must be set in the parameterization frame. Please refer to Figure KEIN MERKER for the Slow Mode setting. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-13 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 When configuring, if you put the cursor in an input field of a slot that has already been configured, COM ET 200 automatically fills in the area start addresses in the "Area address: I: Q: " output field as follows: In the "I" field area start address for the input modules In the "Q" field area start address for the output modules Help for Input of Unknown Address IDs The above table lists all the address IDs you need. If you need an address ID for a special module, you can input the address ID individually, using COM ET 200 version 4.0: Note: The cursor must be positioned in an address ID input field. 1. Press key <F7> (HELP). Result: An address ID input field is displayed (DP IDENTIFIER): DP-IDENTIFIER I/Q: # Length: ## Format: # Consistency: # Help: I/Q: I: Input, Q: Output, X: Input/Output, Length: 1 - 16 Format: B: Byte, W: Word, Consistency:0: Byte/Word 1: Total (depending on format) The following table explains the parameters: Table 5-6 Parameter I/Q Explanation of Parameters in the DP-IDENTIFIER Field Explanation Permissible Inputs Input module (I), output module (Q) or I/O module (X)? I, Q, X Length Length specifies the address scope. The unit in which this scope is specified, is input in the "format" parameter. 1 to 16 Format Unit for the "length" (address scope in bytes or words). Consistency 0: Consistency is ensured within the selected format. 1: Consistency is ensured for the "length" (max. 8 bytes or 4 words). 5-14 B, W 0, 1 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Example You want to specify the "466-8MC11" 2-channel analog input module in the DP-IDENTIFIER field: DP-IDENTIFIER I/O: I Length: 2 Format: W Consistency: 0 Help: I/O: I:Input, Q: Output, X: Input/Output, Length: 1 - 16 Format: B: Byte, W: Word, Consistency:0: Byte/Word 1: Total (depending on format) Example You want to specify the IP 262 controller module in the DP-IDENTIFIER field: DP-IDENTIFIER I/O: X Length: 4 Format: W Consistency: 1 Help: I/O: I:Input, Q: Output, X: Input/Output, Length: 1 - 16 Format: B: Byte, W: Word, Consistency:0: Byte/Word 1: Total (depending on format) Defining Parameters As from COM ET 200 version 4.0, additional special parameters can be defined for each individual slave station. If you want to use the ET 200U(DP Standard) station in Slow Mode, it is essential to fill in the parameterization frame. 1. Press keys (Shift) <F6> (DP SLAVE PARAMETERIZATION FRAME). Result: The DP slave parameterization screen is displayed: DP SLAVE PARAMETERIZATION FRAME Byte (Input in KH format ) ----------------------------------------------- 0 00 10 20 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-15 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 2. Enter the value in the "KH" format: Structure of Parameterization Frame: Parameterization frame 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 Result when pulling or plugging-in modules or when bus module defective Evaluation of diagnostic data from modules with diagnostics capability Mode of IM 318-C Baud rate of I/O bus Figure 5-5 Structure of Parameterization Frame The values of the bits in the parameterization frame are explained in the following table (default is always "0"): Table 5-7 Meaning of the Parameters in the Parameterization Frame Bit Value Meaning Bit 0: Result when pulling or plugging i modules d l or when h bbus module d l in defective 0 All outputs are set to "0" in the case of a fault. The ET 200U(DP Standard) station does not enter STOP mode. 1 The ET 200U(DP Standard) interrupts the "shifting" on the I/O bus. The ET 200U(DP Standard) reads in the plugged-in modules again and continues the data transfer on the basis of the current values. When "shifting" is interrupted, the output values are retained. Bit 1: Evaluation of diagnostic data f d l with ith diagnostics di ti from modules capability 0 Diagnostic data from modules with diagnostics capability are not evaluated. 1 If modules with diagnostics capability are plugged-in, the diagnostic data are evaluated. Bit 2: Mode of the IM 318-C 0 IM 318-C acts as ET 200U(DP Standard), ET 200U(FMS) or ET 200U in a mixed configuration. 1 IM 318-C is operated as combi slave. 0 The I/O bus is not operated in Slow Mode. 1 The I/O bus is operated in Slow Mode. Bit 3: B d rate Baud t off I/O bus b 3. Confirm your input of the parameterization frame by pressing <F6> (ENTER). 5-16 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Finish Configuration After you have defined the parameters, configuration is completed: 1. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the configuration for each configured station. Result: The configuration is stored in the file that has been preset. COM ET 200 automatically guarantees that areas that must be transferred consistently are also marked as consistent areas (e.g. that each analog value is transferred separately in one message frame, i.e. consistently over an area of two bytes). By pressing the function keys you can activate the following functions: If you want to do the following: Then press the following key: Name of the function key Display the configuration of the next higher (configured) station <F1> STATION + Display the configuration of the next lower (configured) station <F2> STATION - Delete the configuration of the station that you are currently configuring <F3> DELETE STATION Configure a new station (COM ET 200 selects the number of the next nonconfigured station automatically) <F4> NEW STATION Switch to the STATION-ORIENTED ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT screen <F5> ADDRESS ASSIGN. Confirm the station configuration that you just input <F6> ENTER Define parameters such as Result when module is pulled or bus unit defective Evaluation of diagnostic data from modules with diagnostics capability Mode of IM 318-C I/O bus speed (Slow Mode). (Shift) <F6> DP Slave parameterization frame Know what entries are permitted in a specific input field <F7> HELP Get help on input of address identifiers (order numbers) (Shift) <F7> - <F8> EXIT Return to the FUNCTIONS screen ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-17 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 5.1.2 How to Proceed if the Configuration is Modified at a Later Point Expanding the Slave Station at a Later Point You know what the final configuration of a station will be, but you do not have all the modules available, or you want to add some modules later. 1. Configure the station according to your final plan. In this way you specify the module start addresses for all the I/O modules initially, even for those that you have not added on yet. 2. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the configuration. 3. Put the cursor in the input field for the slot that is not occupied yet. 4. Overwrite the address ID with "000". 5. Press <F6> (ENTER) to reconfirm the configuration. Overwriting the address ID with "000" maintains the address space for the original module. When you plug in the missing module later, you must reconfigure as follows: 1. Replace the "000" ID with the original address ID. 2. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the configuration. Expanding an Already Configured Slave Station You want to add some I/O modules to a station that you have already configured. 1. In the CONFIGURING screen, press <F4> (NEW STATION) to select the number of the station that you want to expand. COM ET 200 displays the configuration of the selected station. The "1st available address" input field shows the address that will be assigned to the additional module. 2. Enter the address ID of the additional module at the next available slot. 3. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the configuration. After you enter the new configuration, additional modules may have addresses that are out of sequence with the addresses of the originally configured modules. 5-18 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Modifying an Already Configured Slave Station You want to replace one module with a different module in a station that you have already configured. 1. In the CONFIGURING screen, press <F4> (NEW STATION) to select the number of the station that you want to change. COM ET 200 displays the configuration of the selected station. The "1st available address" input field shows the address that will be assigned to the new module. 2. Overwrite the address ID of the old module with the address ID of the new module. 3. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the configuration. The new module has a module start address that is not consecutive in the order of the addresses of the stations that you configured previously. The start address reflects a jump in addressing. The address space that the old module took up is released and could be used for a module with the same address ID. If you wanted to put a module in such a slot, you would have to edit the "1st available address" field. However, this is not recommended. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-19 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 5.2 Starting Up and Testing with COM ET 200 for ET 200U(DP Standard) In this Section This section describes How the station number and switch 8 are set ( Section 5.2.1) How you connect the ET 200U to the programmer ( Section 5.2.2) and How you use the COM ET 200 "START-UP/TEST" screen ( Section 5.2.3). 5-20 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 5.2.1 Setting the Station No. and Switch 8 Setting the Station Number Use the bank of switches of the ET 200U interface module to set the station number of your ET 200U station ( Figure 5-6). Set the station number in binary code. Each of the first seven switches on the bank of switches has a different positional value. When switch is pressed (ON): the positional value is switched on 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Positional value: 1 8 Table 5-8 Positional value: 2 Positional value: 4 Positional value: 8 When switch is "ON" Positional value: 16 Positional value: 32 Positional value: 64 Figure 5-6 Location of the Bank of Switches for Setting the Station Number (ET 200U) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-21 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Setting Switch 8 Setting switch 8 results in different conditions: Table 5-8 Example of an "318-8MB12" Function of Switch 8 Order No. Function 318-8MB12 DP Standard: Bus protocol to PROFIBUS-DP draft standard (can be used as from COM ET 200 version 4.0). The slow mode must be set in a bit of the parameterization frame ( Figure 5-5, Section 5.1.1) DP Siemens: Bus protocol to DP Siemens. The ET 200U automatically switches into the slow mode when it identfies an IP 265. 318-8MC11 DP Standard: Bus parameters in accordance with PROFIBUS-DP (from COM ET 200, V 4.0). Slow mode must be set by means of a bit in the parameterization frame ( Figure 5-5, Section 5.1.1). FMS-Norm: Bus parameters in accordance with FMS standard. Slow mode must be set by means of a bit in the parameterization frame ( Figure 5-5, Section 5.1.1). The permissible parameter values are listed in Table 6-3 in Section 6.1. Set station number 52 and DP Standard: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DP Siemens 5-22 8 Press switch (position "ON") Positional value: 4 +16 +32 52 DP Standard ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 5.2.2 Starting Up an ET 200U Slave Station After setting the station number on the bank of switches on the IM 318-B interface module, proceed as follows to start up and test your ET 200U slave station: 1. Use a CP 5410 S5-DOS/ST programmer-bus interface to link your programmer directly to the IM 318-B interface module. 2. Call up the SYSTEM START-UP/TEST screen of the COM ET 200 software package (press <F5> in the FUNCTIONS screen). 3. In the Station number: input field, enter the number of the connected ET 200U slave station. 4. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the input. Result: COM ET 200 establishes a link to the connected station, assigns parameters to the station, and displays the SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: MODULE SELECTION screen if the configuration in the program file and the actual station configuration match. If the two configurations do not match, COM ET 200 reports an error in the message line. In such a case, you must go to the CONFIGURATION screen to correct the station configuration. ! Caution If you use a programmer on the bus to start up an ET 200U slave station while the bus is operating continuously, note the following: The IM 308-B interface module (in the master station) cannot control the slave station as long as the programmer has access to the slave station. The following section describes the start-up and test for an ET 200U(DP Standard) slave station. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-23 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 5.2.3 Using the SYSTEM START-UP/TEST Screen for an ET 200U(DP Standard) Slave Station For starting up an ET 200U slave station, COM ET 200 provides two screens. Select one slot in the SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: MODULE SELECTION screen. Then call up the SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: STATUS/CONTROL screen. Proceed as follows: 1. Using the cursor control keys and <F5> (SELECT), select one slot (one module) whose input data you want to evaluate or whose outputs you want to force. Result: The selected module is marked with an asterisk "*". Pressing <F5> (SELECT) a second time cancels the selection. Program file selected: TEST@@ET.200 SYSTEM START-UP / TEST: MODULE SELECTION SIMATIC S5 / COM ET 200 Station number: 4 Station name: PRESS Station type: ET 200U-DP Configuration: 0. 016 1. 032 2. 097 3.* 243 4. 243 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 SELECT ENTER F7 F8 EXIT Figure 5-7 SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: MODULE SELECTION Screen 5-24 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 2. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the selection. Result: The SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: STATUS/CONTROL screen appears: Digital modules are displayed in the "KM" format, analog modules in the "KH" format. The following example shows the IP 262 module (address identifier: 243 or 4AX) in the "KH" format: Program file selected: B:TEST@@ET.200 START-UP / TEST: STATUS/CONTROL SIMATIC S5 / COM ET 200 Station number: 4 Station type: ET 200U-DP Station name: PRESS Station status: Slot: 3 Identifier: 243 Force Outputs KH = 10FF E012 2340 1234 Status Identifier-related diagnostics Inputs KH = 0123 4EAB 3333 FDAB Status of outputs is retained F1 F1 F2 F2 F3 F3 F4 F4 F8 F8 ENTER HELP EXIT Figure 5-8 SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: STATUS/CONTROL Screen Diagnostics Messages in the "...:STATUS/ FORCE" Screen COM ET 200 version 4.0 provides extended diagnostics messages in this screen. Up to 4 diagnostics messages are displayed in the "station status" field. Another type of diagnostics is the identifier-related diagnostics (module diagnostics). If the word "identifier-related diagnostics" is displayed, a module has signalled a diagnostics status. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-25 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 STATUS/FORCE Function Press<F7> (HELP) to change KF format (fixed point number) to KH format (hexadecimal number) and vice versa. 3. Specify the status of the outputs that you want to force. Press <F6> (ENTER) to confirm the status. Result: At the end of every cycle, COM ET 200 transfers output data to the selected station. The software requests input data and (station) diagnostics data. If problems have occurred, the diagnosis is displayed as plain text in the STATION STATUS field. The assignment of the function keys changes: F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 STOP F8 EXIT To freeze the screen, that is, to stop the update of the input fields, proceed as follows: 4. Press <F6> (STOP). Now you can set the outputs again. STATUS Function COM ET 200 displays the state of the inputs in the INPUTS field in KM format for digital modules or in KH format for analog modules. Example Inputs for a 4-channel 464-8MD11 module (module ID 083): Channel KH = 4 3 2 1 0123 4EAB 3333 FDAB FORCE Function In the OUTPUTS field, you can change the state of individual outputs (always shown as 0 when this screen appears). COM ET 200 displays the state of the outputs in KM format for digital modules or in KH format for analog modules. Example Outputs for a 482-8MA13 module (16-channel I/O module, ID 049): 5-26 Bit 15 KH = 0110 8 7 0010 0001 0 0001 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 FORCE with Load Circuit You can execute the FORCE function with the load circuit turned on or off as follows: FORCE with load circuit turned off :You can observe the effect of the forced outputs for digital modules by checking the output LEDs. FORCE with load circuit turned on :You can observe the effect of the forced outputs directly at the I/Os. Caution ! Setting outputs when the load circuit is turned on can result in dangerous system states. Set or reset outputs only under the circumstances listed in the following table! Table 5-9 Resetting Outputs with Load Circuit Turned On Version/ Revision Level Outputs are Reset ... Outputs are not Reset ... IM 308-B (as from version 5) When you call up the "MODULE When you power up the IM 308-B SELECTION" screen. When you reset the outputs in the "MODULE SELECTION" screen. When you exit from the "MODULE SELECTION" screen with <F8> (EXIT). ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b master interface module (STOP to RUN transition) 5-27 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 5.3 Diagnosing Faults for ET 200U(DP Standard) In this Section This section describes three alternatives for diagnosing faults: Using LEDs to diagnose problems ( Section 5.3.1) Using COM ET 200 to diagnose problems( Section 5.3.2) Diagnosing faults with STEP 5 ( Section 5.3.3) Diagnosing faults with COM ET 200 in a STEP 5 program is described in detail in the "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual. 5-28 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 5.3.1 Using LEDs to Diagnose Problems Figure 5-9 Fault LEDs on the ET 200U Interface Module (ET 200U Interface Module) Table 5-10 LED Fault Messages on ET 200U Interface Module LED Optical Signal Explanation RUN Lit Normal operation (load voltage supply available) BUS-FAULT Lit Response time has run out and the IM 318-B interface module was not addressed. During system start-up or power up: IM 318-B not parameterized yet. No connection between SINEC L2-DP bus and slave station. IM-FAULT ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Lit or flashing There is a fault in the I/O bus (e.g. a bus unit is defective). BUS-FAULT and IM-FAULT Lit There is a hardware fault in the ET 200U interface module. BUS-FAULT and IM-FAULT Flashing The configured station address is not within the permitted range (1 to 125). 5-29 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 5.3.2 Using COM ET 200 to Diagnose Problems The COM ET 200 software provides the DIAGNOSTICS screen for diagnostics functions. The following are prerequisites for using the diagnostics function: You have a programmer with a CP 5410 S5-DOS/ST programmer-bus interface connected to the SINEC L2-DP bus. You indicated "Programmer connected to the bus: Y" in the ET 200 SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen. 1. Press <F6> (DIAGNOSE) in the FUNCTIONS screen to call up the DIAGNOSTICS: OVERVIEW screen. Result: The "DIAGNOSTICS: OVERVIEW" screen appears. SIMATIC S5 / COM ET 200 Program file selected: C: TEST@@ET.200 DIAGNOSTICS: OVERVIEW Station type: DP Master / V x.y Station number: 1 System name: Test system 4712 Station number: 3 5 14 15 26 F1 F2 37 48 123 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Channel diagnost. F8 EXIT Figure 5-10 DIAGNOSTICS: OVERVIEW Screen COM ET 200 displays the following: The station number and the system name of the master station The firmware version of the IM 308-B interface module (in the master station) The numbers of the stations for which diagnostics data is available 2. Press <F1> (DIAGNOSE INDIVID.) 5-30 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Result: COM ET 200 asks for a station number. 3. In the STATION NUMBER input field, enter the number of the faulty station that you want to investigate further. 4. Press <F6> (ENTER) to be able to evaluate the diagnostics messages of this station. Result: COM ET 200 goes to another screen. The screen that appears next depends on the type of station you are investigating. Program file selected: B:TEST@@ET.200 INDIVIDUAL DIAGNOSTICS SIMATIC S5 / COM ET 200 Station number: 3 Station type: ET 200U-DP Station name: PRESS Station status: Station cannot be forced by PLC Station diagnostics: 0 KH = 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 10 Identifier-related diagnostics: Slot: 0 1 4 9 Aktiv F1 F1 F2 F2 F3 F3 F4 F4 SLOT Figure 5-11 F8 F8 ENTER HELP EXIT INDIVIDUAL DIAGNOSTICS Screen Up to 4 diagnostic messages can be displayed in the STATION STATUS field. STATION DIAGNOSTICS uses the "KH" format. See Figure 5-15 for details on the structure of the station diagnostics. In the IDENTIFIER-RELATED DIAGNOSTICS field the slots are indicated from which the diagnostics signals originate. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-31 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 5.3.3 Diagnosing Faults with STEP 5 (Station Diagnostics) General Remarks on Diagnostics With STEP 5 you can systematically localize and evaluate a fault: Table 5-11 Diagnostics with STEP 5 Diagnostics ... Diagnostics overview Records all stations which have diagnostics data pending. Diagnostics for parameter assign. and addressability Records all stations which can be parameterized and addressed. Station status Provides data on the status of the slave stations. Station diagnostics Provides general data on the status of the slave stations. Identifier-related diagnostics (module diagnostics) Localizes the defective module in the ET 200U slave station. The diagnostics for parameter assignment and addressability and the diagnostics overview are described in the "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual, as they are applied to all slave stations. To avoid misunderstandings, the two diagnostics bytes of the diagnostics word are referred to in this chapter as the "diagnostics address" and "diagnostics address + 1". The load and transfer operations in this chapter refer to the default diagnostics address 252. If more than one diagnostics message is displayed, the last message remains on the screen. Special Features of Requesting Diagnostics Using Page Addressing When using page addressing, the diagnostics word is located in the basic page. Before you request diagnostics as described in this chapter, you must first of all "switch over" to the basic page number. Example The P area is addressed via pages. The basic page number of the IM 308-B interface module is "O" (PO). You want to request and evaluate diagnostics overview. You have accepted the default diagnostics address 252. L T L T KB PY KY PW 0 255 127,n , 252 L PW 252 L KH 0000 !=F BEC JU FBx FB 5-32 Page selection age se ect o Request diagnostics overview ((n = 0,, 1,, 2 to 7)) q g Evaluate l the h diagnostics di i wordd F lt? Fault? Evaluate E l t the th fault f lt in i FBx FB ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Structure and Request of Station Diagnostics for ET 200U The station status, the station diagnostics and the identifier-related diagnostics (module diagnostics) are described in this manual as they are typical for the ET 200U slave station. The diagnostics function is loaded and transferred: L KY (Station number),(code) Station number: 3 to 124 Code: 0, ..., 7 Afterwards the station diagnostics is transferred into the "diagnostics address" byte (here I/O byte 252) T PW 252 16 bytes per slave station are reserved for station status, station diagnostics and module diagnostics. The 16 bytes are organized in 8 words. They are structured as follows: Table 5-12 Structure of Station Diagnostics and Module Diagnostics Code Diagnostics Address Diagnostics Address + 1 0 Station status 1 Station status 2 1 Station status 3 Master address 2 Manufacturer identification 3 Header Station diagnostics 4 Header Identifier-related diagnostics (module diagnostics) (slots 0 to 7) 5 Identifier-related diagnostics (module diagnostics) (slots 8 to 15) Identifier-related diagnostics (module diagnostics) (slots 16 to 23) 6 Identifier-related diagnostics (module diagnostics) (slots 24 to 31) Unassigned 7 Unassigned Unassigned Note If a module signals diagnostics, a delay of up to 150 ms is possible between input into the station diagnostics and the following input into the identifier- related diagnostics. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-33 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Request Station Status The bytes "station status 1 to 3" give information on the station. In the "master address" byte, the address of the master station, which has parameterized the slave station is indicated. L KY n,0 T PW 252 The number of the slave station (n = station number) of which the station status is requested must be stored in the "diagnostics address" byte; in the "diagnostics address + 1" byte, the code for "station status 1 and station status 2" (= 0) has to be stored or L KY n,1 T PW 252 "Station status 3 and master address" (= 1) The IM 308-B then writes the diagnostics message into the I/O word "diagnostics address". Read Station Status L KH 0004 or L KH 0000 L PW 252 !=F BEC JU FBx 5-34 If code = 0 or if code = 1 and master station number = 1 Load diagnostics word No fault? Evaluate fault in FBx. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Diagnostics Word "Station status 1 and station status 2", code = 0 Diagnostics address "Station status 1" 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Diagnostics address + 1 "Station status 2" 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1: Slave must be reparameterized. 1: Slave station cannot continue operation if the fault has not been remedied. 1: Bit is always "1". 1: Response monitoring has been activated. 1: Slave station is in FREEZE mode. 1: Slave station is in SYNC mode. 0: Bit is always "0". 1: Slave station is deactivated. 1: Slave station cannot be accessed. 1: Slave station is not yet ready for data exchange. 1: The configuration data sent from the master to the slave station do not corre- spond with the structure of the slave station. 1: Station diagnostics or module diagnostics are in operation. 1: Function is not supported. 0: Bit is always "0". 1: Slave station is not an ET 200U (parameter assignment error). 1: Slave station has been parameterized from another master. Figure 5-12 Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of the Station Status (Station Status 1 and Station Status 2) Diagnostics Word "Station status 3 and master address", code = 1 Diagnostics address "Station status 3" 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Irrelevant Diagnostics address + 1 "Master address" 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address of master which has parameterized the slave station Figure 5-13 Structure of the Diagnost. Word after Request of the Station Status (Station Status 3 and Master Address) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-35 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Request Manufacturer Identification The "manufacturer identification" byte describes the type of slave station. The number of the slave station (n = station number) from which the manufacturer identification is requested must be stored in the byte "diagnostics address"; in the byte "diagnostics address + 1" the code for the "manufacturer identification" (= 2) has to be stored. L KY n,2 T PW 252 Diagnostics Word "Manufacturer identification", code = 2 Diagnostics address Diagnost. address + 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Manufacturer identification for ET 200U(DP Standard) slave station (8008H) Figure 5-14 Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of the Manufacturer Identification 5-36 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Request Station Diagnostics The station diagnostics provides general information on the ET 200U slave station. The number of the slave station (n 0 station number) from which station diagnostics is requested must be stored in the "diagnostics address" byte; the code for "station diagnostics" (= 3) is to be stored in the "diagnostics address + 1" byte. L KY n,3 T PW 252 The IM 308-B interface module then writes the diagnostics message in the I/O word "diagnostics address". Read Station Diagnostics L KH 0201 L PW 252 !=F BEC JU FBx Load diagnostics word No fault? Evaluate fault in the FBx. Diagnostics Word "Header" and "Station diagnostics", code = 3 7 Diagnostics address "Header" 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Diagnost. address + 1 "Station diagnost." 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1: Slave station in slow mode. e fur ions- nose Code for station diagnost. Length of station diagnostics incl. "Header" (Length = 2 bytes) 1: Wrong number of identifiers configured. 0: Bit is always "0". 1: Module withdrawn or bus unit defective. 1: Load voltage missing or output short circuit of M (only for a module with diagnostics). 1: An output has been activated incorrectly (short circuit of L+; only for a module with diagnostics) 0: Bit is always "0". 0: Bit is always "0". Figure 5-15 Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Station Diagnostics ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-37 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Request Module Diagnostics Module diagnostics tells you which module in the ET 200U slave station is faulty. The number of the slave station (n = station number) from which module diagnostics is requested must be stored in the "diagnostics address" byte; in the "diagnostics address + 1" byte, the code for "header" and "module diagnostics (slots 0 to 7)" (= 4) is to be stored L KY n,4 T PW 252 or "Module diagnostics (slots 8 to 15) and (slots 16 to 23)" (= 5) L KY n,5 T PW 252 or "Module diagnostics (slots 24 to 31)" (= 6) L KY n,6 T PW 252 The IM 308-B interface module then writes the diagnostics message into the I/O word "diagnostics address". Read Module Diagnostics L KH 4500 or L KH 0000 L PW 252 !=F BEC JU FBx If code = 4 or if code = 5, 6 Load diagnostics word No fault? Evaluate fault in the FBx. Diagnostics Word "Header" and "Module diagnostics (slots 0 to 7)", code = 4 7 Diagnostics address "Header" 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 Diagnost. address + 1 "Slots 0 to 7" 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 1: Module in slot "0" faulty. r - - Code for module diagnostics Length of module diagnostics incl. "Header" (Length = 5 bytes) 1: Module in slot "1" faulty. 1: Module in slot "7" faulty. Figure 5-16 Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Header and Slots 0 to 7) 5-38 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 Diagnostics Word "Module diagnostics (slots 8 to 15 and 16 to 23)", code = 5 7 Diagnostics address "Slots 8 to 15" 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Diagnost. address + 1 "Slots 16 to. 23" 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1: Module in slot "16" faulty. 1: Module in slot "17" faulty. 1: Module in slot "23" faulty. 1: Module in slot "8" faulty. 1: Module in slot "15" faulty. Figure 5-17 Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Slots 8 to 15 and 16 to 23) Diagnostics Word "Module diagnostics (slots 24 to 31)", code = 6 Diagnostics address "Slots 24 to 31" 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Diagnost. address + 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Unassigned 1: Module in slot "24" faulty. 1: Module in slot "31" faulty. Figure 5-18 Structure of the Diagnostics Word after Request of Module Diagnostics (Slots 24 to 31) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 5-39 ET 200U(DP Standard): AddressAssignm.,Starting-Up, DiagnosingFaultsUsing COM ET 200 5-40 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Communications Capabilities of the IM 318-C 6 In this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites for this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6-1 6-1 6.1 Modes of the IM 318-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is an IM 318-C? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Which Modes are Possible? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements for Operating an IM 318-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6-2 6-2 6-5 6-6 6.2 Settings of the IM 318-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Station Number and Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 6-8 6.3 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) Communicating in Accordance with PROFIBUS Standard (Part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 6.3.1 FMS Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initiate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Get-OV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event-Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acknowledge-Event-Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter-Event-Condition-Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6.3.2 Object List (OV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static Object List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DP Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMS Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DP Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMS Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Event (with "Event-Notification") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-19 6-25 6-27 6-27 6-28 6-28 6-29 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): Address Assignment, Starting Up, Diagnosing 6.3.3 List of Communications Links (KBL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local LSAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RADR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACI, CCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Max. PDU Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-34 6-34 6-34 6.4 Using LEDs to Diagnose Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 6.5 Example of Programming a Link between an ET 200U(FMS) and a CP 5431 FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36 6.5.1 Programming a Cyclic Link (MSZY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 6.5.2 Programming an Acyclic Link (MSAZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 Location of the Bank of Switches for Setting the Station Number . . . . . . . FMS Services Supported by the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) . . . . . . . . . Fault LEDs on the ET 200U Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Input/Output (I/O) Areas" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "CI Editor" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "CP Link Programming" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Request Editor Initialisation " Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Request Editor Service Selection" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Request Editor" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 6-11 6-35 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-42 Figures 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard): Address Assignment, Starting Up, Diagnosing Tables 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39 Modes of the M 318-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements for Operating an IM 318-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus Parameters to be Set if at Least One FMS Master is on the Bus . . . . Differences between the Various Modes of the IM 318-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Station Number and Switch 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Object List of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) . . . . . . . . "Input" or "Output" Object of the "Simple-Variable" Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Input" or "Output" Object of the "Array" Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding the I/O Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding the I/O Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding the I/O Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding the I/O Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . "Diagnostics Data" Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Diagnostics Messages of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) 6-19 Meaning of Station Status 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meaning of Station Status 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meaning of the "Station Diagnostics" Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Content of Station Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meaning of the "Module Diagnostics" Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Content of Module Diagnostics (Slots 0 to 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Content of Module Diagnostics (Slots 8 to 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Content of Module Diagnostics (Slots 16 to 23) . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Content of Module Diagnostics (Slots 24 to 31) . . . . . . . . . . . . "Parameter Data" Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meanings of the Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "DP Inputs" Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "FMS Inputs" Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "DP Outputs" Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "FMS Outputs" Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Diagnostics Event" Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master-Slave, Cyclic, Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master-Slave, Cyclic, Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master-Slave, Cyclic, with Slave Initiation, Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master-Slave, Cyclic, with Slave Initiation, Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master-Slave, Acyclic, with Slave Initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master-Slave, Acyclic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master-Slave, Acyclic, with Event Acknowledgement for Cyclic Links . . . Types of Link of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Fault Messages from ET 200U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-4 6-5 6-5 6-6 6-8 6-13 6-14 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 .... 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-22 6-23 6-23 6-24 6-24 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-27 6-28 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-30 6-30 6-31 6-31 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-35 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Communications Capabilities of the IM 318-C In this Chapter 6 This chapter describes the following: Modes of the IM 318-C ( Section 6.1) Modes of the IM 318-C ( Section 6.2) Communications capabilities of the IM 318-C via PROFIBUS ( Section 6.3) Diagnosing faults using the display elements ( Section 6.4) Example of programming a link between the ET 200U(FMS) and the CP 5431 FMS ( Section 6.5) Explanation of the terms used in the glossary ( Appendix B) For Reference Please refer to Section 6.3.2 for the structure of the object list (Table 6-6) Section 6.3.3 for the list of communication links Prerequisites for this Chapter We assume that you have already gained experience regarding PROFIBUS connectivity. This chapter presupposes that you are already familiar with the following standards and protocol profile: PROFIBUS standard DIN 19245, Parts 1 and 2 Sensors/actuators profile ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-1 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C 6.1 Modes of the IM 318-C What is an IM 318-C? An IM 318-C slave interface module integrates both the connections for SINEC L2-DP (DP Standard) and FMS in one interface. The IM 318-C can be accessed with both the DP Standard and FMS protocols via the same bus cable. Which Modes are Possible? The IM 318-C can be operated in four different modes: ET 200U(DP Standard) One DP master is on the bus. The ET 200U(DP Standard) is configured using COM ET 200. The DP master reads the inputs and sets the outputs. ET 200U(FMS) One FMS master is on the bus. The data of the ET 200U(FMS) are entered in the object list. The FMS master reads the inputs and sets the outputs. ET 200U with mixed configuration (FMS has read access to the ET 200U) A DP master plus an FMS master are on the bus. The ET 200U with all its I/O modules is configured exclusively with COM ET 200. The DP master reads the inputs of the ET 200U and sets the outputs. The FMS master has the right to read the I/O modules assigned to the DP master but has no write access. 6-2 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Combi-slave (both the FMS master and DP master have full access to the I/O modules of the ET 200U) One DP master and FMS master each are on the bus. The I/O modules of the combi-slave are divided up between the DP master and FMS master. DP master: The DP master reads the inputs and sets the outputs of the I/O modules assigned to it. The DP master has neither read nor write access to the I/O modules assigned to the FMS master. FMS master: The FMS master reads the inputs and sets the outputs of the remaining I/O modules, that is those assigned to it. The FMS master has read access to the I/O modules assigned to the DP master but no permission to write. Note The I/O modules in the combi-slave are automatically assigned when parameterizing the ET 200U with COM ET 200. The I/O modules from slot 0 to the last parameterized (DP master) I/O module are allocated to the DP master. The FMS master is assigned the remaining I/O modules. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-3 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Table 6-1 Modes of the M 318-C Operation of IM 318-C as ... ET 200U(DP Standard) Configuration Advantages An IM 318-C can also be operated in a SINEC L2-DP LAN where only the DP Standard protocol is used. DP master (read/write access) ET 200U(DP Standard) FMS master I/O modules of the ET 200U spec(read/write access) trum of I/O modules can be used ET 200U(FMS) with the FMS protocol. ET 200U(FMS) ET 200U in a mixed configuration DP master (read/write access) FMS master (read access only) Inputs/outputs of the ET 200U used in a mixed configuration can be read in parallel with the FMS protocol and evaluated, for example, on a PC. ET 200U in a mixed configuration Combi-slave DP master (read/write access) FMS master Read ET 200U 8DE 8DA 8DE 8DA Read/write The inputs/outputs of the combi- slave can be read in parallel via FMS. Additionally, you can plug in I/O modules to which the FMS master has exclusive read and write access. All I/O modules, except CPs and IPs, are available for a combi-slave configuration. Combi-slave 6-4 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Requirements for Operating an IM 318-C The following Table lists the hardware and software requirements and the relevant bus parameters for operating an IM 318-C: Table 6-2 Requirements for Operating an IM 318-C Operation of IM 318-C as ... Requirements ET 200U(DP Standard) COM ET 200 (version 4.0) IM 308-B from revision level 5 (printed on module) or from software version 4.0 (indicated in COM ET 200) Type file: SI8009T?.200 FMS master with PROFIBUS protocol, Parts 1 ET 200U(FMS) and 2 ET 200U in a mixed configuration COM ET 200 (version 4.0) IM 308-B from revision level 5 (printed on module) or from software version 4.0 (indicated in COM ET 200) Type file: SI8009T?.200 FMS master with PROFIBUS protocol, Parts 1 and 2. COM ET 200 (version 4.0) IM 308-B from revision level 5 (printed on Combi-slave module) or from software version 4.0 (indicated in COM ET 200) Type file: SI8009T?.200 FMS master with PROFIBUS protocol, Parts 1 and 2. Table 6-3 Bus Parameters to be Set if at Least One FMS Master is on the Bus Baud rate (kbit/s) 9.6 19.2 93.75 187.5 500 1500 TSL (TBit) 125 250 600 1500 3500 3500 min_TSDR (TBit) 30 60 125 250 255 255 max_TSDR (TBit) 60 120 250 500 1000 1000 TSET (TBit) 1 1 1 1 1 60 TQUI (TBit) 0 0 0 0 0 0 G 1 1 1 1 1 1 HSA 126 126 126 126 126 126 max. retry limit 1 1 1 1 1 1 250 255 255 11 11 11 Default values for FMS master Default values for ET 200U if switch 8 is set to "FMS Standard" min_TSDR (TBit) 30 60 125 Default values for ET 200U if switch 8 is set to "DP Standard" min_TSDR (TBit) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 11 11 11 6-5 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Differences The following Table lists the differences between the ET 200U(DP Standard) ET 200U(FMS) ET 200U in a mixed configuration Combi-slave that you have to take into consideration when starting up the system. The differences will be described in more detail in the section dealing with this topic. Table 6-4 Differences between the Various Modes of the IM 318-C Characteristics ET 200U (DP Standard) ET 200U(FMS) ET 200U in Mixed Config. Combi-Slave 3 to 124 1 to 125 3 to 124 3 to 124 Required settings: Valid station number: Standard1 DP Standard1 DP Standard1 Setting of switch 8: DP Standard DP Parameter data, bit 2 (mode of ET 200U) Bit 2 = 0 Bit 2 = 0 Bit 2 = 0 Bit 2 = 1 Possible Possible Possible Impermissible! 0.4 ms 0.4 ms 0.4 ms 0.4 ms - 4 ms 4ms 4ms Tables Tables Tables 6-15, and 6-16, Section 6 Master address: FFH 6-15 and 6-16, Section 6 Station number of DP master 6-15 and 6-16, Section 6 Station number of DP master Result: Operation of CPs / IPs tP-Bus 2 delay extended by 2 delay tP-Bus for each additional FMS service extended by Diagnostics messages Stations statuses 1 to 2 Figure DP master address Station num- 5-12, Section 5 ber of DP master 1: Only if the FMS master keeps its ready time within the limit TRDY t min_TSDR = 11Tbit . Otherwise, you will have to select FMS standard. 2: Please refer to Appendix C of the "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual for the response times. 6-6 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Table 6-4 Differences Between the Various Modes of the IM 318-C (Continued) Characteristics ET 200U (DP Standard) ET 200U(FMS) ET 200U in a Mixed Config. Combi-Slave Access to FMS objects: DP inputs DP outputs FMS inputs FMS outputs Irrelevant Meaning of BF LED (BUS FAULT): Table 5-10, Section 5.3.1 Table 6-39, Section 6.4 Table 6-39, Section 6.4 Table 6-39, Section 6.4 Failure of the DP master All outputs are set to "0".1 - All outputs are set to "0".1 Outputs assigned to the DP master are set to "0".1 The states of the outputs assigned to the FMS master are retained. Failure of the FMS master - All outputs are set to "0".2 No influence on ET 200U Outputs assigned to the FMS master are set to "0".2 The states of the outputs assigned to the DP master are retained. Irrelevant Irrelevant Read Read / write Read Read Irrelevant Irrelevant Read Read Read Read / write 1: After response monitoring time has elapsed. 2: After link monitoring time has elapsed. The IM 318-C can be operated as DP Standard slave and/or FMS slave: If the IM 318-C is Operated as ... ... Refer to ET 200U(DP Standard) Section 5 ET 200U(FMS) ET 200U in a mixed configuration Combi-slave Section 6.2 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-7 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C 6.2 Settings of the IM 318-C Setting the Station Number and Switch 8 There are two possibilities for setting the IM 318-C which also depend on the mode selected: 1. Set a valid station number on the bank of switches on the IM 318-C ( Table 6-5). 2. Set switch 8 on the bank to "DP Standard". If the ready period of the FMS master cannot be set within the range TRDY t min_TSDR = 11TBit , select "FMS Standard". This, however, extends the response times ( Table 6-3). Table 6-5 6-8 Setting the Station Number and Switch 8 Settings ET 200U (FMS) ET 200U in a Mixed Config. Combi-Slave Valid station number: 1 to 125 3 to 124 3 to 124 Setting of switch 8: DP Standard DP Standard DP Standard ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C When switch is pressed (ON): the positional value is switched on FMS Standard 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Positional value: 1 8 DP Standard Positional value: 2 Positional value: 4 Positional value: 8 When switch is "ON" Positional value: 16 Positional value: 32 Positional value: 64 Figure 6-1 Location of the Bank of Switches for Setting the Station Number Example Set station number 52 and "DP Standard": 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FMS Standard 8 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Press switch (position "ON") Positional value: 4 +16 +32 52 DP Standard 6-9 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C 6.3 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) Communicating in Accordance with PROFIBUS Standard (Part 2) This section informs you of the FMS services available, the structure of the object list, the structure of the list of communication links. The following section describes the use of an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS). An ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) is equivalent to an ET 200U operated as ET 200U(FMS), ET 200U in a mixed configuration or as Combi-slave. 6-10 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C 6.3.1 FMS Services The ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) supports the FMS services shown in the following diagram. The FMS services correspond to the definitions in the sensors/actuators profile. ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) FMS master Initiate Abort Abort, Reject Identify, Get-OV, Status Read, Write Event-Notification Acknowledge-Event-Notification Alter-Event-Condition-Monitoring Figure 6-2 FMS Services Supported by the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) Initiate "Initiate" establishes a link between the FMS master and the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS). Abort "Abort" closes down the connection between the FMS master and the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS). The link can be cancelled either by the FMS master or the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS). Reject "Reject" is used by the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) to reject an impermissible FMS service. Possible origin of an impermissible FMS service: FMS service of the FMS master cannot be processed (FMS service is not permissible or not executable) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-11 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Identify "Identify" is used by the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) to transfer the following data: vendor_name: SIEMENS AG model_name: ET 200U-DP/FMS revision: V 1.0 Get-OV The "Get-OV" FMS service is used by the FMS master to read the object description of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS). The ET 200U(DP Standard/ FMS) supports both the short and the extended form of "Get-OV" (OV = Object list). Status "Status" is used by the FMS master to read the status of the bus interface module (logical status) and the operating state (physical status) of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS). The "Local-Detail" attribute is not supported by the ET 200U(DP Standard/ FMS). Read "Read" can be used by the FMS master to read the objects assigned to the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS). Write "Write" can be used by the FMS master to obtain write access to the objects assigned to the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS). Event-Notification The "Event-Notification" FMS service is used by the ET 200U(DP Standard/ FMS) to transmit diagnostics messages to the FMS master. The diagnostics data are sent in connection with the diagnostics event. The "Event-Notification" FMS service is possible only in conjunction with the link types MSZY_SI and MSAZ_SI. If these types of links are not set up, the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) is not able to transfer diagnostics events to the FMS master. Acknowledge- Event-Notification "Acknowledge-Event-Notification" can be used by the FMS master to acknowledge receipt of a diagnostics message from the ET 200U(DP Standard/ FMS). An acknowledgement by the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) is not required. Alter-Event-Condition-Monitoring "Alter-Event-Condition-Monitoring" can be used by the FMS master to enable or disable events, e.g. diagnostics messages via "Event-Notification". In the default setting, events are disabled for the ET 200U(DP Standard/ FMS). 6-12 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C 6.3.2 Object List (OV) The FMS services "Read" and "Write" can be used by the FMS master to access objects defined in the object list (OV). The ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) always generates the full object list, even in a mixed configuration or as a combi-slave. Static Object List The individual objects of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) are addressed via an index in the static object list. The following table illustrates how the object list of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) is structured. Table 6-6 Structure of the Object List of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) Meaning Designation Index (Decimal) Input Index (Decimal) Output Slot 0 Input / Output 30 31 Slot 1 Input / Output 32 33 Slot 2 Input / Output 34 35 Slot 3 Input / Output 36 37 Slot 4 Input / Output 38 39 Slot 5 Input / Output 40 41 Slot 6 Input / Output 42 43 Slot 7 Input / Output 44 45 Slot 31 Input/Ouput 92 93 Diagnostics data Diagnostics data - 110 Parameter data Parameter data - 120 DP inputs DP Input - 130 FMS inputs FMS Input - 140 DP outputs DP Output - 150 FMS outputs FMS Output - 160 Diagnostics event (with FMS service "Event Notification) Diagnost. event - 170 ... The index of the slot of an I/O module can be calculated as follows: Index of an input slot = (Slot 2) + 30 Index of an output slot = (Slot 2) + 31 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-13 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Slot Each I/O module is assigned an object in the static object list. For I/O modules with inputs and outputs, the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) generates two objects (one in the input area and one in the output area). The objects have the object code "Simple-Variable" or "Array". An array can also be accessed via a subindex. The following tables show the structure of the "input" or "output" object for both the "Simple-Variable" and "Array". On the following pages, the coding of I/O modules is described. Table 6-7 "Input" or "Output" Object of the "Simple-Variable" Type INDEX: Table 6-6; permissible index range: 30 to 93 OBJECT_CODE: 7 (Simple-Variable), Tables 6-9 to 6-12 DATA_TYPE_INDEX: Type, Tables 6-9 to 6-12 LENGTH: Tables 6-9 to 6-12 PASSWORD: - ACCESS_GROUPS: - ACCESS_RIGHTS: Tables 6-9 to 6-12 LOCAL ADDRESS: - NAME[16]: Input or output EXTENSION_LENGTH: 0 Table 6-8 "Input" or "Output" Object of the "Array" Type INDEX: Table 6-6; permissible index range: 30 to 93 OBJECT_CODE: 8 (array), Tables 6-9 to 6-12 DATA_TYPE_INDEX: Type, Tables 6-9 to 6-12 LENGTH: Tables 6-9 to 6-12 NUMBER_OF_ELEMENTS: 2 or 4 (depending on number of channels in I/O module) 6-14 PASSWORD: - ACCESS_GROUPS: - ACCESS_RIGHTS: Table 6-9 to 6-12 LOCAL ADDRESS: - NAME[16]: Input or output EXTENSION_LENGTH: 0 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Table 6-9 Coding the I/O Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) Order No. of Module Type Length Access Mode1 ObjectCode2 Delay (ms)3 Current Consumption (mA) Power Loss (W) Digital input modules 6ES5 ...: 420-8MA11 unsigned8 1 R 7 2.5 to 5 16 4.5 421-8MA12 unsigned8 1 R 7 2.3 to 4.5 34 4.5 422-8MA11 unsigned16* 2* R 7 3 to 4 50 4.5 430-8MB11 unsigned8 1 R 7 1.4 to 5 5 430-8MC11 unsigned8 1 R 7 10 to 20 16 2.8 430-8MD11 unsigned8 1 R 7 10 to 20 16 2.5 431-8MA11 unsigned8 1 R 7 4 to 5.5 32 2 431-8MC11 unsigned8 1 R 7 10 to 20 32 2.5 431-8MD11 unsigned8 1 R 7 10 to 20 32 3.6 433-8MA11 unsigned8 1 R 7 1 to 10 6 2.4 437-8EA12 unsigned8 1 R 7 40 50 0.45 2 Digital output modules 6ES5 ...: 440-8MA11 unsigned8 1 R/W 7 <1 15 3 440-8MA21 unsigned8 1 R/W 7 <1 15 4.8 441-8MA11 unsigned8 1 R/W 7 <1 14 3.5 450-8MB11 unsigned8 1 R/W 7 <1 15 5 450-8MD11 unsigned8 1 R/W 7 <1 14 3.5 451-8MA11 unsigned8 1 R/W 7 <1 24 4 451-8MD11 unsigned8 1 R/W 7 <1 25 3.5 451-8MR11 unsigned8 1 R/W 7 <1 30 1.6 451-8MR12 unsigned8 1 R/W 7 <1 30 1.6 452-8MR11 unsigned8 1 R/W 7 <1 14 2 453-8MA11 unsigned8 1 R/W 7 <1 20 1 457-8EA12 unsigned8 1 R/W 7 <1 55 0.5 * Since this module has both inputs and outputs, an "input" and an "output" object are generated. 1 Meanings of abbreviations: R = Read (read access) und W = Write (write access). 2 Meanings of the abbreviations: 7 = Simple-Variable, 8 = Array. The FMS master can access an array element via a subindex. 3 In input modules, the delay is the time elapsing between a change of the input signal and the change of the I/O bus status. In output modules, the delay is the time elapsing between the change of the I/O bus signal and the resulting change of the output status. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-15 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Table 6-10 Coding the I/O Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) Order No. of Module Type Length Access Mode1 Object Code2 Delay (ms) Current Consumption (mA) Power Loss (W) 2 R 1-ch.: 1-ch.: 70 0.7 Analog input modules 6ES5 ...: 464-8MA113 1-channel: 464-8MA213 unsigned16 7 60 100 0.7 464-8MB113 2-channel: 2-ch.: 2-ch.: 70 0.7 464-8MC113 2unsigned16 8 120 70 0.7 464-8MD113 4-channel: 4-ch.: 4-ch.: 70 0.7 464-8ME113 4unsigned16 8 240 70 464-8MF114 1-channel: 1-ch.: 1-ch.: 70 0.9 unsigned16 7 60 2-channel: 2-ch.: 2-ch.: 100 0.9 2unsigned16 8 120 0.9 464-8MF214 2 R 466-8MC11 2unsigned16 2 R 8 120 100 467-8EE114 1-channel: unsigned16 2 R 1-ch.: 7 1-ch.; 60 320 2-ch.: 8 2-ch.: 120 2-channel: 2unsigned16 0.7 to 1 0.7 to 3 Analog output modules 6ES5 ...: 470-8MA11 2unsigned16 2 R/W 8 0.1 3.1 470-8MA12 2unsigned16 2 R/W 8 0.15 3.1 470-8MB11 2unsigned16 2 R/W 8 0.1 3.8 470-8MB12 2unsigned16 2 R/W 8 0.15 3.8 470-8MC11 2unsigned16 2 R/W 8 0.1 3.8 470-8MC12 2unsigned16 2 R/W 8 0.15 3.8 470-8MD11 2unsigned16 2 R/W 8 0.1 3.1 470-8MD12 2unsigned16 2 R/W 8 0.15 3.1 470-8MD21 2unsigned16 2 R/W 8 477-8EC11 2unsigned16* 2* R/W 8 350 3.2 * Since this module has both inputs and outputs, an "input" and an "output" object are generated. 1 Meanings of abbreviations: R = Read (read access) und W = Write (write access). 2 Meanings of the abbreviations: 7 = Simple-Variable, 8 = Array. The FMS master can access an array element via a subindex. 3 These analog modules can be operated with one channel, two channels or four channels. 4 These analog modules can be operated with either one channel or two channels. 6-16 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Table 6-11 Coding the I/O Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) Order No. of Module Type Length Access Mode1 Object Code2 2* R/W 7 1 R 7 1 R 7 Delay (ms) Current Consumption (mA) Power Loss (W) Input/output module: 482-8MA11 -8MA12 -8MA13 unsigned16* 50 4.5 Power supply module: 935-8ME113 2unsigned8 7.5 Simulator module: 788-8MA11 unsigned8 0.3 < 0.2 30 unsigned8 1 R/W unsigned8* 1* R/W 7 Timer module: 380-8MA11 10 Counter modules: 385-8MA11 unsigned8* 1* R/W 7 385-8MB11 2unsigned16* 2* R/W 8 1 R 7 0.18 20 2.5 70 1.9 5 35 0.3 Comparator module: 461-8MA11 unsigned8 Closed-loop control modules:4 262-8MA11 -8MA12 4unsigned16* 2* R/W 8 100 to 200 20 262-8MB11 -8MB12 4unsigned16* 2* R/W 8 100 to 200 20 Positioning modules: 263-8MA113 4unsigned16* 2* R/W 8 266-8MA11 4unsigned16* 2* R/W 8 267-8MA11 2unsigned16* 2* R/W 8 120 4 150 * Since this module has both inputs and outputs, an "input" and an "output" object are generated. 1 Meanings of abbreviations: R = Read (read access) und W = Write (write access). 2 Meanings of the abbreviations: 7 = Simple-Variable, 8 = Array. The FMS master can access an array element via a subindex. 3 The module requires two slots. 4 The minimum access interval for these closed-loop control modules is 200 ms in an ET 200 system. FBs 61 and 62 may not be used. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-17 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Table 6-12 Coding the I/O Modules in an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) Order No. of Module Type Length Access Mode1 Object Code2 2* R/W 8 2* R/W 8 4unsigned16* 2* R/W 521-8MA21 4unsigned16* 2* 330-8MA11 or no module - - Delay (ms) Current Consumption (mA) Power Loss (W) Electronic cam controller module IP 264: 264-8MA113 4unsigned16* 120 4 8 180 1.6 R/W 8 140 1.2 - - High Speed Sub Control IP 265:4 265-8MA01 4unsigned16* CP 521 BASIC: 521-8MB11 CP 521 SI: 0 * Since this module has both inputs and outputs, an "input" and an "output" object are generated. 1 Meanings of abbreviations: R = Read (read access) und W = Write (write access). 2 Meanings of the abbreviations: 7 = Simple-Variable, 8 = Array. The FMS master can access an array element via a subindex. 3 The module requires two slots. 4 The IP 265 can only be operated in Slow Mode. 6-18 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Diagnostics Data The "diagnostics data" object contains the diagnostics messages of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS). The FMS master can read the "diagnostics data" object. The following tables show the structure of the "diagnostics data" object and the diagnostics messages, respectively. Table 6-13 "Diagnostics Data" Object INDEX: 110 OBJECT_CODE: 7 (Simple-Variable) DATA_TYPE_INDEX: 10 (Octet string) LENGTH: 13 LOCAL ADDRESS: - PASSWORD: - ACCESS_GROUPS: - ACCESS_RIGHTS: R NAME[16]: Diagnostics data EXTENSION_LENGTH: 0 The length of the diagnostics messages is 13 octets: Table 6-14 Structure of the Diagnostics Messages of the ET 200U(DP Standard/ FMS) Octet Diagnostics Message 1 Station status 1 2 Station status 2 3 Station status 3 4 DP master address 5 Manufacturer identification (I) 6 Manufacturer identification (II) 7 Header (station diagnostics) 8 Station diagnostics 9 Header (module diagnostics) 10 Module diagnostics (slots 0 to 7) 11 Module diagnostics (slots 8 to 15) 12 Module diagnostics (slots 16 to 23) 13 Module diagnostics (slots 24 to 31) The following tables describe the meanings of the various diagnostics messages: ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-19 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Note If only FMS masters are on the bus, you can only evaluate bit 3 of station status 1 of the "station status 1" and "station status 2" diagnostics messages. If the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) is also accessed by a DP master, all diagnostics messages for station statuses 1 and 2 can be evaluated. Station status 1: Table 6-15 Meaning of Station Status 1 Bit 6-20 Diagnostics Message 0 1: ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) cannot be accessed. 1 1: ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) is not ready for interchange of data. 2 1: The data sent by the DP master to the ET 200U(DP Standard/ FMS) do not comply with the configuration of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS). 3 1: Either station or module diagnostics selected. 4 1: Function is not supported. 5 0: Bit is always "0". 6 1: Parameter error, e.g. illegal manufacturer identification, invalid DP parameter message. 7 1: ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) has been parameterized by another DP master than the one currently accessing the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS). ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Station status 2: Table 6-16 Meaning of Station Status 2 Bit Diagnostics Message 0 1: ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) must be parameterized again. 1 1: ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) cannot continue to execute unless fault has been remedied. 2 1: Bit is always "1". 3 1: Response monitoring has been activated. 4 1: ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) is in "FREEZE" mode. 5 1: ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) is in "SYNC" mode. 6 0: Bit is always "0". 7 1: ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) is deactivated, i.e. the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) is not cyclically accessed by the DP master. Station status 3: The "station status 3" diagnostics message is not available. DP master address: The station number of the DP master that has parameterized the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) is entered in the octet string "master address". If only FMS masters are on the bus, the "master address" includes the value "FFH". Manufacturer identification: The manufacturer identification contains the number especially reserved for the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) by the PROFIBUS User Organization. The manufacturer identification takes two octets. The manufacturer identification for the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) is "8009H". Manufacturer identification (I) contains "80H" whereas manufacturer identification (II) has the value "09H". ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-21 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C "Station diagnostics" header: The "station diagnostics" header specifies the scope and contents of the diagnostics information that follows. Table 6-17 Meaning of the "Station Diagnostics" Header Bit Diagnostics Message 0 0: 1 1: 2 0: 3 0: 4 0: 5 0: 6 0: 7 0: Length g of the station diagnostics g including g header ((station diagnostics) = 2 octets. C d for Code f station t ti diagnostics. di ti Station diagnostics: The station diagnostics message provides general information on the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Table 6-18 Information Content of Station Diagnostics Bit 6-22 Diagnostics Message 0 1: ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) executes in "Slow Mode". 1 1: Configuration data do not correspond to comodulemodulemodulenfiguration of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS). 2 0: Bit is always "0". 3 1: I/O module removed or bus unit of ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) defective. The slot of the I/O module or bus unit is specified in the module diagnostics. 4 1: No load voltage or output fault to ground (for I/O modules with diagnostics facility only) 5 1: Incorrect activation of an output (short-circuit to L+; for I/O modules with diagnostics facility only) 6 0: Bit is always "0". 7 0: Bit is always "0". ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C "Module diagnostics" header: The "module diagnostics" header specifies the scope and contents of the diagnostics information that follows. Table 6-19 Bit Meaning of the "Module Diagnostics" Header Diagnostics Message 0 1: 1 0: 2 1: 3 0: 4 0: 5 0: 6 1: 7 0: Length g of the module diagnostics g includingg header (mod( ule diagnostics) = 5 octets. C d for Code f module d l diagnostics. di ti Note When a module announces diagnostics mode, up to 150 ms might elapse from the entry for station diagnostics to the following entry for module diagnostics. Module diagnostics (slots 0 to 7): The module diagnostics message names the faulty I/O module. Table 6-20 Bit ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Information Content of Module Diagnostics (Slots 0 to 7) Diagnostics Message 0 Module in slot "0" faulty. 1 Module in slot "1" faulty. 2 Module in slot "2" faulty. 3 Module in slot "3" faulty. 4 Module in slot "4" faulty. 5 Module in slot "5" faulty. 6 Module in slot "6" faulty. 7 Module in slot "7" faulty. 6-23 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Module diagnostics (slots 8 to 15): Table 6-21 Bit Information Content of Module Diagnostics (Slots 8 to 15) Diagnostics Message 0 Module in slot "8" faulty. 1 Module in slot "9" faulty. 2 Module in slot "10" faulty. 3 Module in slot "11" faulty. 4 Module in slot "12" faulty. 5 Module in slot "13" faulty. 6 Module in slot "14" faulty. 7 Module in slot "15" faulty. Module diagnostics (slots 16 to 23): Table 6-22 Bit Information Content of Module Diagnostics (Slots 16 to 23) Diagnostics Message 0 Module in slot "16" faulty. 1 Module in slot "17" faulty. 2 Module in slot "18" faulty. 3 Module in slot "19" faulty. 4 Module in slot "20" faulty. 5 Module in slot "21" faulty. 6 Module in slot "22" faulty. 7 Module in slot "23" faulty. Module diagnostics (Slots 24 to 31): Table 6-23 Bit 6-24 Information Content of Module Diagnostics (Slots 24 to 31) Diagnostics Message 0 Module in slot "24" faulty. 1 Module in slot "25" faulty. 2 Module in slot "26" faulty. 3 Module in slot "27" faulty. 4 Module in slot "28" faulty. 5 Module in slot "29" faulty. 6 Module in slot "30" faulty. 7 Module in slot "31" faulty. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Parameter Data The "parameter data" object contains parameters specific to the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS). The "parameter data" object has the following structure: Table 6-24 "Parameter Data" Object INDEX: 120 OBJECT_CODE: 7 (Simple-Variable) DATA_TYPE_INDEX: 10 (Octet-String) LENGTH: 1 LOCAL ADDRESS: - PASSWORD: - ACCESS_GROUPS: - ACCESS_RIGHTS: R/W NAME[16]: Parameter data EXTENSION_LENGTH: 0 The following applies for the ET 200U(FMS): The FMS master has write access to the "parameter data" object. The following applies for the ET 200U in a mixed configuration and the combi-slave: The DP master has write access to the "parameter data" object, the FMS master may only read this object. In the event of a failure of the DP master, the FMS master has write access to the "parameter data" object. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-25 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Meanings of the parameter data: Table 6-25 Bit Meanings of the Parameter Data Parameter Data 0 Result when removing or inserting modules or if bus unit is defective 0: In the case of a fault, all outputs are set to "0". The ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) does not enter the STOP mode. 1: The ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) discontinues "shifting" on the I/O bus. It reads again all the modules plugged in and resumes data interchange with the current values. The output states are retained while "shifting" is discontinued! 1 Evaluating the diagnostics data of modules with diagnostics capability 0: Diagnostics data of modules with diagnostics capability are not evaluated. 1: If modules with diagnostics capability are inserted, the diagnostics data are evaluated. 2 Mode of the IM 318-C 0: The IM 318-C is operated as ET 200U(DP Standard), as ET 200U(FMS) or as ET 200U(DP Standard) in a mixed configuration. 1: The IM 318-C is operated as a combi-slave. 3 I/O bus speed 0: The I/O bus is not operated in "Slow Mode". 1: The I/O bus is operated in "Slow Mode". Bits 4 to 7 cannot be assigned. 6-26 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C DP Inputs The "DP inputs" object can be used by the FMS master to read all inputs of an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) assigned to a DP master. Table 6-26 FMS Inputs "DP Inputs" Object INDEX: 130 OBJECT_CODE: 7 (Simple-Variable) DATA_TYPE_INDEX: 10 (Octet-String) LENGTH: Depending on configuration of ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) LOCAL ADDRESS: - PASSWORD: - ACCESS_GROUPS: - ACCESS_RIGHTS: R NAME[16]: DP Input EXTENSION_LENGTH: 0 The "FMS inputs" object can be used by the FMS master to read all inputs of an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) assigned to an FMS master. The "FMS inputs" object has the following structure: Table 6-27 "FMS Inputs" Object INDEX: 140 OBJECT_CODE: 7 (Simple-Variable) DATA_TYPE_INDEX: 10 (Octet-String) LENGTH: Depending on configuration of ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) LOCAL ADDRESS: - PASSWORD: - ACCESS_GROUPS: - ACCESS_RIGHTS: R NAME[16]: FMS Input EXTENSION_LENGTH: 0 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-27 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C DP Outputs The "DP outputs" object can be used by the FMS master to read all outputs of an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) assigned to a DP master. Table 6-28 FMS Outputs "DP Outputs" Object INDEX: 150 OBJECT_CODE: 7 (Simple-Variable) DATA_TYPE_INDEX: 10 (Octet-String) LENGTH: Depending on configuration of ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) LOCAL ADDRESS: - PASSWORD: - ACCESS_GROUPS: - ACCESS_RIGHTS: R NAME[16]: DP Output EXTENSION_LENGTH: 0 The "FMS outputs" object can be used by the FMS master to read or write all outputs of an ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) assigned to the FMS master. The "FMS outputs" object has the following structure: Table 6-29 6-28 "FMS Outputs" Object INDEX: 160 OBJECT_CODE: 7 (Simple-Variable) DATA_TYPE_INDEX: 10 (Octet-String) LENGTH: Depending on configuration of ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) LOCAL ADDRESS: - PASSWORD: - ACCESS_GROUPS: - ACCESS_RIGHTS: R/W NAME[16]: FMS Output EXTENSION_LENGTH: 0 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Diagnostics Event (with "Event-Notification") If events are enabled using the FMS service "Alter-Event-Condition-Monitoring", an open link (MSZY_SI or MSAZ_SI) has been parameterized and if there is any change in a diagnostics message, the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) uses the "Event-Notification" to transmit a low-priority message together with the diagnostics data to the FMS master. The diagnostics message thus transmitted is sent only once and need not be acknowledged with the FMS service "Acknowledge-Event- Notification". The "diagnostics event" object has the following structure. Table 6-30 "Diagnostics Event" Object INDEX: 170 OBJECT_CODE: 4 (Event) INDEX_EVENT_DATA: 120 LENGTH: - PASSWORD: - ACCESS_GROUP: - ACCESS_RIGHTS: Wa/Da ENABLED: false (no event is issued during startup) NAME[16]: Diagnost. Event EXTENSION_LENGTH: 0 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-29 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C 6.3.3 List of Communication Links (KBL) The list of communication links (KBL) contains all the associations between the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) and the FMS master. The communication links are relevant for configuring the FMS master. The list of communication links is based on the definitions in the sensors/actuators profile. The list of communication links is followed by the definitions of the terms employed. Table 6-31 KR 2 Master-Slave, Cyclic, Read Type ATTR Local LSAP RSAP O 20 All MSZY Max. PDU Size Send HiPrio 0 Table 6-32 KR 3 Send Rec. LoPrio HiPrio 241 0 0 Table 6-33 KR 4 241 241 6-30 0 0 SAC 0 RAC 0 Features Supported FMS Services Supported 00 00 00 00 20 00 Read.ind ACI, CCI 3000 Master-Slave, Cyclic, Write Type ATTR Local LSAP RSAP O 21 All MSZY Send Rec. LoPrio HiPrio 241 0 RADR SCC All 0 RCC 0 SAC RAC 0 0 Features Supported FMS Services Supported 00 00 00 00 10 00 Write.ind ACI, CCI 3000 Rec. LoPrio 241 Master-Slave, Cyclic, with Slave Initiation, Read Type ATTR Local LSAP RSAP O 22 All MSZY_SI Max. PDU Size Send HiPrio All RCC Rec. LoPrio Max. PDU Size Send HiPrio RADR SCC Send Rec. LoPrio HiPrio 241 0 RADR SCC All 0 RCC 0 SAC RAC 1 Features Supported FMS Services Supported 00 00 10 00 20 00 Read.ind Event-Notification.req 0 ACI, CCI 3000 Rec. LoPrio 241 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Table 6-34 KR 5 Master-Slave, Cyclic, with Slave Initiation, Write Type ATTR Local LSAP RSAP O 23 All MSZY_SI Max. PDU Size Send HiPrio 241 Table 6-35 KR 6 Send Rec. LoPrio HiPrio 241 0 241 Table 6-36 KR 7 241 0 *: 0 0 SAC RAC 1 ACI, CCI 0 Features Supported FMS Services Supported 00 00 10 00 10 00 Write.ind Event-Notification.req 3000 Master-Slave, Acyclic, with Slave Initiation Type ATTR Local LSAP RSAP O 24 All MSAZ_SI Send Rec. LoPrio HiPrio 241 0 RADR SCC All 0 RCC 1 SAC RAC 1 ACI, CCI 0 3000 Features Supported FMS Services Supported 00 00 10 80 33 06 Read.ind Write.ind Phys-Read.ind* Phys-Write.ind* Get-OV-long.ind Event-Notification.req Acknowledge-Event-Notification.ind Alter-Event-Condition-Monitoring.ind Rec. LoPrio 241 Master-Slave, Acyclic Type ATTR Local LSAP RSAP O 25 All MSAZ Max. PDU Size Send HiPrio All RCC Rec. LoPrio Max. PDU Size Send HiPrio RADR SCC Send Rec. LoPrio HiPrio 241 0 RADR SCC All 0 RCC 1 SAC RAC 0 ACI, CCI 0 Features Supported FMS Services Supported 00 00 00 80 33 00 Read.ind Write.ind Phys-Read.ind* Phys-Write.ind* Get-OV-long.ind 3000 Rec. LoPrio 241 Although this service is supported by the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), it cannot be used here. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-31 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C Table 6-37 KR 8 Master-Slave, Acyclic, with Event Acknowledgement for Cyclic Links Type ATTR Local LSAP RSAP O 26 All MSAZ Max. PDU Size Send HiPrio 0 *: 6-32 Send Rec. LoPrio HiPrio 241 0 RADR SCC All 0 RCC 1 SAC RAC 0 0 ACI, CCI 3000 Features Supported FMS Services Supported 00 00 00 80 33 06 Read.ind Write.ind Phys-Read.ind* Phys-Write.ind* Get-OV-long.ind Acknowledge-Event-Notification.ind Alter-Event-Condition-Monitoring.ind Rec. LoPrio 241 Although this service is supported by the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), it cannot be used here. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C KR The communication references (KR) designate the associations described in the list of communication links. The communication references are numbered from 2 to 8 in the list of communication links. Communication reference 0 contains general definitions. Type The "type" describes the communication link between the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) and the FMS master. There are six different types of link: Table 6-38 ATTR Types of Link of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) Abbreviation Meaning MSAZ Master-slave link for acyclic data communications without slave initiation MSAZ_SI Master-slave link for acyclic data communications with slave initiation MSZY Master-slave link for cyclic data communications without slave initiation MSZY_SI Master-slave link for cyclic data communications with slave initiation The link attribute (ATTR) states whether a link is open (O) or defined (D). In open links, layer-2 addresses are not entered until the link is being established. Local LSAP The Local Link-Service-Access-Point (Local LSAP) is the service access point of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) at which the message crosses the interface between layer 2 and layer 7. RSAP The Remote-Service-Access-Point (RSAP) is the service access point of the FMS master at which the message crosses the interface between layer 2 and layer 7. RADR The Remote Address (RADR) is the station number of the FMS master. SCC Send Confirmed Request Counter RCC Receive Confirmed Request Counter SAC Send Acknowledged Request Counter RAC Receive Acknowledged Request Counter ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-33 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C ACI, CCI Acyclic Control Interval, Cyclic Control Interval An interval of 30 s in which the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) checks whether a link still exists. Max. PDU Size Specifies the maximum length of a Protocol Data Unit. Features Supported Specifies the FMS services supported by the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) in a link. 6-34 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C 6.4 Using LEDs to Diagnose Problems Figure 6-3 Fault LEDs on the ET 200U Interface Module The following table explains the meanings of the fault LEDs: Table 6-39 LED Fault Messages from ET 200U LED Optical Signal Explanation RUN Lit Normal operation (load voltage supply available) BUS-FAULT Lit No FMS link established The following three fault messages are valid only if a DP master is also connected to the bus: Response time has run out and the ET 200U was not addressed. During system start-up or power up: ET 200U not yet parameterized. No connection between bus and ET 200U. IM-FAULT ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Lit or flashing BUS-FAULT und IM-FAULT Lit BUS-FAULT und IM-FAULT Flashing Fault in the I/O bus (e.g. bus unit defective) Hardware fault in the ET 200U interface module The configured station address is not within the permitted range (1 to 125) 6-35 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C 6.5 Example of Programming a Link between an ET 200U(FMS) and a CP 5431 FMS The following example is intended as an introduction into programming a link between an ET 200U(FMS) and a CP 5431 FMS with SINEC NCM using a typical configuration. The CP 5431 supports the "MSZY" and "MSAZ" links. The configuration of an ET 200U(FMS) is shown below: 8DO 8DI ET 200U Station number 4 Two types of link can be configured: MSZY (Cyclic reading of inputs, cyclic setting of outputs) and MSAZ (Configuring the FMS service "Identify"). 6-36 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C 6.5.1 Programming a Cyclic Link (MSZY) The example describes the cyclic reading of inputs and cyclic setting of the outputs. The 8DI input module is addressed via peripheral byte PB 100 in the input area, the 8DO output module is addressed via peripheral byte PB 100 in the output area. Prerequisite: You have started SINEC NCM and are now in the selection screen. You have completed the "Init-Edit start screen" and the "Edit - CP Init basic initialisation" screens. 1. Change to the "Input/output (I/O) areas" screen via "Edit - I/O - I/O areas": CP type: CP5431 Source: C:QENGLHW Input/Output (I/O) - Areas : L2 station address: 1 INPUT AREAS: CI STA OY 0 CI END OY 255 OUTPUT AREAS: CI STA OY 0 F 1 F 2 CI END OY 255 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 OK F 8 SELECT Figure 6-4 "Input/Output (I/O) Areas" Screen 2. Enter the areas for the "8DI" and the "8DO" and confirm your input with <F7> (OK). Result: This takes you to the selection screen. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-37 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C 3. Select "Edit - I/O - CI editor" to call up the "CI editor" screen and then enter the relevant values for the "8DI" and the "8DO": CP Type: CP5431 Source: C:QENGLHW CI Editor L2 station address: 1 Output area: from OY 0 Rem.add. DSAP 4 20 4 21 F 1 Input area: F 2 to Passwd F 3 OY 255 Index 30 33 from OY 0 to OY 255 Vartype I/O Input/output area UN08 I OY 100 OY 100 UN08 O OY 100 OY 100 F 4 F 5 INSERT F 6 DELETE F 7 M Mon.int. 1 3000 1 3000 OK F 8 SELECT Figure 6-5 "CI Editor" Screen Result: You have now configured the I/O modules for cyclic data communications. You can now access the I/O modules via load/transfer operations, such as "L IB 100" or "T QB 100", in the STEP 5 program. Prerequisite: Use job number 210 to call up the "SEND" FB and job number 211 to call up the "RECEIVE" FB. 6-38 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C 6.5.2 Programming an Acyclic Link (MSAZ) The example describes the configuration of the FMS service "Identify" in an acyclic link. Prerequisite: You have started SINEC NCM and are now in the selection screen. You have completed the "Init - Edit start screen" and the "Edit - CP Init basic initialisation" screens. 1. Enter the relevant values in the "CP link programming" screen in order to configure an acyclic link. Enter "26" in the "Remote LSAP" input field for an acyclic link ( Table 6-37, Section 6.3.3); enter the station number of the ET 200U(FMS) in the "Remote L2 address" input field. SINEC NCM Source:QET200U CP Link Programming Communication reference: LOCAL PROGRAMMING PLC details SSNR: 0 ANR: 1 ANZW: MW 100 PRIO: LOW Local LSAP: + 1 F 2 - 1 58 F 3 INPUT Type of link: MSAC Monitoring interval: REMOTE PROGRAMMING Remote LSAP: 26 Password: Access to variables: F 1 2 F 4 3000 * 10 ms Max. PDU length: 241 Remote L2 address: 4 F 5 F 6 DELETE F 7 OK F 8 SELECT Figure 6-6 "CP Link Programming" Screen 2. Confirm your inputs by means of <F7> (OK). Result: You have now completed the configuring procedure. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-39 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C 3. Change to the "Request editor initialisation" screen via "Tools - Request- Editor - Init". Then enter the name of the program file and the data block for the request buffer: CP type: CP5431 Request Editor Initialisation F 1 F 2 PROGRAM FILE C : NONAMEST.S5D BLOCK DB 100 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 OK F 8 SELECT Figure 6-7 "Request Editor Initialisation " Screen 4. Confirm the above inputs and using <F7> (OK). 6-40 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C 5. Change to the "Request editor" screen via "Tools - Create request buffer". 6. Activate <F3> (NEW) in order to be able to select the FMS service "Identify": 7. Position the cursor to "IDENTIFY VFD:" and activate <F7> (OK). CP type: CP5431 Source: NONAMEST.S5D DB 100 Request Editor Service Selection READ VARIABLE: WRITE VARIABLE: REQUEST STATUS: IDENTIFY VFD: F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 OK F 8 Figure 6-8 "Request Editor Service Selection" Screen Result: This takes you to the "Request Editor" screen with the "IDENTIFY" service. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 6-41 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS): Modes, Settings and Comm. Capabilities of IM 318-C 8. Enter, for instance, "DB 10" from data word "1" as S5 destination address and "-1" as default length. CP type: CP 5431 Source: NONAMEST.S5D Request Editor DB 100 IDENTIFY TIMEOUT S5 DEST ADD LENGTH 100 DB 10 1 -1 PARAMETERS OF THE SEND DIR CALL FOR TRIGGERING THE SERVICE Q-TYP : DB DB-NR : 100 F 1 F 2 F 3 Q-ANF : F 4 1 Q-LAE : 8 F 5 F 6 F 7 OK F 8 SELECT Figure 6-9 "Request Editor" Screen 9. Confirm your inputs by means of <F7> (OK). Result: You can now use the "Identify" service in the STEP 5 program. For requirements of the STEP 5 program, such as initiating the FMS service, making entries in the FB SEND data handling block, etc. refer to the CP 5431 FMS Manual. 6-42 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing 7 7.1 Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7.2 Connecting Current and Voltage Sensors to Analog Input Modules . . . . . Voltage Measurement with Isolated / Non-Isolated Thermocouples . . . . . Connection of Thermocouples with Compensa-ting Box to Module 464-8MA11/8MA21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Wire Connection of Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Two-Wire Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Four-Wire Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring of the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More than Two Four-Wire Transducer Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Wire Break Detection with 6ES5 464-8ME11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Resistance Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 7-3 7-5 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-9 7.3 Start-Up of Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 7.4 Analog Value Representation of Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 7.5 Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Loads to Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation of Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 7-25 7-27 Figures 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10 Voltage Measuring with Isolated Thermocouples (6ES5 464-8MA11/8MA21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Measuring with Non-Isolated Thermocouples (6ES5 464-8MA11/8MA21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors (6ES5 464-8MB11, 464-8MC11, 466-8MC11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Wire Connection of Current Sensors (6ES5 464-8MD11) . . . . . . . . . Connection of Two-Wire Transducers (6ES5 464-8ME11) . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Four-Wire Transducers (6ES5 464-8ME11) . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Method for PT 100 (6ES5 464-8MF11/8MF21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Possibilities for Input Modules (6ES5 464-8MF11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Connection via a Four-Wire Circuit (6ES5 470-8MA11, 6ES5 470-8MD11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection via a Two-Wire Circuit (6ES5 470-8MB11, 6ES5 470-8MC11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 7-4 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-26 7-27 Analog Value Processing Tables 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-15 7-16 Settings for the Operating Mode Switch for Analog Input Modules 464-8 to 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Settings for the Operating Mode Switch for Analog Input Module 464-8MA21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Settings for the Operating Mode Switch for Analog Input Module 464-8MF21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Representation of an Analog Input Value as Bit Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Analog Input Modules 464-8MA11, -8MF11, -8MB11 (Bipolar Fixed-Point Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Analog Input Modules 464-8MC11, -8MD11 (Bipolar Fixed-Point Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Analog Input Module 464-8ME11, 4 4 to 20 mA (Absolute Value) . . . . . . . 7-18 Analog Input Module 464-8MF11, 2 PT 100 (Unipolar) Analog Input Module 464-8MF21, 2 PT 100 "No Linearization" (Unipolar) 7-19 Analog Input Module 464-8MF21, 2 PT 100 "with Linearization" (Bipolar), to DIN IEC 751 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Analog Input Module 464-8MA21, 4 "50 mV with Linearization and with Temperature Compensation (Bipolar); Thermoelement Type K (Nickel-Chromium/Nickel-Aluminium, according to IEC 584) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Analog Input Module 464-8MA21, 4 "50 mV with Linearization and with Temperature Compensation (Bipolar); Thermoelement Type J (Iron/Copper- Nickel (Konstantan) according to IEC 584) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Analog Input Module 464-8MA21, 4 "50 mV with Linearization and with Temperature Compensation (Bipolar); Thermoelement Type L (Iron/Copper- Nickel (Konstantan), according to 43710) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Analog Input Module 466-8MC11, 4 0 to 10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Representation of an Analog Output Value as a Bit Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 Output Voltages and Currents for Analog Output Modules (Fixed-Point Number Bipolar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Output Voltages and Currents for Analog Output Modules (Unipolar) . . . . 7-28 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing 7 The "Analog Value Processing" chapter contains wiring instructions for the analog modules and notes on processing analog values. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 7-1 Analog Value Processing 7.1 Analog Input Modules Analog input modules convert analog process signals to digital values that the CPU can process (via the process image input table, PII). In the following sections, you will find information about the operating principle, wiring methods, start-up and programming of analog input modules. 7-2 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing 7.2 Connecting Current and Voltage Sensors to Analog Input Modules Observe the following rules to connect current and voltage sensors to analog input modules: When you have multi-channel operations, assign the channels in ascending order. This shortens the data cycle. Use terminals 1 and 2 - for the connection of a compensating box (464-8MA11) or - for the supply of two-wire transducers (464-8ME11). Terminals 1 and 2 cannot be used with the remaining analog input modules. Short-circuit the terminals of unused inputs to increase interference immunity. The potential difference between the common references of the inputs must not exceed 1 V. To prevent this, set the reference potentials of the sensors to a common reference potential. Voltage Measurement with Isolated / Non-Isolated Thermocouples Module 464-8MA11/8MA21 is recommended for voltage measurement with thermocouples. With floating sensors (e.g., isolated thermocouples), the permissible potential difference VCM between the minus terminals of the inputs and the potential of the standard mounting rail must not be exceeded. To avoid this, the negative potential of the sensor must be connected to the central grounding point (see Figure 7-1). Jumper terminals 1 and 2 together if you do not use compensation boxes. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 7-3 Analog Value Processing 1 3 5 + 4 - + 2 Reference Junction 7 9 6 - 8 + - Compen- sating Box 10 Thermal Coupling Figure 7-1 Voltage Measuring with Isolated Thermocouples (6ES5 464-8MA11/8MA21) With non-floating sensors (e.g., non-isolated thermocouples) the permissible potential difference VCM must not be exceeded (see maximum values of the individual modules). 1 3 5 + 4 - + 2 Reference Junction + - Compen- sating Box 7 6 - 9 8 10 VCM Thermal Coupling Figure 7-2 Voltage Measuring with Non-Isolated Thermocouples (6ES5 464-8MA11/8MA21) 7-4 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing Connection of Thermocouples with Compensa- ting Box to Module 464-8MA11/8MA21 You can use a compensation box to compensate for the influence of the temperature on the reference junction (e.g. terminal box). Observe the following rules: The compensation box must have a floating supply. The power supply must have a grounded shielding winding. The compensation box must be connected to terminals 1 and 2 of the terminal block. Two-Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors You can use the following three modules to connect voltage sensors: Analog Input Module 464-8MB11 for voltages of 1 V Analog Input Module 464-8MC11 for voltages of 10 V and Analog Input Module 466-8MC11 for voltages from 0 to 10 V Figure 7-3 shows the two-wire connection of voltage sensors. 1 3 2 + 5 7 9 4 6 8 - + - + - + U U U 10 - U Figure 7-3 Two-Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors (6ES5 464-8MB11, 464-8MC11, 466-8MC11) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 7-5 Analog Value Processing Two-Wire Connection of Current Sensors You can use module 464-8MD11 for the two-wire connection of current sensors. Figure 7-4 shows the two-wire connection of current sensors. 1 3 2 + 5 7 9 4 6 8 - + - + - + 10 - Figure 7-4 Two-Wire Connection of Current Sensors (6ES5 464-8MD11) 7-6 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing Connection of Two-Wire Transducers Use the 24 V inputs 1 and 2 of analog input module 464-8ME11 to supply two-wire transducers. A two-wire transducer converts the supplied voltage to a current of 4 mA to 20 mA. For wiring connections, see Figure 7-5. 1 3 5 + 4 6 - + - 2 L+ M Two- Wire Transducer 7 9 8 10 Two- Wire Transducer Figure 7-5 Connection of Two-Wire Transducers (6ES5 464-8ME11) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 7-7 Analog Value Processing Connection of Four-Wire Transducers If you use a four-wire transducer, connect it as follows (Figure 7-6): 1 3 2 U 5 4 7 6 9 8 10 - + - + - + - + Four-wire transducer Figure 7-6 Connection of Four-Wire Transducers (6ES5 464-8ME11) Wiring of the Terminal Block Note that four-wire transducers require their own power supply. Connect the "+" pole of the four-wire transducer to the corresponding "-" pole of the terminal block (a connection technique that is the opposite of the two-wire transducer). Connect all negative terminals of the four-wire transducer to terminal two of the terminal block. More than Two Four-Wire Transducer Connections If four-wire transducers with more than 2 "-" terminals are connected: Connect the "-" terminals to the same potential (terminal strip or terminal block) and Connect the terminal strip with terminal 2 of the terminal block. Reason for this measure: Only 2 wires may be connected per terminal of the terminal block. No Wire Break Detection with 6ES5 464-8ME11 7-8 Inputs 4, 6, 8 and 10 of analog module 464-8ME11 are connected internally via shunt resistors. Because of the internal shunt resistors, broken wire signalling is not possible. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing Connection of Resistance Thermometers You can use analog input module 464-8MF11/8MF21 to connect resistance thermometers (e.g. PT 100). The resistance of the PT 100 is measured in a four-wire circuit. A constant current is supplied to the resistance thermometer via terminals 7 and 8 as well as via terminals 9 and 10, so that voltage drops in these constant current circuits do not affect the measurement results. The measuring inputs have a high resistance so that only a negligible current loss develops in the measuring circuits. M0+ M1+ IC0+ IC1+ 3 5 7 9 1 2 4 6 8 10 Terminal Assignments (3/4): Measuring Circuit M0 (5/6): Measuring Circuit M1 (7/8): Constant Current Circuit IC0 (9/10): Constant Current Circuit IC1 Figure 7-7 Wiring Method for PT 100 (6ES5 464-8MF11/8MF21) If you use only one channel for PT 100 measurement (e.g., channel 0), you can use the other channel for voltage measurement (500 mV). In this case, use terminals M+/M- for the signal connection and short circuit terminals IC+ and IC-. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 7-9 Analog Value Processing 1 3 2 + 5 7 4 6 - + - U 9 8 10 U Figure 7-8 Wiring Possibilities for Input Modules (6ES5 464-8MF11) 7-10 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing 7.3 Start-Up of Analog Input Modules When using analog input modules 464-8 through 11, set the intended operating mode using the switches on the front panel. These switches are located on the right side at the top of the front panel of the module. Set the switch to the available power supply frequency. This selects the integration time of the A/D converters for optimal interference voltage suppression. The frequencies are as follows: Power frequency 50 Hz Integration time 20 ms Power frequency 60 Hz Integration time 16.66 ms Set the number of channels you wish to assign on the input module. If there are fewer than four channels, less address space will be assigned and meas- ured values will be updated faster. Once you activate the broken wire signal, a break in one of the lines to the sensor (thermocouple or PT 100) or in the sensor itself causes the red LED above the function selection switch to light up. At the same time, the broken wire error bit F (bit 1, byte 1) for the faulty channel is set. The module recognizes a wire break by applying a conventional tripping current to the input terminals and comparing the resulting voltage to a limit value. If there is a wire break in the sensor or the lines, the voltage exceeds the limit value and a "wire break" signal is sent. When the signal at the input is measured with a digital voltmeter, the tripping current pulses cause apparent fluctuations of the signal. Deactivation of the wire break signal does not turn off the tripping current. Table 7-1 Settings for the Operating Mode Switch for Analog Input Modules 464-8 to 11 Function Power Supply Frequency Operation Wire Break ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Settings for Operating Mode Switch 50 Hz 60 Hz 4 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 Channel (Ch 0) 2 Channels (Ch 0 and Ch 1) 4 Channels (Ch 0 to Ch 3) 4 4 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 With Wire Break Signal No Wire Break Signal 4 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 7-11 Analog Value Processing The following additional operating mode switch selections are possible with analog module 464-8MA21: With this function, you can obtain a characteristic linearization of the thermocouples of type J, K, and L. With module 464-8MA21, the linearization must always be activated together with the corresponding compensation of the reference point temperature. Thermocouples: Type J: - 200 _C ... + 200 _C Type K: - 200 _C ... + 1369 _C Type L: - 199 _C ... + 900 _C (in steps of 1 _C in each case). For the thermocouples of type J, K, and L, you can compensate for the temperature of the reference point using a compensating box (see Figure 7-1). It is also possible to move the reference point to the front of the module by activating the "temperature compensation" function. When thermocouples are directly connected, an internal circuit on the module causes the digital value "0" to be displayed independently of the temperature of the terminal when the temperature at the measuring junction is 0 _C (32 _F). To accomplish this, connect the terminals of the sensors directly to the module (i.e., without a copper extension cable). Table 7-2 Settings for the Operating Mode Switch for Analog Input Module 464-8MA21 Function Power Supply Frequency Operation Setting for Operating Mode Switch 50 Hz 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Channel (Ch 0) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7-12 60 Hz 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 Channels (Ch 0 and Ch 1) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 Channels (Ch 0 to 3) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing Table 7-2 Settings for the Operating Mode Switch for Analog Input Module 464-8MA21 Function Wire Break Setting for Operating Mode Switch With Wire Break Signal Without Wire Break Signal 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Characteristic Linearization of the Thermocouples Temperature Compensation Without Linearization 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Without Temperature Compensation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Linearization Type K Linearization Type J 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Temperature Compensation Type K 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Linearization Type L 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Temperature compensation for Type J und L 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7-13 Analog Value Processing If you have set "characteristic linearization" and "temperature compensation" with the operating mode switches on module 464-8MA21 for the thermocouple used, the reference temperature is 0 _C (32 _F). This means that with 0 _C (32 _F) at the measuring junction, the value "0" is displayed. If you equip several channels with thermocouples, use the same type of thermocouple. If you select mixed thermocouples, or if you use thermocouples other than type J, K, or L, then you must choose the following settings: S "No linearization" and S "No temperature compensation" Compensation is then not possible even with a compensating box because the compensating box is designed only for a certain type of thermocouple. It is possible to use a thermostat in the terminal box if you use the thermostat temperature in the application software to adjust the thermocouple input offset. When you set the switches to "no linearization" and "no temperature compensation," module 464-8MA21 functions just like module 464-8MA11. 7-14 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing Set the switches on analog module 464-8MF21 as illustrated in Table 7-3. Table 7-3 Settings for the Operating Mode Switch for Analog Input Module 464-8MF21 Function Power Supply Frequency Operation Wire Break Settings for Operating Mode Switch 50 Hz 60 Hz 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Channel (Ch 0) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 With Wire Break Signal 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 Channels (Ch 0 to Ch 1) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 No Wire Break Signal 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Characteristic Linearization for the PT 100 No Linearization 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Linearization for PT 100 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Positions 1 and 2 on the operating mode switch have no function. If you set the switch to "no linearization" and "no temperature compensation," module 464-8MF21 functions just like module 464-8MF11. Characteristic linearization is possible for the following temperature ranges: PT 100: - 100 _C ... + 850 _C (in steps of 0,5 _C). ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 7-15 Analog Value Processing 7.4 Analog Value Representation of Analog Input Modules Each analog process signal has to be converted into a digital format to be stored in the process image input table (PII). The analog signals are converted into a binary digit that is written in one of the following ways: In one byte (466-8MA11) or In two bytes (all other analog input modules) Each bit position has a fixed value in powers of two (see Tables 7-4 and 7-14). Analog values are represented in two's complement. Tables 7-5 through 7-11 show the analog value representations of different analog inputs in two-byte format. Table 7-4 Representation of an Analog Input Value as Bit Pattern High Byte Bit Number 7 Analog Value Represent. S 6 5 211 210 Low Byte 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 X E OV S Sign bit 0 = "+" 1 = "-" E Error bit 0 = no wire break 1 = wire break X Irrelevant bits OV Overflow bit 0 = Measured value 4095 units at the most 1 = Measured value greater than or equal to 4096 units 7-16 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing Table 7-5 Units >4095 Analog Input Modules 464-8MA11, -8MF11, -8MB11 (Bipolar Fixed-Point Number) Measured Value in mV High Byte Low Byte 100.0 1000.0 2000.0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow Overrange 4095 99.976 999.75 1999.5 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 2049 50.024 500.24 1000.48 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2048 50.0 500.0 1000.0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1024 25.0 250.0 500.0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.024 0.24 0.48 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.024 -0.24 -0.48 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 -1024 -25.0 -250.0 -500.0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -2048 -50.0 -500.0 -1000.0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -2049 -50.024 -500.24 -1000.48 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 -4095 -99.976 -999.75 -1999.5 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 -1000.0 -2000.0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 <-4095 Range -100.0 Nominal Range Overrange Overflow 464-8MA11/-8MA21 "No Linearization" (4 "50 mV) 464-8MF11 (2 "500 mV) 464-8MB11 (4 "1 V) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 7-17 Analog Value Processing Table 7-6 Units Analog Input Modules 464-8MC11, -8MD11 (Bipolar Fixed-Point Number) Measured Value in mV in V High Byte Low Byte Range in mA > 4095 20.000 40.0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow 4095 19.995 39.9902 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Overrange 2049 10.0048 20.0098 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2048 10.000 20.0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1024 5.000 10.0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.0048 0.0098 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.0048 -0.0098 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 -1024 - 5.000 -10.0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -2048 -10.000 -20.0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -2049 -10.0048 -20.0098 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 -4095 -19.995 - 39.9902 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 <-4095 -20.000 -40.0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 464-8MC11 464-8MD11 Table 7-7 Units > 4095 Nominal Range Overrange Overflow (4 "10 V) (4 "20 mA) Analog Input Module 464-8ME11, 4 4 to 20 mA (Absolute Value) Measured Value in mA High Byte Low Byte Range > 32.769 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow 4095 2561 31.992 20.008 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Overrange 2560 20.0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2048 16.0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 512 4.0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 511 3.992 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 384 3.0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.008 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 <-32.769 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 < -4095 7-18 Nominal Range Transducer T d Failure? ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing Table 7-8 Units Analog Input Module 464-8MF11, 2 PT 100 (Unipolar) Analog Input Module 464-8MF21, 2 PT 100 "No Linearization" (Unipolar) Resistance in w400.0 >4095 Low Byte Overflow Overrange 399.90 200.098 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2048 200.0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1024 100.0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.098 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Units >1766 Analog Input Module 464-8MF21, 2 Resistance in >400 1766 1702 Temperature in C Range 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 4095 2049 Table 7-9 * High Byte Nominal Range PT 100 "with Linearization" (Bipolar), to DIN IEC 751 High Byte Low Byte Range >883 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 Overflow 883 851 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 Overrange* 1700 390.26 850 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1400 345.13 700 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1000 280.90 500 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 600 212.02 300 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 300 157.31 150 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 200 138.50 100 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 100.39 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 100.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -40 92.16 -20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -80 84.27 -40 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -200 60.25 -100 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -202 -494 -101 -247 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Overrange* <-494 <-247 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Overflow Nominal Range In the overrange, the current slope of the characteristic curve is maintained when leaving the linearized nominal range. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 7-19 Analog Value Processing Table 7-10 Units Analog Input Module 464-8MA21, 4 "50 mV with Linearization and with Temperature Compensation (Bipolar); Thermoelement Type K (Nickel-Chromium/Nickel-Aluminium, according to IEC 584) Thermo Voltage in mV* Temperature in C >2359 High Byte Low Byte 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Range Overflow Overrange** 1370 1370 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1369 54.773 1369 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1000 41.269 1000 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 500 20.640 500 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 150 6.137 150 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 100 4.095 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.039 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal Range -1 -0.039 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 -100 -3.553 -100 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -101 -3.584 -101 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 Accuracy -150 -4.912 -150 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 v2 K -200 -5.891 -200 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -201 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overrange** 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Overflow X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1 0 Wire Break -201 -273 X X This value corresponds to the terminal temperature at wire break * For a reference temperature of 0 C (32 F) ** In the overrange, the current slope of the characteristic curve is maintained when leaving the linearized nominal range. 7-20 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing Table 7-11 Units Analog Input Module 464-8MA21, 4 50 mV with Linearization and with Temperature Compensation (Bipolar); Thermoelement Type J (Iron/Copper-Nickel (Konstantan) according to IEC 584) Thermo Voltage in mV* Temperature in C 1485 High Byte Low Byte 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 Range Overflow Overrange** 1201 1201 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1200 69.536 1200 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1000 57.942 1000 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 500 27.388 500 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 100 5.268 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.05 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Nominal Range -1 -0.05 -100 -4.632 -100 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -150 -6.499 -150 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 -199 -7.868 -199 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 -200 -7.890 -200 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -201 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overrange** 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 F 0 Wire break -201 -273 X X This value corresponds to the terminal temperature at wire break * ** For a reference temperature of 0 C (32 F) In the overrange, the current slope of the characteristic curve is maintained when leaving the linearized nominal range. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 7-21 Analog Value Processing Table 7-12 Units Analog Input Module 464-8MA21, 4 50 mV with Linearization and with Temperature Compensation (Bipolar); Thermoelement Type L (Iron/Copper-Nickel (Konstantan), according to 43710) Thermo Voltage in mV* Temperature in C 1361 901 High Byte Low Byte Range 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow 901 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 Overrange** 900 53.14 900 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 500 27.85 500 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 250 13.75 250 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 100 +5.37 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.05 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal Range -1 -0.05 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 -100 -4.75 -100 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -150 -6.60 -150 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 -190 -7.86 -190 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 -199 -8.12 -199 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 -200 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Overrange** 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1 0 Wire Break -200 -273 X X This value corresponds to the terminal temperature at wire break * ** 7-22 For a reference temperature of 0 C (32 F) In the overrange, the current slope of the characteristic curve is maintained when leaving the linearized nominal range. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing The 466-8MC11 analog input module stores each analog value in a single byte (see Table 7-13). The other analog input modules store the analog values in words (see Table 7-4). Table 7-13 Analog Input Module 466-8MC11, 4 0 to 10 V Units Voltage in mV Bit Representation 255 w9961 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 254 9922 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 .. .. . . 128 5000 0 0 0 0 0 .. .. . . 1 39 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 If you want to read in an analog value with function block FB250 (analog value reading and scaling), you have to pre-process the analog value before calling up FB250. Example Analog input module 466-8MC11 is inserted in slot 1, which means that the start address of the module is 72. The analog values that are read in are stored in the following four consecutive bytes: 1. Analog value (channel 0) in IB 72 2. Analog value (channel 1) in IB 73 3. Analog value (channel 2) in IB 74 4. Analog value (channel 3) in IB 75. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 7-23 Analog Value Processing Block FB72 reads in analog values and pre-processes them for function block FB250 (analog value reading and scaling). NAME 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 000A 000B 000C 000D 000E 000F 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 001A 001B 7-24 :READ 466 : :L IW 72 :T FW 72 :L IW 74 :T FW 74 : :L FY 72 :SLW 6 :T IW 72 : :L FY 73 :SLW 6 :T IW 74 : :L FY 74 :SLW 6 :T IW 76 : :L FY 75 :SLW 6 :T IW 78 : :BE Explanation READ IN ALL CHANNELS OF AI 466 READ ALL FOUR CHANNELS AND REARRANGE PROCESS EACH ANALOG VALUE AND REWRITE IT IN THE PII SO THAT FB250 CAN ACCESS IT WITHIN THAT SCAN. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing 7.5 Analog Output Modules Analog output modules convert the bit patterns that are output by the CPU into analog output voltages or currents. Connection of Loads to Analog Output Modules No adjustments are necessary if you want to connect loads to analog outputs. Check the following items before connecting loads: The 24 V DC load voltage must be connected to terminals 1 and 2. The maximum permissible potential difference between the outputs is 60 V AC. Unused outputs must be left open-circuited. Figure 7-9 shows how to connect loads to the voltage outputs of the following modules. 470-8MA11 (2 10 V) and 470-8MD11 (2 +1 to 5 V) Connect sensor lines (S+ and S -) directly to the load, so that the voltage is measured and regulated directly at the load. Using this method, you can compensate for voltage drops of up to 3 V per line. You can eliminate the sensor lines if the resistances of the QV and M lines are negligible compared to the load resistance. In such a case, connect terminal S+ to terminal QV, and terminal S- to MANA. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 7-25 Analog Value Processing S+ S- S+ S- 3 5 7 9 1 QV 2 4 MANA QV 6 8 MANA 10 L+ M DC 24 V S- MANA (5/9) (6/10) QV S+ (4/8) (3/7) RL Key: QV: S": MANA: RL: Analog Output "Voltage" Sensor Line Chassis Ground Terminal of the Analog Unit Load Resistor Figure 7-9 Load Connection via a Four-Wire Circuit (6ES5 470-8MA11, 6ES5 470-8MD11) Figure 7-10 shows how to connect loads to the current outputs of the following modules: 470-8MB11 (2 20 mA) and 470-8MC11 (2 +4 to 20 mA) 7-26 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Analog Value Processing 1 3 5 2 4 7 6 9 8 10 L+ M DC 24 V QI (4/8) MANA (6/10) RL Key: QI: Analog Output "Current" MANA: Chassis Ground Terminal of the Analog Unit RL: Load Resistor Figure 7-10Connection via a Two-Wire Circuit (6ES5 470-8MB11, 6ES5 470-8MC11) Analog Value Representation of Analog Output Modules Table 7-14 Table 7-14 shows how the analog output value has to be stored in the process image output table (PIQ). Tables 7-15 and 7-16 show the voltage and currents assigned to the bit patterns. Representation of an Analog Output Value as a Bit Pattern High Byte Bit Number Analog Value Represent. X: Low Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 VZ 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 X X X X Irrelevant bits ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 7-27 Analog Value Processing Table 7-15 Output Voltages and Currents for Analog Output Modules (Fixed-Point Number Bipolar) Units Output Values in V High Byte Low Byte in mA 1280 1025 12.5 10.0098 25.0 20.0195 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 1024 10.0 20.0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 512 5.0 10.0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 1 0.0098 0.0195 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x -1 -0.0098 -0.0195 -5.0 -10.0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x -1024 -10.0 -20.0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x -1025 -10.0098 -20.0195 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x -1280 -12.5 -25.0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 2 "10 V 6ES5 470-8MA11 2 "20 mA 6ES5 470-8MB11 Overrange Nominal Range 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x -512 Table 7-16 Range Overrange Output Voltages and Currents for Analog Output Modules (Unipolar) Units Output Values in V High Byte Low Byte in mA 1280 1025 6.0 5.004 24.0 20.016 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 1024 5.0 20.0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 512 3.0 12.0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 1 1.004 4.016 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 0 1.0 4.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x -1 0.996 3.984 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x -256 0.0 0.0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x -512 -1.0 -4.0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x -1024 -3.0 -12.0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x -1280 -4.0 -16.0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 2 1 to 5 V Range Overrange Nominal Range Overrange 6ES5 470-8MD11 2 4 to 20 mA 6ES5 470-8MC11 7-28 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum 8 8.1 General Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8.2 IM 318-B Interface Module (6ES5 318-8MB11) (6ES5 318-8MB12) (6ES5 318-8MC11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8.3 Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 8.4 Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 8.5 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 8.6 Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 8.7 Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 8.8 Digital Input / Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 8.9 Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41 8.10 Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Binary representation of the measured value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58 Tables 8-1 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum 8 In this chapter you will find the technical specifications of all input and output modules which can be used in the "ET 200 Distributed I/0 System". ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8-1 Module Spectrum 8.1 General Technical Specifications Climatic Environmental Conditions Temperature Operating S horizontal design S vertical design 0 ... + 60 C (32 to 140 _F) 0 ... + 40 C (32 to 140 _F)(Air-intake temperature, measured on the underside of the module) Temperature Nonoperating - 40 ... + 70 C (*40 to )150 _F) Temperature change S operating S nonoperating max. 10 C/h (50 _F/h) max. 20 C/h (68 _F/h) Relative humidity to DIN 40040 15 to 95 % (indoor), noncondensing Atmospheric pressure S operating S nonoperating 860 to 1060 hPa 660 to 1060 hPa Pollutants S SO2 S H2 S v 0.5 ppm (rel. humidity v 60 %, noncondensing) v 0.1 ppm (rel. humidity v60 %, noncondensing) Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) / Noise Immunity Electrostatic discharge test Discharge on all parts that to IEC 801-2 are accessible to the operator during normal operation S test voltage 2.5 kV (Rel.humidity 30 to 95%) Radiated electromagnetic field test to IEC 801-3 Field strength 3 V/m Fast transient burst to IEC 801-4, class III Power supply modules S supply voltage 24 V DC S supply voltage 115 /230 V AC S analog input/output modules S digitaligital input/output modules for V = 24 V for V > 24 V S Communications interface 1 kV 2 kV 1 kV 1 kV 2 kV 1 kV Mechanical Environmental Conditions Degree of Protection to IEC/VDE Vibration to IEC 68-2-6 tested with S 10 v f t 57 Hz S Degree of protection to IEC 529 S type S class S S 57 v f t 150 Hz constant amplitude 0.075 mm constant acceleration 1g S mode of vibration S frequency sweeps with a sweep rate of 1 octave/min. S period of vibration S 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the 3 perpendicular axes S S to IEC 1131-2 Shock to IEC 68-2-27 S type of shock S shock intensity S S S S semisinusoidal peak value 15 g, time 11 ms 2 shocks in each of the 3 perpendicular axes operating conditions direction of shock Free-fall to IEC 68-2-31 S tested with 8-2 IP 20 I to IEC 536 Insulation rating S between electrically independent circuits and with circuits connected to a central grounding point S between all circuits and a central grounding point Test voltage for a rated voltage Vinputs of the circuits (AC/DC) Vinput = 0 to 50 V Vinput = 50 to 125 V Vinput = 125 to 250 V to DIN VDE 0160 (05.1988) to DIN VDE 0160 (05.1988) SINe, 50 Hz 500 V 1250 V 1500 V height of fall 50 mm ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum 8.2 IM 318-B Interface Module (6ES5 318-8MB11) (6ES5 318-8MB12) (6ES5 318-8MC11) The ET 200U(DP Standard) slave station supports the following functions: the "FREEZE" und "SYNC" control commands station numbers: 1 to 125 Note The above functions are not supported by COM ET 200 (version 4.0)! ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8-3 Module Spectrum Technical Specifications Current consumption 24 V (20 to 30 V, polarized) Output voltage/current Power failure backup Isolation voltage for SINEC L2-DP interface v150 mA internal v800 mA with fully loaded I/O bus 9 V (I/O bus) / v700 mA at 60 _C (140 _F) v900 mA at 40 _C (104 _F) typ. 20 ms 500 V Test voltage with a rated isolation voltage Vinput of the circuits (AC/DC) 500 V Vinput = 0 to 50 V tested according to IEC 65A (CO) 22 Weight of the module 360 g (12.6 oz.) Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm (in.) 45 162 125 (1.8 6.4 4.9) Galvanic isolation between internal I/O bus and SIyes NEC L2-DP 8-4 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum 318-8MB11 dimension drawing 318-8MB12 dimension drawing DP-Siemens ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b DP-Norm 8-5 Module Spectrum 318-8MC11 dimension drawing FMS-Norm 8-6 DP-Norm ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum 8.3 Power Supply Modules (6ES5 931-8MD11) pr93a014 Power Supply Module PS 931 115 / 230 V AC; 24 V DC / 2 A Technical Specifications Input voltage rated value permissible range 115 / 230 V AC 92 to 132 V / 187 to 253 V Line frequency rated value permissible range 50 / 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Input current at 115/230 V rated value 0.9/0.6 A Efficiency approx. 85 % Power consumption approx. 58 W Output voltage rated value permissible range open-circuit voltage 24 V DC 22.8 to 25.2 V yes Output current rated value 2A ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Buffering of line voltage dips duration of voltage dips repetition rate 20 ms at 187 V/2 A 1s Short-circuit protection power limiting, electr. cutoff non-latching Fault LED no Protection class class 1 Galvanic isolation yes Conductor cross-sectional area 2 stranded (with core end sleeves) 2 solid Isolation rating 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 VDE 0160, VDE 0805 (transformer) 8-7 Module Spectrum Rated isolation voltage (+24 V to L1) isolation group tested with Dimensions BHD (mm) (in.) 8-8 250 V AC 2 B 230 V AC 45.4 135 120 Power loss of the module typ. 10 W Weight approx. 500 g (1.1 lbs.) When connecting electromagnetically susceptible loads, we recommend to use a line filter on the 24 V side (e.g. the Siemens filter No. B84114-D-B20). ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum Power Supply Module PS 935 (6ES5 935-8ME11) Periphery Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U (2 slots) DP Siemens 4DI/4DI or 008/008 DP Standard 8DI/8DI or 016/016 Number of inputs (only internal) 2 4 bits Input voltage rated value permissible range 24 V DC dyn. 18.5 to 30.2V DC stat. 20.4 to 28.8 V DC Polarity reversal protection yes Radio interference level A to VDE 0871 Input current at 24 V DC rated value inrush current limitation efficiency 1.25 A 15 times rated current approx. 75 % Output voltage rated value permissible range open-circuit voltage 9 V DC 8.55 to 9.45 V yes Output current rated value permissible range overload recognition 2,5 A 0.0 to 2.5 A 2.5 to 2.7 A ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Buffering during mains voltage dips duration of voltage dip repeat rate 20 ms at 2.4 V / 2.5 A 1s Short-circuit protection (output side) yes, electronic switch- off, non-retentive Diagnostics yes 24 V DC input voltage 9 V output voltage short circuit/overload Fault indication yes Class of protection Galvanic isolation class 1 no Conductor cross-section flexible (with core end sleeve) solid 2 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 2 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 Power consumption approx. 30 W Dimensions in mm (W H D) 45.4 Power loss of the module Weight 10 W 500 g (1.1 lbs) 135 120 8-9 Module Spectrum PS 2410 Power Supply Module (6EW1 380-4AB01) VOLTAGE SELECTOR 115/230 V AC L1 N 24 V DC POWER SUPPLY AC 115/230 V DC 24 V/10 A 6EW1 380-4AB01 1 2 3 4 5 L+ L+ M 6 7 8 M L1 L+ U N 230V PE 115V I 8-10 U M ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum Technical Specifications Input voltage Vinput 120 V / 230 V AC (selectable) Permissible range, continu- 93 V to 132 V / 187 V ously to 264 V AC Frequency Inrush current 47 Hz to 63 Hz < 24 A Efficiency under rated conditions Output voltage Voutput Rated output voltage Tolerance Residual ripple Switching surges (at 30 MHz) 82 % 24 V DC "5% 100 mVss 500 mVss Humidity class to DIN 40 040 F Safety class I Degree of protection (DIN 40 050, IEC 144) IP 20 Electrical isolation To VDE 0160, VDE 0805 3.75 kV AC eff., UL 508, File E 143289 Test voltage, primary/secondary -25 C to 85 C Class A Design Snap-on housing Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 190 Connection Cross-section Via screw-type terminals 1.5 mm2, stranded 2.5 mm2, solid Sensor line No 3 ms Powerfail signal No 10 ms (at 230 V) Weight approx. 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs.) 10 A Short-circuit protection Electronic Current limiting Threshold value approx. 1.1 IAN Overvoltage protection - 5% Bridging of line voltage drops 0 C to 60 C RI specification to VDE 0871 Output current Ioutput Rated output current Voltage response Dynamic at load change (10 to 90 %) Correction time Permissible ambient temperature Self-ventilation during operation During storage/shipping 126 135 Note The performance data specified are referred to vertical installation of the module. Horizontal installation is possible for ambient temperatures < 40 C and if the power output is reduced to 24 V / 6 A. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8-11 Module Spectrum 8.4 Bus Units Bus Unit (SIGUT) (6ES5 700-8MA11) Technical Specifications Conductor cross sectional area 2 stranded * 2 solid 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 Type of connection SIGUT screw-type terminals Number of plug-in modules 2 Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 1 mA Number of bus units per programmable controller max. 16 Dimensions W H D (mm) 91.5 Connection between two bus units ribbon cable Number of terminals 10 Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC 8-12 Weight 162 39 approx. 300 g (10.6 oz.) * with core end sleeves ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum Bus Unit (Crimp-Snap-In) Technical Specifications (6ES5 700-8MA21) Type of connection Crimp-snap-in Number of plug-in modules 2 Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with Number of bus units per programmable controller max. 16 Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 1 mA Connection between two bus units ribbon cable Number of terminals 10 Dimensions W H D (mm) (in.) 91.5 135 39 (3.6 5.3 1.5) Weight approx. 250 g (8.8 oz.) Conductor cross sectional area 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 stranded ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC 8-13 Module Spectrum 8.5 Interface Modules (6ES5 315-8MA11) pr93a017 Interface Module IM 315 Technical Specifications Current supply to the expansion unit Number of interface modules per PLC max. 2.5 A max. 1 Permissible potential difference between (IM 315) and "1 V central ground point (CPU) 8-14 Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1B 500 V AC Dimensions W H D (mm) (in.) 2 2 Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 1 mA Weight approx. 280 g (9.8 oz.) (45.4 135 39) (1.8 5.3 1.5) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 316-8MA12) pr93a018 Interface Module IM 316 Technical Specifications Current supply to the expansion unit Number of interface modules per PLC Cable connectors for the IM 316 cable connector (0.5 m) cable connector (2.5 m) cable connector (5.0 m) cable connector (10 m) Cable insulation in ducts ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b max. 2.5 A max. 4 6ES5 712-8AF00 6ES5 712-8BC50 6ES5 712-8BF00 6ES5 712-8CB00 permissible Permissible potential difference between (IM 316) and "1 V central ground point (CPU) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group 12 V AC 1 B Dimensions W H D (mm) (in.) 45.4 135 39 (1.8 5.3 1.5) Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 27 mA Weight approx. 120 g (4.2 oz.) 8-15 Module Spectrum 8.6 Digital Input Modules (6ES5 420-8MA11) pr93a019 Digital Input Module 4 24 V DC Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 4DI or 008 DP Siemens 8DI or 016 DP Standard Number of inputs Galvanic isolation in groups of 4 no 4 Input voltage L+ rated value for "0" signal for "1" signal 24 V DC 0 to 5 V 13 to 33 V Input current at signal "1" typ. 7 mA (at 24 V) Inherent delay from "0" to "1" from "1" to "0" typ. 2.5 ms* typ. 5 ms* 8-16 Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage** (+9 V to ) isolation group 12 V AC 1B Fault LED (red) no input voltage L+ Connection of 2-wire BERO proximity switches residual current possible v1.5 mA Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 16 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.8 W Weight approx. 205 g (7.2 oz.) * Delays are voltage-dependent ** Relevant only for ungrounded configuration in the ET 200U ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 421-8MA12) pr93a020 Digital Input Module 8 24 V DC Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 8DI or 009 DP Siemens 8DI or 016 DP Standard Number of inputs Galvanic isolation in groups of 8 no 8 Input voltage L+ rated value for "0" signal for "1" signal Rated isolation voltage** (+9 V to ) isolation group Fault LED (red) 12 V AC 1 B no input voltage L+/M Connection of 2-wire BERO proximity switches residual current possible v1.5 mA 24 V DC 0 to 5 V 13 to 33 V Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 34 mA Power loss of the module typ. 1.6 W Input current at "1" signal typ. 7 mA (at 24 V) Weight approx. 190 g (6.7 oz.) Inherent delay from "0" to "1" from "1" to "0" typ. 2.3 ms* typ. 4.5 ms* * Delays are voltage-dependent ** Relevant only for ungrounded configuration in the ET 200U Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8-17 Module Spectrum (6ES5 422-8MA11) (6ES5 490-8MA12) (6ES5 490-8MB11) st93a001 Digital Input Module Crimp Snap-in Connector, 40-Pin Screw Plug Connector, 40-Pin Technical Specifications Fault LED (red) at L+/M interrupt Address identifier for ET 200U 027 DP Siemens 017 or 080 DP Standard Connection of 2-wire BERO proximity switches residual current possible v1.5 mA Number of inputs Galvanic isolation 16 no Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 50 mA Input voltage L+ rated value for "0" signal for "1" signal 24 V DC 0 to 5 V 13 to 30 V Length of cable unshielded 100 m (330 ft.) Input protection against polarity reversal against overvoltage Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group 12 V AC 1 B no, fuse trips up to 33 V EMC noise immunity to VDE 801-4, severity 3 2 kV Input current at "1" signal typ. 4.5 mA Power loss of the module typ. 4.5 W Inherent delay from "0" to "1" from "1" to "0" typ. 4 ms typ. 3 ms Weight approx. 190 g 8-18 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 430-8MB11) pr93a021 Digital Input Module 4 24 to 60 V DC Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 4DI or 008 DP Siemens 8DI or 016 DP Standard Number of inputs Galvanic isolation in groups of 4 yes (optocoupler) 4 Input voltage L+ rated value for "0" signal for "1" signal 24 V DC -33 to 8 V 13 to 72 V Input current at "1" signal typ. 4.5 to 7.5 mA Inherent delay from "0" to "1" from "1" to "0" typ. 3 ms (1.4 to 5 ms) typ. 3 ms (1,4 to 5 ms) Fault LED (red) no input voltage L+ ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Connection of 2-wire BERO proximity switches residual current possible v1.5 mA Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to L+) isolation group tested with 60 V AC 2 B 1250 V AC Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) from L+ 5 mA max. 35 mA Power loss of the module typ. 2 W Weight approx. 200 g (7 oz.) 8-19 Module Spectrum (6ES5 430-8MC11) pr93a022 Digital Input Module 4 115 V AC Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 4DI or 008 DP Siemens 8DI or 016 DP Standard Number of inputs Galvanic isolation in groups of Input voltage L1 rated value for "0" signal for "1" signal frequency Input current at "1" Signal Inherent delay from "0" to "1" from "1" to "0" 8-20 4 yes (optocoupler) 4 115 V AC/DC 0 to 40 V 85 to 135 V 47 to 63 Hz typ. 14 mA at 115 V AC typ. 6 mA at 115 V DC typ. 10 ms typ. 20 ms Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to L1) isolation group tested with 125 V AC 2 B 1250 V AC Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Connection of 2-wire BERO proximity switches residual current possible v5 mA Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 16 mA Power loss of the module typ. 2.8 W Weight approx. 210 g (7.4 oz.) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 430-8MD11) pr93a023 Digital Input Module 4 230 V AC Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 4DI or 008 DP Siemens 8DI or 016 DP Standard Number of inputs Galvanic isolation in groups of Input voltage L1 rated value for "0" signal for "1" signal frequency Input current at signal "1" Inherent delay from "0" to "1" from "1" to "0" ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 4 yes (optocoupler) 4 230 V AC/DC 0 to 70 V 170 to 264 V 47 to 63 Hz typ. 16 mA at 230 V AC typ. 2.5 mA at 230 V DC typ. 10 ms typ. 20 ms Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to L1) isolation group tested with 250 V AC 2 B 1500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Connection of 2-wire BERO proximity switches residual current possible v5 mA Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 16 mA Power loss of the module typ. 2.5 W Weight approx. 210 g (7.4 oz.) 8-21 Module Spectrum (6ES5 431-8MA11) pr93a024 Digital Input Module 8 24 V DC Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 8DI or 009 DP Siemens 8DI or 016 DP Standard Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 2 B 500 V AC Number of inputs Galvanic isolation in groups of 8 yes (optocoupler) 8 30 V AC 2 B 500 V AC Input voltage L+ rated value for "0" signal for "1" signal Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to L+) isolation group tested with 24 V DC 0 to 5 V 13 to 33 V Connection of 2-wire BERO proximity switches residual current possible v1.5 mA Input current at "1" signal typ. 8.7 mA (at 24 V) Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 32 mA Inherent delay from "0" to "1" from "1" to "0" typ. 5.5 ms typ. 4 ms Power loss of the module typ. 2 W Weight approx. 190 g (6.7 oz.) Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) 8-22 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 431-8MC11) pr93a025 Digital Input Module 8 115 V AC Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 8DI or 009 DP Siemens 8DI or 016 DP Standard Number of inputs Galvanic isolation in groups of Input voltage L1 rated value for "0" signal for "1" signal frequency Input current at "1" signal Inherent delay from "0" to "1" from "1" to "0" ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8 yes (optocoupler) 8 115 V AC / DC 0 to 40 V 85 to 135 V 47 to 63 Hz typ. 12 mA at 115 V AC typ. 2.5 mA at 115 V DC typ. 10 ms typ. 20 ms Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to L1) isolation group tested with 124 V AC 2 B 1250 V AC Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Connection of 2-wire BERO proximity switches residual current possible v4 mA Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 32 mA Power loss of the module typ. 2.5 W Weight approx. 260 g (9 oz.) 8-23 Module Spectrum (6ES5 431-8MD11) pr93a026 Digital Input Module 8 230 V AC Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 8DI or 009 DP Siemens 8DI or 016 DP Standard Number of inputs Galvanic isolation in groups of Input voltage L1 rated value for "0" signal for "1" signal frequency Input current at "1" signal Inherent delay from "0" to "1" from "1" to "0" 8-24 8 yes (optocoupler) 8 230 V AC / DC 0 to 95 V 195 to 253 V 47 to 63 Hz typ. 16 mA at 230 V AC typ. 1.8 mA at 230 V DC typ. 10 ms typ. 20 ms Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to L1) isolation group tested with 250 V AC 2 B 1500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Connection of 2-wire BERO proximity switches residual current possible v5 mA Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 32 mA Power loss of the module typ. 3.6 W Weight approx. 260 g (9 oz.) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 433-8MA11) pr93a027 Digital Input Module 8 5 to 24 V DC Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 8DI or 009 DP Siemens 8DI or 016 DP Standard Number of inputs Galvanic isolation in groups of 8 yes (optocoupler) 8 Input voltage L+ rated value for "0" signal for "1" signal 5 to 24 V DC Vin approx. 25 % L+ Vin approx. 45 % L+ Permissible range 4.5 to 30 V Input resistance 4.7 k to L+ or M reversible on the back of the module* The LED displays the evaluated signal Inherent delay ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to L+) isolation group tested with 30 V AC 2 B 500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 2 B 500 V AC Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) from L+ typ. 6 mA typ. 60 mA Power loss of the module typ. 2.4 W Weight approx. 225 g (8 oz.) * reversible in groups of 8 approx. 1 ms or 10 ms reversible on the back of the module* 8-25 Module Spectrum 8.7 Digital Output Modules (6ES5 440-8MA11) pr93a028 Digital Output Module 4 24 V DC / 0.5 A Technical Specifications Short-circuit protection short-circuit protected output with autom switch on when the short-circuit does not exist any more Fault LED (red) short-circuit / no supply L+ Error diagnostics possible Voltage induced on circuit interruption (internal) limited to -15 V Switching frequency resistive load inductive load max. 100 Hz max. 2 Hz Total permissible current of outputs 2A Driving of digital input possible Address identifier for ET 200U 048 DP Siemens 8DQ or 032 DP Standard Number of outputs Galvanic isolation in groups of Load voltage L+ rated value permissible range (including ripple) value when t < 0.5 s 4 no 4 24 V DC 20 to 30 V 35 V Output current for "1" signal rated value permissible range lamp load 0.5 A 5 to 500 mA max. 5 W Residual current at "0" signal max. 0.5 mA Output voltage at "1" signal max. L+ (- 1.2 V) 8-26 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum Parallleling of outputs maximum current possible 0.8 A Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage* (+9 V to ) isolation group 12 V AC 1 B ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) from L+ (without load) typ. 15 mA typ. 25 mA Power loss of the module typ. 3 W Weight approx. 200 g (7 oz.) * Relevant only for ungrounded configuration in the ET 200U 8-27 Module Spectrum (6ES5 440-8MA21) pr93a029 Digital Output Module 4 24 V DC / 2 A Technical Specifications Error diagnostics possible Address identifier for ET 200U 048 DP Siemens 8DQ or 032 DP Standard Voltage induced on circuit interruption (internal) limited to -15 V Switching frequency resistive load inductive load max. 100 Hz max. 2 Hz Total permissible current of outputs 4A 24 V DC 20 to 30 V Driving of digital input possible 35 V Paralleling of outputs maximum current possible 3.2 A Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage* (+9 V to ) isolation group 12 V AC 1 B Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) from L+ (ohne Last) typ. 15 mA typ. 25 mA Power loss of the module typ. 4.8 W Weight approx. 200 g (7 oz.) Number of outputs Galvanic isolation in groups of Load voltage L+ rated value permissible range (including ripple) value when t <0.5 s 4 no 4 Output current at "1" signal rated value permissible range lamp load 2A 5 mA to 2 A max. 10 W Residual current at "0" signal max. 1 mA Output voltage at "1" signal max. L+ (- 1.5 V) Short-circuit protection Fault LED (red) 8-28 short-circuit protected output with automatic switch on when the short-circuit does not exist any more short-circuit / no supply L+ * Relevant only for ungrounded configuration in the ET 200U ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 441-8MA11) pr93a030 Digital Output Module 4 24 V DC / 0.5 A Technical Specifications Address ID for ET 200U S DP Siemens S DP Standard 8DQ or 017 8DQ or 032 Number of outputs Galvanic isolation S in groups of 8 no 8 Load voltage L+ S rated value S permissible range S (including ripple) S value when t < 0.5 s ! 24 V DC 20 to 30 V 35 V Warning: Capacitor C remains loaded after switch off of L+ Output current for "1" signal 0.5 A at 60 _C / S rated value 1 A at 30 _C S permissible range 5 mA to 1 A S lamp load max. 5 W Resid. current at "0" signal Output voltage S "1" signal max. 1 mA max. L+ (- 1.2 V) Total permissible current of outputs 4A ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Short-circuit protection Voltage induced on circuit interruption (internal) limited to none -15 V Switching frequency S resistive load S inductive load max. 100 Hz max. 2 Hz Driving of digital input possible Paralleling of 2 outputs S maximum current possible 0.8 A Length of cable S unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage* (+9 V to ) S isolation group 12 V AC 1 B Current consumption S from +9 V (CPU) S from L+ (without load) typ. 14 mA typ. 15 mA Power loss of the module typ. 3.5 W Weight approx. 220 g (7.7 oz.) * Relevant only for ungrounded configuration in the ET 200U 8-29 Module Spectrum (6ES5 450-8MB11) pr93a031 Digital Output Module 4 24 to 60 V DC / 0.5 A Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 048 DP Siemens 8DQ or 032 DP Standard Number of outputs Galvanic isolation in groups of 4 yes (optocoupler) 4 Load voltage L+ rated value permissible range 24 to 60 V DC 20 to 72 V Output current for "1" signal rated value permissible range lamp load 0.5 A 5 mA to 0.5 A max. 5 to 12 W Residual current at "0" signal max. 1 mA Short-circuit protection short-circuit protected output with automatic switch on when the short-circuit does not exist any more Fault LED (red) short circuit or no supply L+ Error diagnostics possible Voltage induced on circuit interruption (internal) limited to -30 V 8-30 Switching frequency resistive load inductive load max. 100 Hz max. 2 Hz Total permissible current of outputs 2A Driving of digital input possible Paralleling of 2 outputs maximum current possible 2 0.4 A Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to L+) isolation group tested with 60 V AC 2 B 500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) from L+ (without load) typ. 15 mA typ. 30 mA (at 60 V) Power loss of the module Weight typ. 5 W approx. 200 g (7 oz.) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 450-8MD11) pr93a032 Digital Output Module 4 115 to 230 V AC / 1 A Technical Specifications Fault LED (red) fuse blown* Address identifier for ET 200U 4DQ or 016 DP Siemens 8DQ or 032 DP Standard Switching frequency max. 10 Hz Permissible current of all outputs 4A Number of outputs Galvanic isolation in groups of 4 yes 4 Driving of digital input possible Paralleling of outputs not possible Load voltage L1 rated value frequency permissible range 115 to 230 V AC max. 47 to 63 Hz 85 to 264 V Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Output current for "1" signal rated value permissible range lamp load 1A 50 mA to 1 A max. 25 / 50 W Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to L1) isolation group tested with 250 V AC 2 B 1500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 14 mA Power loss of the module Weight typ. 3.5 W approx. 315 g (11 oz.) Contact current closing rating determined by the size of the fuse Residual current at "0" signal max. 3 / 5 mA Output voltage "1" signal max. L1 (- 7 V) Signal status display (green LEDs) only with load connected Short-circuit protection fuse (10 A extra fast) (Wickman No. 19231/ 6ES5 980-3BC41) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b * Indication only given if load voltage is applied and at least one load is connected 8-31 Module Spectrum (6ES5 451-8MA11) pr93a033 Digital Output Module 8 24 V DC / 1 A Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 8DQ or 017 DP Siemens 8DQ or 032 DP Standard Number of outputs Galvanic isolation in groups of Load voltage L+ rated value permissible range (including ripple) value when < 0.5 s 8 yes (optocoupler) 8 24 V DC max. 20 to 30 V 35 V Output current for "1" signal rated value permissible range lamp load 1A 5 mA to 1 A max. 10 W Residual current at "0" signal max. 0.5 mA Output voltage at "1" signal max. L+ (- 0.6 V) Short-circuit protection Voltage induced on circuit interruption (internal) limited to 8-32 short-circuit protected output with automatic switch on when the short-circuit does not exist any more Switching frequency resistive load inductive load max. 100 Hz max. 2 Hz Permiss. current of all outputs 6A Driving of digital input possible Paralleling of 2 outputs maximum current possible in pairs 1.8 A Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to L+) isolation group tested with 24 V AC 2 B 500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) from L+ (without load) typ. 35 mA typ. 50 mA Fault LED (red) short-circuit Power loss of the module Weight typ. 3 W approx. 230 g -15 V ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 451-8MD11) pr93a034 Digital Output Module 8 115 to 230 V AC / 0.5 A Technical Specifications Short-circuit protection fuse (10 A extra fast) (Wickmann No. 19231, 6ES5 980-3BC41) Switching frequency max. 10 Hz Permissible current of all outputs 4A Driving of digital input possible Paralleling of outputs not possible Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to L1) isolation group tested with 250 V AC 2 B 1500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 25 mA Power loss of the module Weight typ. 3.5 W approx. 270 g (9 oz.) Address identifier for ET 200U 8DQ or 017 DP Siemens 8DQ or 032 DP Standard Number of outputs Galvanic isolation in groups of 8 yes (optocoupler) 8 Load voltage L1 rated value frequency permissible range 115 to 230 V AC max. 47 to 63 Hz 85 to 264 V Output current for "1" signal rated value permissible range lamp load Contact current closing rating 0.5 A 50 mA to 0.5 A max. 25 / 50 W determined by the size of the fuse Residual current at "0" signal max. 3 / 5 mA Output voltage at "1" signal max. L1 (- 7 V) Signal status display (green LEDs) only with load connected ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8-33 Module Spectrum (6ES5 453-8MA11) pr93a035 Digital Output Module 8 5 to 24 V DC / 0.1 A Technical Specifications Paralleling of 2 outputs possible in pairs Address identifier for ET 200U 8DQ or 017 DP Siemens 8DQ or 032 DP Standard Max. current 0.8 x Irated Switching frequency resistive load inductive load max. 100 Hz max. 2 Hz Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) from L+ (without load) typ. 20 mA typ. 28 mA Power loss of the module typ. 1 W Weight approx. 220 g (8 oz.) Number of outputs Galvanic isolation in groups of Load voltage L+ rated value permissible range (including ripple) value when t < 0.5 s 8 yes 8 5 to 24 V DC 4.75 to 30 V 35 V Output voltage TTL-compatible* Output current for "1" signal rated value 100 mA Short-circuit protection none Voltage induced on circuit interruption (internal) limited to -19 V (at 24 V) 8-34 * transistor with open collector, switching to M potential ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 451-8MR12) (6ES5 490-8MA12) (6ES5 490-8MB21) (6ES5 490-8MB11) pr93a036 st93a001 Relay Output Module 8 30 V DC / 230 V AC Crimp Snap-In Connector, 40-Pin Screw Plug Connector, 20-Pin Screw Plug Connector, 40-Pin ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8-35 Module Spectrum Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 8DQ or 017 DP Siemens 8DQ or 032 DP Standard Outputs 8 relay outputs, contact switching varistor SIOV-S07-K275 Galvanic isolation in groups of yes 2 with signal status display Continuous current Ith 3A Relay type Dold OW 5699 Switching capacity of the contacts max. 3 A at 250 V AC resistive load 1.5 A at 30 V DC inductive load max. 0.5 AC at 250 V AC 0.5 A at 30 V DC Operating cycles of the contacts according to VDE 0660, part 200 AC-11 DC-11 1 106 0.5 106 Switching frequency max. 10 Hz Fault LED (red) no input voltage 8-36 Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to L1) isolation group tested with 250 V AC 2 B 1500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (between contacts) isolation group tested with 250 V AC 2 B 1500 V AC Supply voltage L+ (for the relay) rated value ripple Vpp permissible range (ripple included) value when t < 0.5 s 24 V DC max. 3.6 V 20 to 30 V 35 V Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) from L+ typ. 30 mA typ. 70 mA Power loss of the module typ. 1.6 W Weight approx. 300 g (11 oz.) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 452-8MR11) pr93a037 Relay Output Module 4 30 V DC / 230 V AC ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8-37 Module Spectrum Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 4DQ or 016 DP Siemens 8DQ or 032 DP Standard Outputs 4 relay outputs, contact switching varistor SIOV-S07-K275 Galvanic isolation in groups of yes (optocoupler) 1 Continuous current Ith 5A Relay type Siemens V 23127-D 0006-A 402 Switching capacity of the contacts max. 5 A resistive load at 250 V AC max. 2.5 A at 30 V DC inductive load 1.5 A at 250 V AC 0.5 A at 30 V DC Operating cycle of the contacts according to VDE 0660, part 200 1.5 AC-11 0.5 DC-11 Switching frequency 8-38 106 106 Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to L1) isolation group tested with 250 V AC 2 B 1500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (between contacts) isolation group tested with 250 V AC 2 B 1500 V AC Supply voltage L+ (for the relays) rated value ripple Vpp permissible range (ripple included) value when t < 0.5 s 24 V DC max. 3.6 V 20 to 30 V 35 V Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) from L+ typ. 14 mA typ. 100 mA Power loss of the module Weight typ. 2 W approx. 240 g (8 oz.) max. 10 Hz ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum 8.8 Digital Input / Output Modules (6ES5 482-8MA13) (6ES5 490-8MA02) (6ES5 490-8MB11) st93a001 Digital Input / Output Module with LED Display Crimp Snap-In Connector, 40-Pin Screw Plug Connector, 40-Pin pr93a038 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8-39 Module Spectrum Technical Specifications Output side Address identifier for ET 200U 027 DP Siemens 049 or 112 DP Standard Number of outputs Galvanic isolation in groups of Length of cable unshielded Output current Irated with "1" signal rated value permissible range 100 m (330 ft.) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group 12 V AC Power loss of the module typ. 4.5 W Weight approx. 190 g (7 oz.) 1 B Input side Number of inputs Galvanic isolation in groups of 16 no 16 Input voltage L+ rated value for "0" signal for "1" signal 24 V DC 0 to 5 V 13 to 30 V Input current with "1" signal typ. 4.5 mA Inherent delay from "0" to "1" from "1" to "0" typ. 4 ms typ. 3 ms Fault LED (red) indicates interruption of L + / M supply Connection of two-wire BERO proximity switches residual current possible Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) v1.5 mA typ. 50 mA Residual current with "0" signal 100 mA 5 to 500 mA max. 0.5 mA Short-circuit protection yes Short-circuit indication red LED Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) from L+ (without load) Lamp load Load voltage L+ rated value permissible range (ripple included) value when t < 0.5 s Output voltage with"1" signal typ. 10 mA typ 100 mA max. 5 W 24 V DC 20 to 30 V 35 V L+ (- 0.8 V) Switching frequency with resistive load inductive load 100 Hz 2 Hz Voltage induced on circuit interruption (internal) limited to -15 V Permissible total current of the outputs 6A Driving of a digital input possible Paralleling of outputs maximum current 8-40 16 no 8 possible in pairs (0.8 Irated) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum 8.9 Analog Input Modules Analog Input Modules 4 "50 mV pr93a040 (6ES5 464-8MA11) Compensa tion box ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Terminal box 8-41 Module Spectrum Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 4AI or 015 S DP Siemens 2AI or 013 1AI or 012 S DP Standard 4AI or 083 2AI or 081 1AI or 080 Input ranges (rated value) "50 mV Number of inputs 1, 2 or 4 (selectable) Galvanic isolation yes (inputs to ground- ing point; not between inputs) Input resistance w10 M Connection method of sensors two-wire connection Digital representation of input signal 12 bits + sign (2048 units = rated value) Measured value representation two's complement (left-justified) Measuring principle Conversion principle Integration time (adjustable for optimum noise suppression) Encoding time per input S for 2048 units S for 4095 units integrating voltage-time conversion (dual slope) 20 ms at 50 Hz 16.6 ms at 60 Hz max. 60 ms at 50 Hz max. 50 ms at 60 Hz max. 80 ms at 50 Hz max. 66.6 ms at 60 Hz Permissible voltage difference max."1 V S between inputs S between inputs and central max. 75 V DC / 60 V AC ground point Permissible input voltage (destruction limit) Fault indication for S range exceeded S S sensor wire break general indication of wire break 8-42 max. 24 V DC Noise suppression for f = nx (50 / 60 Hz "1 %); n = 1, 2, ... S Common-mode rejection (Vpp = 1 V) S series-mode rejection (peak value of noise < rated value of input range) min. 86 dB min. 40 dB Basic error limits "0.15 % (operational error limit at 25 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Operational error limits (0 to 60 _C, referred to input ranges of module) "0.4 % Single errors S linearity S tolerance S polarity reversal error "0.05 % "0.05 % "0.05 % Temperature error S final value S zero point "0.01 % /K "0.002 % /K Length of cable S shielded max. 50 m (164 ft.) Supply voltage L+ none Connection of compensating box possible Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) S isolation group S tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (inputs to +9 V) S isolation group S tested with 60 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption S from +9 V (CPU) typ. 70 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.7 W Weight approx. 230 g (8 oz.) yes (more than 4095 units) yes (selectable) red LED ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum Analog Input Module 4 "50 mV pr93a041 (6ES5 464-8MA21) Terminal box Compensa tion box Technical Specifications Measuring principle integrating Address identifier for ET 200U 4AI or 015 DP Siemens 2AI or 013 1AI or 012 DP Standard 4AI or 083 2AI or 081 1AI or 080 Conversion principle voltage-time conversion (dual slope) Integration time (adjustable for optimum noise suppression) 20 ms at 50 Hz 16.6 ms at 60 Hz Input range (rated value) "50 mV Number of inputs 1, 2 or 4 (selectable) Galvanic isolation yes (inputs to ground- ing point; not between inputs) Input resistance w10 M Connection method of sensors two-wire connection Digital representation of input signal 12 bits + sign (2048 units = rated value) Encoding time per input for 2048 units for 4095 units max. 60 ms at 50 Hz max. 50 ms at 60 Hz max. 80 ms at 50 Hz max. 66.6 ms at 60 Hz Permissible voltage difference "1V between inputs between inputs and central max. 75 V DC / 60 V AC ground point Permissible input voltage (destruction limit) max. 24 V DC Measured value representation two's complement (left-justified) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8-43 Module Spectrum Fault indication for S range exceeded S S sensor wire break S general indication of wire break Noise suppression for f = nx (50 / 60 Hz "1 %); n = 1, 2, ... S common-mode rejection (Vpp = 1) S series-mode rejection S (peak value of noise < rated value of input range) yes (more than 4095 units) yes (selectable) min. 86 dB Characteristic linearization for the following thermoelements S Nickel-Chromium / S Nickel-Aluminium IEC 584 (Type K) S Iron/Copper-Nickel IEC 584 (Type J) S Iron/Copper-Nickel DIN 43710 (Type L) min. 40 dB Length of cable S shielded max. 50 m (164 ft.) Supply voltage L+ none Connection of compensating box possible Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) S isolation group S tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (inputs to +9 V) S isolation group S tested with 60 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption S from +9 V (CPU) typ. 100 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.7 W Weight approx. 230 g (8 oz.) red LED Basic error limits "0.15 % (operational error limit at 25 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Operational error limits (0 to 60 _C, referred to input ranges of module) "0.4 % Single errors S linearity S tolerance S polarity reversal error "0.05 % "0.05 % "0.05 % Temperature error S final value S zero point "0.01 %/K "0.002 %/K 8-44 Lineariation exactness for rated "1 _C range (for types J, K, L) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 464-8MB11) pr93a042 Analog Input Module 4 "1 V ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8-45 Module Spectrum Technical Specifications Address ID for ET 200U S DP Siemens S DP Standard 4AI or 015 2AI or 013 1AI or 012 4AI or 083 2AI or 081 1AI or 080 Input ranges (rated value) "1 V Number of inputs 1, 2 or 4 (selectable) Galvanic isolation yes (inputs to ground- ing point; not between inputs) Input resistance w10 M Connection method of sensors two-wire connection Digital representation of input signal 12 bits + sign (2048 units = rated value) Measured value representation two's complement of input signal (left-justified) Noise suppression for f = nx (50 / 60 Hz "1 %); n = 1, 2, ... S common-mode rejection min 86 dB S (Vpp = 1 V) S series-mode rejection(peak value of noise < rated value of input range) min. 40 dB Basic error limits 0.1 % (operational error limit at 25 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Operational error limits (0 to 60 _C, referred to input ranges of module) "0.35 % Single errors S linearity S tolerance S polarity reversal error "0.05 % "0.05 % "0.05 % Temperature error S final value S zero point "0.01 %/K "0.002 %/K Measuring principle integrating Length of cable S shielded max. 200 m (660 ft.) Conversion principle voltage-time conversion (dual slope) Supply voltage L+ none Integration time (adjustable for optimum noise suppression) 20 ms at 50 Hz 16.6 ms at 60 Hz Temperature compensation, in- possible ternally Connection of compensating box not possible Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) S isolation group S tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Permissible voltage difference max. "1 V S between inputs S between inputs and central max. 75 V DC / 60 V AC grounding point Rated isolation voltage (inputs to +9 V) S isolation group S tested with 60 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Permissible input voltage (destruction limit) Current consumption S from +9 V (CPU) typ. 70 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.7 W Weight approx. 230 g (8 oz.) Encoding time per input S for 2048 units S for 4095 units Fault indication for S range exceeded S S sensor wire break general indication of wire break 8-46 max. 60 ms at 50 Hz max. 50 ms at 60 Hz max. 80 ms at 50 Hz max. 66.6 ms at 60 Hz max. 24 V DC yes (more than 4095 units) yes (selectable) red LED ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 464-8MC11) pr93a043 Analog Input Module 4 "10 V ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8-47 Module Spectrum Technical Specifications Address ID for ET 200U S DP Siemens S DP Standard 4AI or 015 2AI or 013 1AI or 012 4AI or 083 2AI or 081 1AI or 080 Input ranges (rated values) "10 V Number of inputs 1, 2 or 4 (selectable) Galvanic isolation yes (inputs to ground- ing point; not between inputs) Input resistance w50 k Connection method of sensors two-wire connection Digital representation of input signal 12 bits + sign (2048 units = rated value) Measured value representation two's complement (left-justified) Measuring principle Conversion principle Integration time (adjustable for optimum noise suppression) Encoding time per input S for 2048 units S for 4095 units integrating voltage-time conversion (dual slope) 20 ms at 50 Hz 16.6 ms at 60 Hz max. 60 ms at 50 Hz max. 50 ms at 60 Hz max. 80 ms at 50 Hz max. 66.6 ms at 60 Hz Permissible voltage difference max."1 V S between inputs S between inputs and central max. 75 V DC / 60 V AC ground point Permissible input voltage (destruction limit) Fault indication for S range exceeded S S sensor wire break general indication of wire break 8-48 max. 50 V DC Noise suppression for f = nx (50/60 Hz "1 %); n = 1, 2, ... S common-mode rejection (Vpp = 1 V) S series-mode rejection S (peak value of noise < rated value of input range) min. 86 dB min. 40 dB Basic error limits "0.2 % (operational error limit at 25 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Operational error limits (0 to 60 _C, referred to input ranges of module) "0.45 % Single errors S linearity S tolerance S polarity reversal error "0.05 % "0.05 % "0.05 % Temperature error S final value S zero point "0.01 %/K "0.002 %/K Length of cable S shielded max. 200 m (660 ft.) Supply voltage L+ none Connection of compensating box not possible Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) S isolation group S tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (inputs to +9 V) S isolation group S tested with 60 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption S from +9 V (CPU) typ. 70 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.7 W Weight approx. 230 g (8 oz.) yes (more than 4095 units) no no ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 464-8MD11) pr93a044 Analog Input Module 4 "20 mA ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8-49 Module Spectrum Technical Specifications Address ID for ET 200U S DP Siemens S DP Standard Input ranges (rated values) 4AI or 015 2AI or 013 1AI or 012 4AI or 083 2AI or 081 1AI or 080 "20 mA Number of inputs 1, 2 or 4 (selectable) Galvanic isolation yes (inputs to ground- ing point; not between inputs) Input resistance w25 Connection method of sensors two-wire connection Digital representation of input signal 12 bits + sign (2048 units = rated value) Measured value representation two's complement (left-justified) Measuring principle integrating Conversion principle voltage-time conversion (dual slope) Integration time (adjustable for optimum noise suppression) Encoding time per input S for 2048 units S for 4095 units 20 ms at 50 Hz 16.6 ms at 60 Hz max. 60 ms at 50 Hz max. 50 ms at 60 Hz max. 80 ms at 50 Hz max. 66.6 ms at 60 Hz Permissible voltage difference max. "1 V S between inputs S between inputs and central max. 75 V DC / 60 V AC ground point Permissible input current (destruction limit) Fault indication for S range exceeded S S sensor wire break general indication of wire break 8-50 Noise suppression for f = nx (50 / 60 Hz "1 %); n = 1, 2, ... S common-mode rejection (Vpp = 1 V) S series-mode rejection S (peak value of noise < rated value of input range) min. 86 dB min. 40 dB Basic error limits "0.2 % (operational error limit at 25 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Operational error limits (0 to 60 _C, referred to input ranges of module) "0.45 % Single errors S linearity S tolerance S polarity reversal error "0.05 % "0.05 % "0.05 % Temperature error S final value S zero point "0.01 %/K "0.002 %/K Length of cable S shielded max. 200 m (660 ft.) Supply voltage L+ none Connection of compensating box not possible Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) S isolation group S tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (inputs to +9 V) S isolation group S tested with 60 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption S from +9 V (CPU) typ. 70 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.7 W Weight approx. 230 g (8 oz.) max. 80 mA yes (more than 4095 units) no no ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum Analog Input Modue 4 "4 to 20 mA pr93a045 pr93a045 (6ES5 464-8ME11) U ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Four-wire transducer 8-51 Module Spectrum Technical Specifications Address ID for ET 200U S DP Siemens S DP Standard 4AI or 015 2AI or 013 1AI or 012 4AI or 083 2AI or 081 1AI or 080 Noise suppression for f = nx (50 / 60 Hz "1 %); n = 1, 2, ... S common-mode rejection (Vpp = 1 V) S series-mode rejection S (peak value of noise < rated value of input range) min. 86 dB min. 40 dB Input ranges (rated values) "4 to 20 mA Number of inputs 1, 2 or 4 (selectable) Basic error limits "0.15 % (operational error limit at 25 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Galvanic isolation yes (inputs to ground- ing point; not between inputs) Operational error limits (0 to 60 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Input resistance w31.25 Connection method of sensors two-wire connection for 2-/4-wire trans- ducers Single errors S linearity S tolerance S polarity reversal "0.05 % "0.05 % "0.05 % Digital representation of input signal 12 bits + sign (2048 units = rated value) Temperature error S final value S zero point "0.01 %/K "0.002 %/K Measured value representation two's complement (left-justified) Length of cable S shielded max. 200 m (660 ft.) Measuring principle integrating Conversion principle voltage time conversion (dual slope) Supply voltage L+ for 2-wire transducers S rated value S ripple Vpp S permissible range 24 V DC 3.6 V 20 to 30 V 20 ms at 50 Hz 16.6 ms at 60 Hz Connection of compensating box not possible Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) S isolation group S tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (inputs to +9 V) S isolation group S tested with 60 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption S from +9 V (CPU) S from L+ typ. 70 mA typ. 80 mA Power loss of the module S for 2-wire transducers S for 4-wire transducers typ. 1.0 W typ. 0.7 W Weight approx. 230 g (8 oz.) Integration time (adjustable for optimum noise suppression) Encoding time per input S for 2048 units S for 4095 units max. 60 ms at 50 Hz max. 50 ms at 60 Hz max. 80 ms at 50 Hz max. 66.6 ms at 60 Hz Permissible voltage difference max. " 1 V S between inputs S between inputs and central max. 75 V DC / ground point 60 V AC Permissible input current (destruction limit) Fault indication for S range exceeded S S sensor wire break general indication of wire break 8-52 max. 80 mA yes (more than 4095 units) no "0.4 % no ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum Analog Input Module 2 PT 100 / "500 mV pr93a046 (6ES5 464-8MF11) Technical Specifications Address ID for ET 200U DP Siemens DP Standard Input range (rated values) resistance sensor (PT 100) voltage sources 2AI or 013 1AI or 012 2AI or 081 1AI or 080 0 to 200 W (max. 400 W) "500 mV Number of inputs 1 or 2 (selectable) Galvanic isolation yes (inputs to ground- ing point; not between inputs) Input resistance w10 MW Connection method of sensors two or four-wire connection Digital representation of input signal 12 bits + sign (2048 units = rated value) Measuring principle integrating Conversion principle voltage-time conversion (dual slope) Integration time (adjustable for optimum noise suppression) 20 ms at 50 Hz 16.6 ms at 60 Hz Encoding time per input for 2048 units for 4095 units max. 60 ms at 50 Hz max. 50 ms at 60 Hz max. 80 ms at 50 Hz max. 66.6 ms at 60 Hz Permissible voltage difference max. " 1 V between inputs between inputs and central max. 75 V DC / 60 V AC ground point Permissible input voltage (destruction limit) max. 24 V DC Measured value representation two's complement (left-justified) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8-53 Module Spectrum Fault indication for S range exceeded S S sensor wire break general indication of wire break Noise suppression for f = nx (50 / 60 Hz "1 %); n = 1, 2, ... S common-mode rejection (Vpp = 1 V) S series-mode rejection S (peak value of noise < rated value of input range) yes (more than 4095 units) yes (selectable) red LED min. 86 dB min. 40 dB Basic error limits "0.15 % (operational error limit at 25 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Operational error limits (0 to 60 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Single errors S linearity S tolerance S polarity reversal error 8-54 "0.4 % "0.05 % "0.05 % "0.05 % Temperature error S final value S zero point "0.01 %/K "0.002 %/K Supply voltage L+ Auxiliary curent for PT 100 none 2.5 mA Resistance sensor S tolerance S temperature error S load dependency "0.05 % "0.006 %/K "0.02 %/100 Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) S isolation group S tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Rated isolation voltage (inputs to +9 V) S isolation group S tested with 60 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption S from + 9 V (CPU) typ. 70 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.9 W Weight approx. 230 g (8 oz.) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum Analog Input Module 2 PT 100 / "500 mV pr93a047 (6ES5 464-8MF21) Technical Specifications Address ID for ET 200U DP-Siemens DP-Norm Input ranges (rated values) resistance sensor (PT 100) voltage source 2AI or 013 1AI or 012 2AI or 081 1AI or 080 0 to 200 W (max. 400 W) "500 mV Number of inputs 1 or 2 (selectable) Galvanic isolation yes (inputs to ground- ing point: not between inputs) Input resistance w10 MW Connection method of sensors two or four wire connection Digital representation of input signal 12 bits + sign (2048 units = rated value) Measuring principle integrating Conversion principle voltage-time conversion (dual slope) Integration time (adjustable for optimum noise suppression) 20 ms at 50 Hz 16.6 ms at 60 Hz Encoding time per input for 2048 units for 4095 units max. 60 ms at 50 Hz max. 50 ms at 60 Hz max. 80 ms at 50 Hz max. 66.6 ms at 60 Hz Permissible voltage difference max. " 1 V between inputs between inputs and central max. 75 V DC/ 60 V AC ground point Permissible input voltage (destruction limit) max. 24 V DC Measured value representation two's complement (left-justified) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 8-55 Module Spectrum Fault indication for S range exceeded yes (more than 4095 units) S S yes (selectable) sensor wire break general indication of wire break Linearization exactness in rated range Characteristic linearization of PT 100-characteristic curve "0.5 _C DIN IEC 751 Length of cable S shielded max. 200 m Supply voltage L+ none Auxiliary current for PT 100 2.5 mA Auxiliary current single errors S tolerance S temperature error S influence of load variation "0.05 % "0.006 %/K "0.02 %/100 Basic error limits "0.15 % (operational error limit at 25 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) S isolation group S tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Operational error limits (0 to 60 _C, referred to input ranges of module) "0.4 % Rated isolation voltage (inputs to +9 V) S isolation group S tested with 60 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Single errors S linearity S tolerance S polarity reversal error "0.05 % "0.05 % "0.05 % Current consumption S from +9 V (CPU) typ. 100 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.9 W Temperature error S final value S zero point Weight approx. 230 g (8 oz.) "0.01 % / K "0.002 % / K Noise suppression for f = nx (50 / 60 Hz "1 %); n = 1, 2, ... S Common-mode rejection (VPP = 1 V) S series-mode rejection S (peak vlaue of noise < rated value of input range) 8-56 red LED min. 86 dB min. 40 dB ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 466-8MC11) pr93a048 Analog Input Module 4 +0 to 10 V Technical Specifications Current consumption S from + 9 V (CPU) Address ID for ET 200U S DP Siemens S DP Standard 2AI or 013 2AI or 081 Input ranges (rated values) Number of inputs +0 to 10 V 4 Galvanic isolation no Input resistance 100 kW Connection method of sensors 2-wire connection Digital representation of the in- 8 bits (256 units = put signal rated value) Representation of the measured value binary ( Table 8-1) Measuring principle successive approximation Conversion time 100 ms Encoding time per input 5 ms Permissible voltage difference S between inputs max. " 1 V Permissible input voltage (destruction limit) max. 60 V DC ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Fault indication for S range exceeded S sensor wire break S general indic. of wire break Noise suppression S common mode interference (VPP = 1 V) typ. 100 mA no no no min. 86 dB Basic error limits "0.4 % (operational error limit at 25 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Operational error limits (0 to 60 _C, referred to input ranges of module) "0.6 % Length of cable S shielded max. 200 m Supply voltage L+ none Power loss of the module typ. 0.9 W Weight approx. 200 g (7 oz.) 8-57 Module Spectrum Table 8-1 Units 8-58 Binary representation of the measured value Input voltage in V 7 27 6 26 5 25 Bit 4 3 24 23 2 22 1 21 0 20 255 254 9.961 9.922 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 192 191 7.500 7.461 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 128 127 5.000 4.961 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 64 63 2.500 2.461 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0.039 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum 8.10 Analog Output Modules Analog Output Module 2 "10 V pr93a049 (6ES5 470-8MA12) Technical Specifications Address ID for ET 200U S DP Siemens S DP Standard Measured value representation two's complement (left-justified) 2AQ or 021 2AQ or 097 Conversion time (0 to 100 %) max. 0.15 ms Output range (rated values) "10 V Permissible overload 25 % Short-circuit protection yes Number of outputs 2 Short-circuit current "30 mA Galvanic isolation yes (outputs to grounding point and between outputs) Input resistance w3.3 k Capacitive load incl. cable capacitance <100 nF Connection method two- or four-wire connection Digital representation of output 11 bits + sign (1024 signal units = rated value) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Permissible voltage difference to ground and between outputs max. 75 V DC/ 60 V AC Basic error limits "0.3 % (operational error limit at 25 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Operational error limits (0 to 60 _C, referred to input ranges of modue) "0.6 % 8-59 Module Spectrum Length of cable shielded Supply voltage L+ (peripheral) rated value ripple VPP permissible range (ripple included) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 8-60 max. 200 m 24 V DC 3.6 V Rated isolation voltage (output to L+, between outputs, output to +9 V) isolation group tested with 60 V AC 1 B 500 V AC 20 to 30 V Current consumption from + 9 V (CPU) from L+ typ. 170 mA typ. 100 mA 12 V AC Power loss of the module typ. 3.1 W Weight approx. 290 g (10 oz.) 1 B 500 V AC ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum Analog Output Module 2 "20 mA pr93a050 (6ES5 470-8MB12) Technical Specifications Address ID for ET 200U S DP Siemens S DP Standard 2AQ or 021 2AQ or 097 Output range (rated value) "20 mA Number of outputs 2 Galvanic isolation yes (outputs to grounding point and between outputs) Input resistance max. 300 Connection method two-wire connection Digital representation of output 11 bits + sign (1024 signal units = rated value) Measured value representation two's complement (left-justified) Conversion time (0 to 100 %) max. 0.15 ms Permissible overload 25 % Open-circuit voltage v" Permissible voltage difference to central ground point and between outputs ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 15 V Basic error limits "0.3 % (operational error limit at 25 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Operating error limits (0 to 60_C, referred to input ranges of module)) "0.6 % Length of cable Sshielded max. 200 m Supply voltage L+ S rated value S ripple VPP S permissible range S (ripple included) 24 V DC 3.6 V 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) S isolation group S tested with 12 V AC Rated isolation voltage (output to L+, between outputs, output to +9 V) S isolation group S tested with 60 V AC 1 B 500 V AC 1 B 500 V AC max. 75 V DC/ 60 V AC 8-61 Module Spectrum Current consumption from + 9 V (CPU) from L+ 8-62 typ. 170 mA typ. 130 mA Power loss of the module typ. 3.8 W Weight approx. 290 g (10 oz.) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 470-8MC12) pr93a051 Analog Output Module 2 4 to 20 V Technical Specifications Open-circuit voltage Address ID for ET 200U S DP Siemens S DP Standard 2AQ or 021 2AQ or 097 Output range (rated value) 4 to 20 mA Number of outputs 2 Galvanic isolation yes (outputs to grounding point and between outputs) Input resistance max. 300 Capacitive load incl. cable capacitance <100 nF Connection method two-wire connection Digital representation of output 11 bits + sign (1024 signal units = rated value) Measured value representation two's complement (left-justified) Conversion time (0 to 100 %) max. 0.15 ms Permissible overload 25 % ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Permissible voltage difference to central ground point and between outputs v" 15 V max. 75 V DC/ 60 V AC Basic error limits "0.2 % (operational error limit at 25 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Operational error limits (0 to 60 _C, referred to input ranges of module) S linearity S temperature error Length of cable S shielded Supply voltage L+ S rated value S ripple VPP S permissible range S (ripple included) "0.6 % "0.2 % "0.01 %/K max. 200 m 24 V DC 3.6 V 20 to 30 V 8-63 Module Spectrum Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC Rated isolation voltage (output to L+, between outputs, output to +9 V) isolation group tested with 60 V AC 8-64 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption from + 9 V (CPU) from L+ typ. 170 mA typ. 130 mA Power loss of the module typ. 3.8 W Weight approx. 290 g (10 oz.) 1 B 500 V AC ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Module Spectrum (6ES5 470-8MD12) pr93a052 Analog Output Module 2 1 to 5 V Technical Specifications Short-circuit current Address ID for ET 200U S DP Siemens S DP Standard 2AQ or 021 2AQ or 097 Output range (rated value) 1 to 5 V Number of outputs 2 Galvanic isolation yes (outputs to grounding point and between outputs) Input resistance min. 3.3 k Connection method two- or four-wire connection Digital representation of output 11 bits + sign (1024 signal units = rated value) Measured value representation two's complement (left-justified) Conversion time (0 to 100 %) max. 0.15 ms Permissible overload 25 % Short-circuit protection yes ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Permissible voltage difference to central ground point and between outputs "30 mA max. 75 V DC/ 60 V AC Basic error limits "0.2 % (operational error limit at 25 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Operational error limits (0 to 60 _C, referred to input ranges of module) Length of cable Sshielded Supply voltage L+ S rated value S ripple VPP S permissible range S (ripple included) Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) S isolation group S tested with "0.6 % max. 200 m 24 V DC 3.6 V 20 to 30 V 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC 8-65 Module Spectrum Rated isolation voltage (output to L+, between outputs, output to +9 V) isolation group tested with 8-66 60 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption from + 9 V (CPU) from L+ typ. 170 mA typ. 100 mA Power loss of the module typ. 3.1 W Weight approx. 290 g (10 oz.) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules 9 9.1 Comparator Module 2 x 0.5 to 20 mA / 0.5 to 10 V (6ES5 461-8MA11) Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 9-3 9-3 9-3 9-3 9-4 9.2 Timer Module 2 x 0.3 to 300 s (6ES5 380-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Application as On-Delay Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 9-6 9-6 9-6 9-6 9-7 9.3 Simulator Module (6ES5 788-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 9-9 9-9 9-9 9-9 9-9 9.4 Diagnostic Module (6ES5 330-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 9-11 9-12 9-12 9-12 9.5 Counter Module 2 x 0 to 500 Hz (6ES5 385-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 9-15 9-15 9-15 9-15 9-16 9-17 9.6 Counter Module 25/500 kHz (6ES5 385-8MB11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Description of the COUNTER Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Description of the Position Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering New Setpoints for the Counter and Position Decoder . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 9-20 9-21 9-28 9-31 9-31 9-40 9-42 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules 9.7 Closed-Loop Control Module IP 262 (6ES5 262-8MA12) (6ES5 262-8MB12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 9-46 9-46 9-46 9-47 9-47 9.8 IP 263 Positioning Module (6ES5 263-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignments of Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48 9-50 9-50 9.9 IP 264 Electronic Cam Controller Module (6ES5 264-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . Dead Time Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Process Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 9-54 9-54 9.10 IP 265 High Speed Sub Control (6ES5 265-8MA01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 9-57 9-57 9-57 9.11 IP 266 Positioning Module (6ES5 266-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 9-60 9-60 9-61 9-62 9-62 9.12 IP 267 Stepper Motor Control Module (6ES5 267-8MA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Principle of the IP 267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63 9-64 9-65 9-65 9-65 9.13 CP 521 BASIC Communications Module (6ES5 521-8MB11) . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66 9-67 9-67 9-67 9.14 CP 521 SI Communications Processor (6ES5 521-8MA21) . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unidirectional Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bidirectional Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrated Real-Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68 9-69 9-69 9-69 9-70 9-70 9-70 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Figures 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-10 9-11 9-12 9-13 9-14 9-15 9-16 9-17 9-18 9-19 9-20 9-21 9-22 9-23 9-24 9-25 9-26 9-27 9-28 Scanning the Comparator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Scanning the Timer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Scanning the Simulator Module as a Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Setting the Input Voltage Range on the Counter Module (500 Hz) . . . . . . 9-15 Scanning the Counter Module (500 Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Timing Diagram: Setting and Resetting an Output of the Counter Module (500 Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Switch Positions on the Operating Mode Switch of the Counter Module . 9-20 Pin Assignment of the 15-Pin Sub-D Female Connector of the Counter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Connecting a Counting Pulse Sensor for 5 V Differential Signal to RS 422 9-22 Connecting a Counting Pulse Sensor for 24 V DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Connecting a 5 V Position Sensor to RS 422A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Connecting a 24 V DC Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Signal Sequence for Up-Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Assignment Diagram for the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Diagnostics Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Switching the Outputs Dependent on the Status of the Counter and the Enable Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Position of the Reference Point (SYNC Bit 0=1) within the Reference Signal Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Position of the Reference Point (SYNC Bit=1) after the Reference Signal 9-34 Position of the Reference Point (SYNC Bit=1) during a Reversal of Direction before Reaching the Reference Pulse in a Positive Direction . . 9-34 Schematic of a Reference Point Approach Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Enabling the Outputs - Reaching the Setpoints - Resetting the Outputs . 9-36 Approaching a Setpoint in Up-Count Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Approaching a Setpoint in Down-Count Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Approaching a Setpoint in Up-Count Direction and Subsequent Reversal of Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Requirement for New Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41 Positioning with the IP 263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 Course of a Following Error during a Positioning Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61 Velocity Profile of IP 267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64 Tables 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 Sending Data from the Counter Modules to the CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Data from the CPU to the Counter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Traverse Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reaction of the Counter Module during Transfer of the Setpoints . . . . . . . Meaning of the Bytes of a Slot Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designation of the Operating Modes of the IP 266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-26 9-26 9-31 9-32 9-40 9-42 9-62 Function Modules 9 The following are dealt with in this chapter: Function, Installation, Wiring and Addressing of function modules. In addition, you will find the technical specifications of the modules. There are general technical specifications in Section 8.1. You will also find application examples. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-1 Function Modules Comparator Module 20.5 to 20 mA / 0.5 to 10 V (6ES5 461-8MA11) pr93a001 9.1 Technical Specifications Input voltage Address identifier for ET 200U 4DI or 008 DP Siemens 8DI or 016 DP Standard max. DC 100 V (v 0.5 s) "1" measuring range 0.5 mA to 20 mA Input resistance 500 Channels Galvanic isolation 2 yes Overload capability 100 % Current or voltage measurement switch-selectable Switch position "0" no measuring Display green LED for actual value w setpoint Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to measuring circuit and 30 V AC between measuring circuits) 2 B isolation group 500 V AC tested with Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Length of cable shielded unshielded 200 m 100 m Setpoint adjustment with potentiometer Setting error v "10 % Reproducibility v "2 % Hysteresis v 10 % "V" measuring range DC 0.5 V to 10 V Input resistance 47 k Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 35 mA Inherent delay typ. 5 ms Power loss of the module typ. 0.3 W Weight 200 g 9-2 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Function The module has two isolated comparators for voltage or current measurement (selector switch with positions U/0/I). When the preset value is reached, the LED of the respective channel lights up and sends a 1 signal to the programmable controller. Remove the module or disconnect the measuring circuit before you select the function. In switch position "0", the comparator is switched off; if the comparator is scanned, a "0" signal results. You set the response threshold of the comparator using a selector on the front panel. The selector has scale divisions to simplify adjustment. Installation You install the comparator module on a bus unit like any other input or output module. Wiring See schematic diagram. Unused inputs can be left open. Addressing The comparator module is addressed like a two-channel digital input module (channel 0 or 1, see Figure 9-1). A O I I x.0 x.1 Channel "0" ; Scan (Examples) Channel "1" ; Channel Number Slot Address Figure 9-1 Scanning the Comparator Module ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-3 Function Modules Typical Application A comparator module is mounted at slot 4 (module address 4.0). The current source is connected to channel 1. If Schmitt trigger 1 detects that the current has exceeded the preset value, a switch (output 5.1) is operated. Terminal Connections 1 3 2 5 4 7 6 9 8 10 ) STL A = 9-4 I Q * Explanation 4.1 5.1 As soon as the limit is reached or exceeded, input 4.1 becomes 1; this sets output 5.1 to 1. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Timer Module 20.3 to 300 s (6ES5 380-8MA11) pr93a002 9.2 Technical Specifications Address ID for ET 200U S DP Siemens S DP Standard 4DX or 024 8DX or 048 Number of timers 2 Time setting Range extension factor 0.3 to 3 s 10, 100 Function display green LED Setting error v "10 % ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Reproducibility v "3 % Temperature influence )1 %/10 _C (80 _F) from set time Rated isolation voltage (+9 V to ) S isolation group S tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Current consumption S from +9 V (CPU) typ. 10 mA Weight approx. 200 g 9-5 Function Modules Function The module contains two pulse timers. As long as the timer is running, the following conditions exist: The LED of the respective channel is lit and A 1 is reported to the CPU. You preselect the pulse duration using the time range selector0.3 s/3 s/ 30 s in a definite range and then set the exact value by means of a potentiometer on the front panel. This selector has scale divisions to simplify setting. (time value = time range scale value) Example Time range: 3s Scale value: 7s Set time value: 7 3 s = 21 s Installation You install the timer on a bus unit like any other input or output module. Wiring No wiring is required. Addressing A timer module is addressed like a two-channel digital module (channel 0 or 1, see Figure 9-2). The timer module is addressed like a digital output module for starting, resetting, or interrupting the pulse. The signal state is scanned like a digital input module. Channel "0" ; Starting the Pulse Channel "1" S S Q Q x.2 x.3 R R Q Q x.2 x.3 ; Interrupt/ ; Reset A A I I x.0 x.1 ; Scan ; "1" = Timer Running Channel Number Slot Address Figure 9-2 Scanning the Timer Module 9-6 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Typical Application as On-Delay Timer A timer module is mounted at slot 5 (module address 5.0). A time of 270 s is set on channel 0 of this module by means of the time-range selector and the potentiometer. The timer is started when input 0.0 is 1. A lamp lights up (output 4.0) when the timer has run down. Terminal Connections No process peripherals are connected to this module. Unlike the internal timers, times can be set or modified using a timer module without making any program modifications. STL A AN A S A = AN R A ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b I I F Q I F I Q I Explanation 0.0 5.0 65.0 4.0 5.0 65.0 0.0 4.0 5.2 The timer must not be scanned in the program scan cycle in which it was enabled since the CPU would not receive the acknowledgement that the timer had started until one program scan later. If flag 65.0 is 1 and the timer has run down (AN I 5.0), output 4.0 is set to 1. If the "Timer started" message has been sent to the CPU, the flag is set. If I 0.0 is 0, the lamp is switched off. The timer is started if I 0.0 is 1. 9-7 Function Modules Simulator Module (6ES5 788-8MA11) pr93a003 9.3 Technical Specifications "0" / "1" input signals switch-selectable Address ID for ET 200U input simulator DP Siemens DP Standard output simulator DP Siemens DP Standard Rated isolation voltage (+ 9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC 8DI or 009 8DI or 016 8DQ or 017 8DQ or 032 Function selection simulation of 8 input signals display of 8 output signals selected by switch on rear of module Function display yellow LED 9-8 Signal status display for input/ green LEDs output Current consumption from + 9 V (CPU) 30 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.3 W Weight 190 g ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Function Simulator modules are eight-channel modules that can simulate digital input signals and display output signals. The type of module to be simulated (input or output) is selected by means of a switch on the rear of the module and displayed by two LEDs on the front panel. The module cannot simulate interrupt inputs. Installation You install the simulator module on a bus unit like any other input or output module. The module does not have a coding key and can therefore replace any digital module. You do not have to readjust the coding element on the bus unit. Wiring There is no electrical connection between the module and the terminal block. You can therefore insert the module into slots that have already been wired and connected to the power supply. Addressing A simulator module is addressed like a eight-channel digital module (channels 0 to 7, see Figure 9-3). A O I Q x.0 x.1 Channel "0" ; Scan Channel "1"; (Examples) Channel Number Slot Address Figure 9-3 Scanning the Simulator Module as a Digital Input Typical Application The CPU is in the RUN mode, the green LED is lit, but the PLC is malfunctioning. You have also discovered that the fault must be in a particular I/O module. If the module has no fault indicator, check to see if the following conditions exist: The power supply is connected. The bus connections and interface modules are plugged in correctly. Then try to access the module via the process image (using the STATUS or STATUS VAR function). If this procedure is not successful, replace the module with the simulator module. Perform a second check with the STATUS or STATUS VAR function. If the simulator performs, the input/output module you replaced is defective. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-9 Function Modules 9.4 Diagnostic Module (6ES5 330-8MA11) pr93a004 Data/Bus signals Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 000 DP Siemens 000 DP Standard Rated isolation voltage (+ 9 V to ) isolation group tested with 12 V AC 1 B 500 V AC Voltage monitor undervoltage voltage ok red LED green LED 9-10 Signal status display for control signals yellow LEDs Current consumption from + 9 V (CPU) 25 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.3 W Weight approx. 175 g ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Function The diagnostic module is used for monitoring the S5-100U I/O bus. The following LEDs on the front panel display the signal states of the control lines and the supply voltage for the I/O bus: IDENT The programmable controller executes an IDENT run after each change from STOP to RUN mode and after any changes in the configuration in order to determine the current configuration of the programmable controller. The IDENT LED lights up briefly. If the LED lights up in the RUN mode, this indicates that a faulty I/O module has been plugged in. CLEAR The CLEAR signal line is 1 only in the STOP mode in normal operation. In this case, the outputs of the output modules are disabled. If CLEAR is 1 in the RUN mode, the control line itself may be defective (no contact). LATCH/CLOCK These two control lines control data interchange between the ET 200U interface module, the I/O bus, and the I/O modules. During normal operation, both LEDs must flash. The flashing frequency provides information on the speed of the serial bus. If both LEDs show a steady light in the RUN mode, the bus unit that the diagnostic module is plugged into is defective. DATA/DATA-N The alternate lighting up of the DATA and DATA-N LEDs indicates data flow on the I/O bus. If these two LEDs show a steady light, the bus unit that the diagnostic module is plugged into is defective. U1 v 8 V If the supply voltage of a slot remains at a value U1v8 V, proper functioning of the I/O modules is no longer guaranteed. An excessively high bus load (> 1 A) causes the low supply voltage. If this LED flickers, noise pulses are superimposed on the supply voltage U1 (e.g., by the coupling of noise pulses). The LED lights up briefly if the programmable controller is switched on or off. U1 > 8 V The supply voltage of the I/O bus is O.K. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-11 Function Modules Installation You install the diagnostic module on a bus unit like any other input or output module. The module has no mechanical coding so you do not have to reset the coding element on the bus unit. Note You can plug in and remove the module regardless of the operating status of the programmable controller. Wiring No wiring is required. You do not have to remove existing wiring. Addressing There is no addressing since the module does not supply any I/O data. 9-12 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Counter Module 20 to 500 Hz (6ES5 385-8MA11) pr93a005 9.5 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-13 Function Modules Technical Specifications Residual current at "0" signal max. 1 mA Address identifier for ET 200U 4DX or 024 DP Siemens 8DX or 048 DP Standard Output voltage for "0" signal for "1" signal max. 3 V max. L+ (- 2.5 V) Inputs Short-circuit protection electronic short-circuit Number of Inputs 2 Fault indication (red LED) Galvanic isolation yes Input voltage rated value for "0" signal for "1" signal Voltage induced on circuit interruption (internal) limited to L+ (- 47 V) 5 V / 24 V DC 0 to 0.8 / -33 to 5 V 3 to 5 V / 13 to 33 V Switching frequency resistive load inductive load max. 100 Hz max. 2 Hz Input current for "1" signal typ. 1.5 / 8.5 mA Inherent delay typ. 180 ms Total permissible current of outputs 1A Input frequency max. 500 Hz Driving a digital input possible Connection of 2-wire BERO (24 V DC) quiescent current possible Paralleling of outputs max. current possible 0.5 A Length of cable unshielded max. 100 m Length of cable unshielded v 1.5 mA Number of Outputs 2 Galvanic Isolation yes Rated isolation voltage (inputs and outputs to each other and to ; input to + 9 V) 60 V AC 1 B isolation group 1250 V AC tested with 24 V DC Current consumption from + 9 V (CPU) typ. 20 mA Power loss of the module typ. 2.5 W Weight approx. 200 g max. 30 m / 50 m Outputs Supply voltage L+ rated value permissible range (including ripple) Output current for "1" signal rated value permissible range lamp load 9-14 20 to 30 V 0.5 A 5 to 500 mA max. 5 W ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Function The module consists of two independent down counters with isolated inputs and outputs. It counts input signals up to a frequency of 500 Hz from a set value down to the value 0. When zero is reached, the 24 V DC output of the module is energized. At the same time, a green LED on the module lights up and the input signal (I x.0 or I x.1) is set to 1. You can enter the setpoint (0 to 999) via the three-digit thumbwheel switches on the front panel of the module. You can set the input voltage ranges for 5 V DC or 24 V DC on rocker switches on the front panel (see Figure 9-4). Channel 0 Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 1 5 V DC (TTL) 24 V DC Figure 9-4 Setting the Input Voltage Range on the Counter Module (500 Hz) Installation You install the counter module on a bus unit like any other module. Wiring See the schematic diagram. Addressing You can address a counter module like a two-channel digital module (channel 0 or 1). For enabling and resetting the counter, you address the module like a digital output module. The counter reading is scanned in the same way as a digital input module (see Figure 9-5). ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-15 Function Modules Channel "0" ; Counter Enable Channel "1" ; (Set to Start Value) S S Q Q x.0 x.1 R R Q Q x.0 x.1 ; Counter Reset ; A A I I x.0 x.1 ; Scan ; "1" = Counter at Zero Channel Number Slot Address Figure 9-5 Scanning the Counter Module (500 Hz) Timing Diagram S Q x.0 1 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 R Q x.0 Enable Counting Pulses Output Q Time Figure 9-6 Timing Diagram: Setting and Resetting an Output of the Counter Module (500 Hz) 9-16 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Typical Application A counter module is plugged into slot 2 (module address 2.0). A value of 100 is set on channel 0 of this module via the three-digit thumbwheel switches. The incoming pulses are counted once the counter has been enabled by the control program. As soon as 100 pulses have been counted, a signal (output 4.0) is released. Connection Diagram 1 3 2 STL S A = ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Q I Q 5 4 7 6 9 8 10 Explanation 2.0 2.0 4.0 During the counting operation, input I 2.0 is 0. When the counter status is 0, input I 2.0 is set to 1. Output Q 4.0 is then also set. Direct output at terminals 5 and 6 is possible. 9-17 Function Modules Counter Module 25/500 kHz (6ES5 385-8MB11) pr93a006 9.6 Technical Specifications Address identifier for ET 200U 2AX or 029 DP Siemens 2AX or 241 DP Standard Counting mode Position decoder counter forwards/backwards up Setpoint input via program Operating mode (switch-selectable) PD (Position decoder) position decoder C (Counter) counter 5-V Decoder input (15-pin subminiature D connector) Decoder inputs 1 decoder 5 V (differential input) or 1 decoder 24 V DC position decoder counter Digital inputs 2; reference and enabling Digital outputs 2; setpoints reached 1 and 2 Galvanic isolation no Counting range Operating mode position decoder counter 9-18 Input signals differential signals to RS 422 A A-N, B B-N, R R-N A A-N Counting frequency max. 500 kHz Cable length (shielded) max. 50 m (165ft) Power supply for decoder 5 V from L+ via voltage transformer Output current max. 300 mA short-circuit-proof two's complement (KF) -32768 to +32767 unipolar representation (KH) 0 to 65535 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules 24-V Decoder Input (15-pin subminiature D connector) Digital Outputs (Setpoints 1 and 2) Rated input voltage 24 V DC Input signals position decoder counter A, B, R A Input voltage "0" signal "1" signal -33 to +5 V DC +13 to +33 V DC Output current (resistive, inductive load) 5 mA to 0.5 A Residual current for "0" current max. 0.5 mA Switching current for lamps 0.22 A (5 W) Limitation of inductive interrupting voltage to - 15 V Output voltage "1" signal "0" signal min. L+ (- 2.2 V) max. 3 V Cable length (unshielded) max. 100 m Rated input current for "1" signal typ. 8.5 mA Counting frequency max. 25 kHz Cable length (shielded) max. 100 m 24 V from L+ (PTC thermistor) Short-circuit protection (cable impedance up to max. 15 ) electronic Power supply for decoder Output current max. 300 mA short- circuit-proof Short-circuit indication (short-circuit to M) red LED Digital Inputs (Reference and enabling) Rated input voltage 24 V DC Input voltage "0" signal "1" signal -33 to +5 V DC +13 to +33 V DC Rated input current for "1" signal and at 24 V typ. 8.5 mA Input frequency max. 100 Hz Inherent delay typ. 3 ms (1.4 to 5 ms) Cable length (unshielded) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Supply voltage L+ rated value ripple Vpp permissible range (including ripple) 24 V DC max. 3.6 V 20 to 30 V DC Fuse (internal) T5A Current consumption from L+ without decoder supply without load internal (+9 V) 30 mA 70 mA Power loss of the module typ. 1.9 W + total output current (IA) 1.1 V Weight approx. 250 g (9 oz.) max. 100 m (330 ft) 9-19 Function Modules Function The counter module can be used as an up-counter or as an up/down counter for a position decoder. The counting pulses are supplied by a sensor that you can connect to the 15-pin subminiature D female connector of the module. You can choose from two types of sensors that fulfill the following requirements: 5 V error voltages according to RS 422 (up to 500 kHz) or 24 V signals (up to 25 kHz). As additional inputs, the module has an enable input and a reference input. By using the STEP 5 program, you can assign two setpoints via the I/O bus. These setpoints are output to channels 0 and 1 in the I/O slot for the module. Once the counter status reaches one of these values, the respective output completes the circuit at the terminal block (Q0 or Q1). The status of the outputs is displayed in the diagnostics byte. You can also read the following values by using the STEP 5 program: The updated count The diagnostics byte You can preselect the following items on the operating mode switch (see Figure 9-7): Function mode (COUNTER/POSITION DECODING) Position resolution (X1, X2, or X4) Input voltage range of the sensor (5 V DC or 24 V DC) Position decoding (PD) Counter (C) Pos. resolution single 2 Pos. resolution double Pos. resolution quadruple 4 not allowed 24 V Sensor connection Sensor connection 5V 24 V Figure 9-7 Switch Positions on the Operating Mode Switch of the Counter Module 9-20 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Installation Installing and Removing the Module You install the counter module on a bus unit like other I/Os. Set the coding key to number 6 on the bus unit. Disconnect the 24 V DC power supply (terminals 1 and 2 of the terminal block) before connecting or disconnecting the transducer cables. ! Caution Damage to sensor. Can cause minor property damage. Do not connect or disconnect the 5 V DC transducer cable while the module is energized. Connect pulse and position sensors on the front panel by means of a 15-pin sub-D connector (see Figure 9-8). The module can supply the sensors (5 V DC or 24 V DC). Basically, you can connect all sensors if they fulfill the requirements of the system signals and supply voltage. You cannot connect sensors with OPEN- COLLECTOR outputs to the module. The shield connection of the sensors must be connected to the metallic front connector cover. Pin Assignment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 5 V Supply Voltage 5 V Sensor Line Ground Rectang. Wave Sign. A-N (5 V) Rectang. Wave Signal A (5 V) Supply Voltage (24 V) Rectang. Wave Signal B (5 V) Rectang. Wave Sign. B-N (5 V) Reference Pulse R (5 V) Reference Pulse R-N (5 V) Rectang. Wave Signal A (24 V) Rectang. Wave Signal B (24 V) Reference Pulse R (24 V) Figure 9-8 Pin Assignment of the 15-Pin Sub-D Female Connector of the Counter Module ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-21 Function Modules Figure 9-9 shows how to connect counting pulse sensors for a 5 V differential signal to RS 422A. Module Electronic Light Source 1 5V 3 0V Sensor Line 5V L+ 24 V M 5 5V5V 0V 5V Va Pulse Sensor 7 A-N A 9 11 13 15 Shield Shell of Sub- miniature D Connector Figure 9-9 Connecting a Counting Pulse Sensor for 5 V Differential Signal to RS 422 Figure 9-10 shows how to connect a counting pulse sensor for 24 V DC. Module 1 3 M 5 0V 7 0V L+ DC 24 V 9 24 V Pulse Sensor 24 V DC 11 13 A 15 Shield Shell of Sub- miniature D Connector Figure 9-10Connecting a Counting Pulse Sensor for 24 V DC 9-22 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Figure 9-11 shows how to connect a 5 V DC position sensor to RS 422A. Module Electronic Light Source 1 5V 3 0V Sensor Line 5V L+ 24 V M 5 5V5V 0V 7 Va1 5V Pulse Sensor Va2 9 11 Va0 A-N A B B-N R R-N 13 15 Shield Shell of Sub- miniature D Connector Figure 9-11Connecting a 5 V Position Sensor to RS 422A Figure 9-12 shows how to connect a 24 V DC position sensor. Module 1 3 M Electronic Light Source 5 0V 7 L+ 24 V 0V 24 V 24 V Position Sensor 9 11 13 Va1 Va2 Va0 15 Shield A B R Shell of Sub- miniature D Connector Figure 9-12 Connecting a 24 V DC Position Sensor ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-23 Function Modules The sensor signals to the module inputs must satisfy the following requirements: Signal sequence for up-counting Sensor Signals: t1 Va2 t Va2 t t t t1 t2 Va0 Figure 9-13 Signal Sequence for Up-Counting Pulse time of the sensors 5 V Sensors 24 V Sensors Pulses t w500 ns w10 ms Va1 = Position decoder count pulses (A) t1 w2 ms w40 ms Va2 = Position decoder count pulses (B) t2 w500 ns w10 ms Va0 = Position decoder ref. pulses (R) Minimum edge steepness Voltage 9-24 Description Minimum Edge Steepness 5V Differential signals according to RS 422A (A, A-N, B, B-N, R, R-N): 5 V / ms 24 V Count pulses and reference pulse (A, B, R): 0,3 V / ms 24 V Enable and reference signal: 0,3 mV / ms ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules You can connect proximity switches (contacts, two-wire BERO proximity limit switches) to the inputs on the terminal block (see Figure 9-14). 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 Terminal Terminal Assignment 1 2 24 V DC Supply for the Module Ground 3 4 24 V DC Supply for Enable Signal DI Enable Signal 5 6 DQ 24 V / 0.5 A Setpoint 1 (Q0) Ground 7 8 24 V DC Supply for Reference Signal DI Reference Signal 9 10 9 DQ 24 V / 0.5 A Setpoint 2 (Q1) Ground Figure 9-14Assignment Diagram for the Terminal Block Assignment of Inputs on the Terminal Block You can connect two-wire BERO proximity limit switches to the reference input. The enable input can also be driven by a 24 V DC digital output module. Outputs on the Terminal Block There are two short-circuit protected 24 V DC digital outputs on the terminal block. Short-Circuit Indication The red LED on the front panel indicates a shorted output. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-25 Function Modules Load operations transmit a diagnostics byte and the actual value to the CPU in the master station (see Table 9-1). Table 9-1 Sending Data from the Counter Modules to the CPU Byte 0 Byte 1 irrelevant Diagnostics Byte Byte 2 Byte 3 Actual Value High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte (Byte 0 = module address) The control program uses transfer operations to transmit two setpoints to the counter module (see Table 9-2). Table 9-2 Sending Data from the CPU to the Counter Module Byte 0 Byte 1 Setpoint 1 High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte Byte 2 Byte 3 Setpoint 2 High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte (Byte 0 = module address) 9-26 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Diagnostics Byte (Byte 1) The diagnostics byte is byte 1 of the first input word. Byte 0 has no significance. The diagnostics byte provides information on the following items (see also Figure 9-15). - Preset position resolution - Preset mode - The reaching of setpoints - Signal status of the sync bit for position decoding Bit No.: 7 6 5 X R R Single Double 0 1 1 0 Quadruple 1 1 Not Possible 0 0 4 3 P/C OV 2 1 0 S2 S1 Sy Position Resolution Mode Position Decoding 1 Counter 0 Counter Overflow 1 No Counter Overflow 0 Setpoint 2 Reached 1 Setpoint 2 Not Reached 0 Setpoint 1 Reached 1 Setpoint 1 Not Reached 0 Sync Bit Set 1 Sync Bit Not Set * 0 X = irrelevant * If the sync bit is not set, a reference point approach must be implemented before operation can continue in the POSITION DECODING mode. Figure 9-15 Diagnostics Byte ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-27 Function Modules Functional Description of the COUNTER Mode In the operation mode COUNTER, the module works as a "port-controlled" up-counter and counts the positive edges of the counting pulses while the enable input is high. If the counter reaches a preselected setpoint, the respective output is then enabled. Initial Settings On the operating mode switch, make the following selections: COUNTER (C) Counting pulse signal level (5 V or 24 V) The position of the switches for position resolution is irrelevant. For this operation, you need a counting pulse sensor (e.g., BERO). The pulses can be applied as 5 V differential signals according to RS 422A (up to 500 kHz) or as 24 V signals (up to 25 kHz). The sensor is connected to the sub-D interface of the module. Loading Setpoints The control program can transfer two setpoints to the module. These setpoints must be in the range of 0 to 65,535. The transfer of the setpoints via the module depends on whether the "setpoint 1 (setpoint 2) reached" bit is set in the diagnostics byte. If the bit is not set, which means the existing setpoint has not been reached or has not been exceeded, the new setpoint is transferred immediately and is immediately valid. If the bit is set, which means the existing setpoint has been reached or exceeded, the new setpoint is valid only after a positive edge occurs at the enabled input. If you do not specify a setpoint, a setpoint of 0 applies. Enabling the Counter The signal state of the enable input (terminal 3 on the terminal block) determines the function of the counter. A positive edge at the enable input does the following: Sets the counter to 0 Resets the diagnostics bits for "setpoint reached" Resets the outputs Enables the counter Note The enable input should be set to 1 only after the setpoint has been transferred. Otherwise, the outputs are enabled automatically when the first positive edge occurs. 9-28 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Disabling the Counter A negative edge at the enable input disables the counter. The outputs, diagnostics bits, and the counter are not reset. You can continue reading the current count. A positive edge at the enable input resets the outputs and the diagnostics bytes. Reaching the Setpoints - Setting the Outputs - Resetting the Outputs If setpoints have been preselected and the counter is enabled, the module counts the positive edges at the counter input. The count is incremented by 1 with every leading edge. After setpoint 1 has been reached, output Q0 is enabled. At the same time, status bit S1 is set. After setpoint 2 has been reached, output Q1 is enabled. At the same time, status bit S2 is set. As long as the enable input is active, the counter counts the pulses. After the enable command has been cancelled, the counter is disabled. The actual value remains constant. You can read the current count in the STEP 5 program. The actual value is displayed as an unsigned whole number and must be in the range of 0 to 65,535. Note If no setpoint is preselected, the respective value 0 is assigned. The corresponding output is enabled with the positive edge of the enabled input. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-29 Function Modules Example Figure 9-16 shows how setpoints S1 = 2 and S2 = 4 are entered into the counter. Counter Status Counting Pulses EE EE EE EE 0 1 2 3 4 EE EE 5 5 01 2 Enable Input Output Q0 (Setpoint 1 Reached) Output Q1 (Setpoint 2 Reached) The pulse is not counted because the counter is disabled by enable input = 0. The count is frozen to the current value. EE EE Figure 9-16Switching the Outputs Dependent on the Status of the Counter and the Enable Input When the ET 200U interface module goes from RUN to STOP, outputs Q0 and Q1 are reset. Performance during Overflow If the enabled counter exceeds the counter range limit of 65,535, the following actions occur: Bit 3 (overflow) in the diagnostics byte is set to 1. The outputs and diagnostics bits for "setpoint reached" are disabled, but they remain unchanged. The counting function continues and the actual value is constantly updated. You can continue to read all data from the module in the STEP 5 program as follows: The updated count The status of the outputs at the time of the overflow (This status remains unchanged until the overflow bit is reset.) The set overflow bit After an overflow, the counter can be reset by one of the following actions: A positive edge at the enable input A cold restart of the programmable controller (STOP to RUN mode) Note After the ET 200U interface module powers up, the outputs remain disabled. These outputs must be enabled by a positive edge at the enable input. 9-30 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Functional Description of the Position Decoder In the operation mode POSITION DECODING, the module works as an up- counter/down-counter and counts the pulses of the connected position encoder. Based on the phase offset of the two decoder signals A and B, the counter determines the counting direction. If the counter reaches a preselected setpoint, the respective output is then turned on. Settings Set the following items on the operating mode switch: POSITION DECODING (PD) function The desired position resolution (single, double, or quadruple) The signal level of the counting pulses (5 V or 24 V) Connect the sub-D interface female connector to an incremental position encoder that has to deliver the following signals: Two counting pulses offset by 90 degrees A reference pulse The pulses can be supplied as 5 V differential signals according to RS 422 (up to 500 kHz) or as 24 V DC signals (up to 25 kHz). Connect a switch to the enable input. This switch must deliver a 24 V signal. In the same way, the reference pulse has to deliver a 24 V signal to the reference input. Position Resolution: Counter capacity The 16-bit up/down counter permits a resolution of 65,536 units between - 32768 and +32767. The traversing range depends on the resolution of the position encoders. Pulse evaluation The counting pulses, which are offset by 90 degrees, can be subjected to single, double, or quadruple evaluation. The necessary setting is made on the operating mode switch (see Figure 9-7). The accuracy of the traversing path increases accordingly if double or quadruple pulse evaluation is used. However, the traversing range then available is reduced by a factor of 2 or 4 (see Table 9-3). ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-31 Function Modules Table 9-3 Pulse Evaluation Single Evaluation Double Evaluation Quadruple Evaluation Counting Pulse A Counting Pulse B Count Example 0 1 2 1 0 01234 A rotary incremental position encoder produces 1000 pulses per revolution. The spindle has a pitch of 50 mm/revolution. The position encoder therefore produces 1000 pulses for a traversing path of 50 mm (1 revolution). The resolution of the encoder is therefore 50 mm/1000 pulses. The counter can handle up to 65,536 pulses. With the above resolution, the traversing ranges shown in Table 9-4 are obtained. Table 9-4 Sample Traverse Range Pulse Evaluation Single Double Quadruple Traversing Range 3.25 m 1.625 m 0.81 m Distance Travelled/ Pulse 50 mm 25 mm 12.5 mm Loading Setpoints In the STEP 5 program, two setpoints can be transferred to the module. These setpoints must lie between - 32768 and +32767. The acceptance of the setpoints by the module depends on whether the "setpoint 1 (setpoint 2) reached" bit has been set in the diagnostics byte. If the bit is not set, which means the existing setpoint is not reached or not exceeded, the new setpoint is immediately accepted and is immediately valid. If the bit is set, which means the existing setpoint is reached or exceeded, the new setpoint is not valid until a positive edge occurs at the enable input. If you do not specify a setpoint, a setpoint of 0 applies. 9-32 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Synchronization of Actual Value Detection (Reference Point Approach) The synchronization of actual value detection is necessary after power-up and after a counter overflow. Synchronization performs the following functions: Sets the count (actual value) to 0 and Sets the SYNC bit (bit 0 in the diagnostics bit) after power-up or Resets the overflow bit (bit 3 in the diagnostics byte) after an overflow The following factors are prerequisites for synchronization: 1. The reference signal The sensor for the reference signal is connected to terminals 7 and 8 of the terminal block. Synchronization is enabled with a leading edge (transition from 0 to 1) at terminal 8. If the signal was already on 1 when the module was switched on, then the reference signal must be turned off to restart the synchronization. If the reference signal lies in the normal traversing range, the actual value will be constantly resynchronized by the reference signal. To prevent the unwanted resynchronizing, you have to mask out the reference signal after the first reference point approach. 2. Traversing path after a positive edge of the reference signal After the reference signal has been reached, the module has to recognize a positive traversing path (up-counting) while the reference signal is still active (1). This means you have to input the reference signal with increasing actual value to synchronize the module. 3. Reference pulse (Va0; 0 mark of the sensor) The reference pulse is generated by the position encoder at least once per revolution. The first reference pulse that the module recognizes after a leading edge of the reference signal synchronizes the module. This is also valid if, after the first positive traversing path, the direction is changed and a reference pulse is encountered (see Figure 9-19). If, during post synchronization, the reference point is again passed, then you have to mask out the reference signal after the synchronization reference point approach to avoid resynchronizing the module. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-33 Function Modules Figures 9-17, 9-18, and 9-19 illustrate different possibilities for a reference traversing path. Positive Direction of Traverse Reference Signal Reference Pulse of the Sensor Sync Bit Figure 9-17 Position of the Reference Point (SYNC Bit 0=1) within the Reference Signal Range Reference Signal (1) Reference Pulse of the Sensor Sync Bit (1) First reference pulse detected by the module after the leading edge of the reference signal Figure 9-18 Position of the Reference Point (SYNC Bit=1) after the Reference Signal Positive Direction of Traverse Reference Signal Reference Pulse of the Sensor Change of Direction Reference Signal Reference Pulse of the Sensor (1) Sync Bit (1) First reference pulse detected by the module after the leading edge of the reference signal Figure 9-19 Position of the Reference Point (SYNC Bit=1) during a Reversal of Direction before Reaching the Reference Pulse in a Positive Direction 9-34 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Example A conveyor belt transports objects from point A to point B. A rotary position encoder is used, together with a BERO proximity switch as reference transmitter. The conveyor belt is marked at a definite point. As soon as this mark comes within the range of the BERO, the BERO produces a reference signal. Following the reference point approach, the enable input is set via a digital output module (see Figure 9-20). Operation Range of Reference Transmitter Rotary Position Encoder PS IM 318-B Conveyor Belt DA Counting-UP Direction Mark BERO Enable Input Reference Input Traversing Path A B Traversing Range Figure 9-20 Schematic of a Reference Point Approach Operation ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-35 Function Modules Starting the Counter The counter is reset and started by setting the SYNC bit in the diagnostics byte during the reference point approach operation. The active pulses are counted according to the rotation direction of the position encoder. The count value is incremented during a positive count direction, and decremented during a negative count direction. Enabling the Outputs - Reaching the Setpoints - Resetting the Outputs A positive pulse edge at the enable input enables the two outputs for switching. An output and the associated diagnostics bit "setpoint reached" are set if all of the following statements are true: The position decoder was synchronized (SYNC bit = 1 and overflow bit = 0). The enable signal (terminal 3 on the terminal block) is set to 1. The actual value corresponds to the selected setpoint. The setpoint can be reached in the up-count or down-count direction. Up-Count Direction SYNC Bit Is Set at the Start Counter Status EE EE EE EE 0 1 2 3 Counting Pulses SYNC Bit (In Diagnostics Byte Enable Input EE EE 4 5 6 7 Down-Count Direction SYNC Bit Is Constantly Set EE EE EE EE 8 9 10 E E -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 Output Q0 (Set- point 1 Reached) Output Q1 (Set- point 2 Reached) EE EE Measured Counting Pulse Counter Is Still Disabled Figure 9-21 Enabling the Outputs - Reaching the Setpoints - Resetting the Outputs 9-36 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules After reaching setpoint 1, output Q0 is energized and status bit S1 is set. After reaching setpoint 2, output Q1 is energized and status bit S2 is set. As long as the enable input is active, the outputs are switchable through the module. If the enable command is cancelled, the outputs are switched off and the diagnostics bits are reset. The current actual value is still being measured and incremented or decremented depending on the direction of rotation. You can read the current count in the STEP 5 program. The actual value is displayed as a signed whole number in two's complement and lies in the range of - 32768 to + 32767. Note Before you enable the outputs to be switched on by setting the enable input to 1, make sure the following conditions exist: The SYNC bit = 1. The overflow bit = 0. Both setpoints were transferred. If you ignore these prerequisites, the outputs are switched on directly when the actual value = 0. If the actual value = 0, the outputs are turned on. The diagnostics bit and the output are reset with the "0" signal at the enable input. Outputs Q0 and Q1 are also reset when the programmable controller goes from RUN to STOP. The following examples show the switching on of the output at the selected setpoint. Following are the three possibilities: Reaching the setpoint in the direction of a rising actual value Reaching the setpoint in the direction of a falling actual value Reaching the setpoint in the direction of a rising actual value, then a reversal of direction and a reapproaching of the setpoint in the opposite direction. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-37 Function Modules Example Figure 9-22 illustrates approaching a setpoint in an up-count direction. Enable Input Direction of Traverse Output, Diag- nostics Bit Setpoint Reached Example of Actual Value Setpoint 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 Figure 9-22 Approaching a Setpoint in Up-Count Direction The actual values have the following significance: With actual value = 1000, the enable input is set to 1. With actual value = 3000, the setpoint is reached, output and diagnostics bit "setpoint reached" are set. With actual value = 6000, the enable input is set to 0, output and diagnostics bit are reset. Example Figure 9-23 illustrates approaching a setpoint in a down-count direction. Enable Input Direction of Traverse Output, Dia- gnostics Bit Setpoint Reached Example of Actual Value Setpoint 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 Figure 9-23 Approaching a Setpoint in Down-Count Direction The actual values have the following significance: With actual value = 7000, the enable input is set to 1. With actual value = 3000, the setpoint is reached, the output and the diagnostics bit "setpoint reached" are set. With actual value = 1000, the enable input is set to 0, the output and the diagnostics bit are reset. 9-38 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Example Figure 9-24 illustrates reversal of direction after approaching a setpoint. Enable Input Output, Dia- gnostics Bit Setpoint Reached Direction of Traverse Direction of Traverse Change of Direction Setpoint Example of Actual Value 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 Figure 9-24 Approaching a Setpoint in Up-Count Direction and Subsequent Reversal of Direction The actual values have the following significance: With actual value = 1000, the enable input is set to 1. With actual value = 3000, the setpoint is reached, the output and the diagnostics bit "setpoint reached" are set. With actual value = 4500, the traversing path is reversed. With actual value = 1000, the enable input is set to 0, the output and the diagnostics bit are reset. Note Set outputs can be reset only via a "0" signal to the enable input. Performance during Overflow If the counter leaves the counting range of - 32768 to + 32767, then the following occurs: Bit 3 (overflow) in the diagnostics byte is set to 1. The outputs of the counter module are disabled. The enable input (terminal 4 of the terminal block) must be set to 0 to switch off active outputs. After an overflow, you need to execute a new reference point approach operation for synchronization of the actual value detection. After reaching the synchronization, bit 3 in the diagnostics byte is again set to 0, and the outputs along with the active enable input can be turned on. Note During an overflow, active outputs are not switched off, and the SYNC bit (bit 0 in the diagnostics byte) is not reset. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-39 Function Modules Entering New Setpoints for the Counter and Position Decoder You can always enter new setpoints via the PIQ. However, a setpoint is only valid if the respective output is not switched on. You can use diagnostics bits S1 and S2 to display the status of the outputs. The significance of the diagnostics bits is as follows: Diagnostics bit S1 (bit 1 in the diagnostics byte) = 1: setpoint 1 is reached and output 1 is switched on. Diagnostics bit S2 (bit 2 in the diagnostics byte) = 1: setpoint 2 is reached and output 2 is switched on. Table 9-5 shows the reaction of the counter module during transfer of the setpoints. Table 9-5 Diag. bit Response S1 = 0 S2 = 0 New setpoint 1 is transferred and is valid immediately. New setpoint 2 is transferred and is valid immediately. S1 = 1 New setpoint 1 only becomes active if a positive edge has appeared at the enable input. New setpoint 2 only becomes active if a positive edge has appeared at the enable input. S2 = 1 9-40 Reaction of the Counter Module during Transfer of the Setpoints ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Example You want to control a drive by using the outputs of the counter module. After a run of positioning, both setpoints are reached and both outputs are turned on. You can enter the new setpoints by using the sequence shown in Figure 9-25. The circled numbers are explained following the figure. (3) Enable Input (2) Output Q0/ Diagn. Bit S1 (4) (4) Output Q1/ Diagn. Bit S2 S1Old (1) S2Old S1New S2New Figure 9-25 Requirement for New Setpoint 1. Transfer the new setpoints to the module. Since both diagnostic bits S1 and S2 are set to 1, the actual values are not yet accepted. 2. Switch the signal now at the enable input to 0. With the falling edge, the outputs are switched off and the diagnostics bits are reset. 3. Switch the signal at the enable input again to 1. The new setpoints are accepted and are now active. 4. After reaching the new setpoints, the respective output is turned on again. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-41 Function Modules Addressing The counter module is addressed like a two-channel analog module (ID 2AX). Example Meaning of the bytes of a slot address (slot 1 with module address 72) Table 9-6 Example Meaning of the Bytes of a Slot Address Byte Number Byte Address Meaning in PII Meaning in PIQ 0 72 Irrelevant High Byte 1 73 Diagnostics Byte Low Byte 2 74 High Byte 3 75 Low Byte Actual Value High Byte Low Byte Set- point 1 Set- point 2 Data Exchange between the Programmable Controller and the Counter Module 1. The counter module has module start address 96. If you now wish to check whether your system for position decoding has been synchronized by a reference point approach, you must scan the sync bit in the diagnostics byte (bit 0). If this bit is set, a branch is to be made to FB20. The position decoding operation is started in FB20. STL L T A JC 9-42 PW IW I FB 96 96 97.0 20 Description Read in bit 0 of the diagnostics byte (sync bit). If this bit is set, a branch is made to FB20. If the bit is not set, program scanning is continued with the statement following the block call. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules 2. You want to transfer the setpoints stored in flag words 0 and 2 to the counter module inserted with module start address 120. The module will not accept the setpoints until the old setpoints have been reached or exceeded. STL L001 L002 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Description ... AN JC L T I 121.1 =L001 FW 0 QW 120 AN JC I 121.2 =L002 Read in setpoint 1 and transfer it to the counter module. If setpoint 2 has not yet been reached (bit 2=0), a branch is made to label 2. L T FW QW Read in setpoint 2 and transfer it to the counter module. BE . . . 2 122 If setpoint 1 has not yet been reached (bit 1=0), a branch is made to label 1. Block end 9-43 Function Modules 9.7 Closed-Loop Control Module IP 262 Controller Technical Specifications Address ID for ET 200U S DP Siemens S DP Standard 223 4AX or 243 General Specifications Input voltage 24 V DC S Rated value 18 to 34 V DC S Permissible range S Permissible range with the 18 to 27 V DC PG 605/OP 393 Current consumption S Internal (from the CPU, 9 V) approx. 20 mA S External (for 24 V; without approx. 180 mA load) S External (for 24 V; without load; approx. 340 mA with PG 605/OP 393) Ambient temperature 9-44 (6ES5 262-8MA12) (6ES5 262-8MB12) 0 to 55 _C (32 to 131 _F) Total cycle time (equals scan time) 100 to 200 ms Resolution of the open-loop controller 5 ms at 50 Hz 4.2 ms at 60 Hz Analog Inputs Number of inputs Additional input for reference temperature 4 (suited for current, thermocouple, or resistance thermometer) Voltage with external switching 1 (resistance thermometer) Galvanic isolation no Permissible voltage differences -1 V to +1 V S Between inputs S Between inputs and central -1 V to +1 V ground point Digital representation of the input signal 11 bits + sign ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Current input Input signal range Input resistance 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA 24.3 W "0.1 % mV Input (for thermocouple) Input signal range Cable impedance Resistance thermometer Start End Permissible cable impedance 0 to 50 mV or -8.9 to 41.1 mV (type J, K, L, S) Binary Outputs for the Open-Loop Controller (6ES5 262-8MB12) Number of outputs p G l i isolation i l i Galvanic 8 no Signal state "0" t 1.5 V Signal state "1" (L+) - 3.8 V Maximum load current 100 mA short-circuit proof 30 W per wire Wiring Method 18.49 W 219.12 W 30 W per wire Programmer (PG) front side via 15-pin Operator panel (OP) subminiature D conSINEC L1 network connection nector Connectable are PG 605, PG 730, PG 750, PG 770, OP 393, OP 395 Analog and binary inputs front side via 25-pin subminiature D connector Analog and binary outputs via terminal block of the bus unit Binary Inputs Number of inputs 4 Galvanic isolation no Signals state "0" -30 to +4.5 V or open Signals state "1" +13 to +30 V (signal state invertible) Input resistance approx. 4 kW Analog Outputs of the Constant Controller (6ES5 262-8MA12) Number of outputs p G l i iisolation Galvanic l i 3 no Output signal range 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Maximum permissible load 600 W No load voltage (L+) - 2 V ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-45 Function Modules Function The module is well-suited to take over control-loop tasks in the area of industrial processing technology such as temperature control, pressure and flow control, continuous injection functions, and non-time-critical closed-loop speed controls. The module relieves the programmable controller from closed-loop control tasks. The IP 262 also works with its own power supply in a stand-alone operation. The module can function independently without a programmable controller and can handle up to four closed-loop control circuits. The following two interfaces are located on the front panel of the module: An interface for connecting a programmer (PG), an operator panel (OP), or the SINEC L1 Network (under development) An interface for connecting analog and binary inputs In addition, the following items are available: A selector switch for each channel for current and voltage (thermocouples or PT 100) A green status LED with the following indications: - Continuously lit, to signify the RUN mode - Flashing, to signify a transducer malfunction - Off, to signify a transducer malfunction Additionally, the module offers the following inputs: Four analog inputs for direct feed of setpoint and actual values Four binary inputs for control variables Modules There are two IP 262 modules as follows: ...-8MA12 with 3 analog outputs for continuous controllers with analog output signals. ...-8MB12 with 8 binary outputs for continuous controllers with pulse time interval signals or for step-action controllers. For this purpose, you can order a separate manual for working with this module (see Catalog). Installation Install the closed-loop control module on a bus unit like any other input or output module. The connections for power supply and the analog and binary output signals are located on the terminal block of the bus unit. The analog and binary inputs are connected to the module with a 25-pin sub-D female connector. 9-46 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Addressing The module is addressed like a four-channel analog module. Operating Modes Since transducers and sensors are directly wired to the module, the module can work independently from a programmable controller in stand-alone operation, provided that the setpoints and the 24 V power supply voltage are fed directly to the IP 262. This means that the module executes the control and the output of the control value and can work alone or be controlled via the SINEC L1 by a master unit. Besides this, the IP 262 has its own backup, which means that the module can continue to work alone in the event the master CPU (e.g., S5-135U with R64) fails. It uses the last setpoint received from the CPU or a predefined back-up setpoint. The following two operating modes are possible: DDC Operation (Direct Digital Control) The control is executed entirely from the CPU and the IP only outputs the manipulated variable. If the CPU fails, the module can continue to control independently with a predefined back-up setpoint. SPC Operation (Setpoint Control) The module receives only the setpoint from the CPU; the module carries out the control independently of the CPU. If the CPU fails, the IP continues to control using the last setpoint received from the CPU. It is also possible to use a predefined back-up setpoint here. Note Different addresses for inputs and outputs of the IP 262 The IP 262 has an address range of 8 bytes for inputs and 8 bytes for outputs. COM ET 200 assigns addresses for inputs and outputs freely with the result that inputs and outputs of the IP 262 can have different addresses. Minimum time interval between IP 262 accesses The IP 262 has a firmware cycle of up to 200 ms. The module can therefore only be accessed at intervals of at least 200 ms. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-47 Function Modules 9.8 IP 263 Positioning Module (6ES5 263-8MA11) Technical Specifications Sensors Address ID for ET 200U (requires 2 slots) DP Siemens DP Standard Position decoder 223/000 4AX/000 or 243/000 Microprocessor Type 80C32 Clock frequency 16 MHz Memory EPROM 64 Kbytes RAM 32 Kbytes EEPROM 1 Kbit 9-48 Incremental, absolute (SSI interface) Maximum traversing range with incremental encoders with absolute encoders Signal voltages Differential inputs Asymmetrical inputs 224 increments 8192 increments per revolution 2048 revolutions 5 V to RS 422 24 V (only incremental sensors) Supply voltage for sensors (short-circuit-proof, no overload) 5 V / 300 mA 24 V / 300 mA ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Input frequency and Cable Length Digital Outputs Symmetrical sensors (5 V signals): S with 5 V sensor supply Output voltage range +20 V to + 30V Galvanic isolation No Output current at 1 signal max. 500 mA Short-circuit protection Short-circuit proof output Cable length, screened max. 100 m (328 ft) S with 24 V sensor supply Asymmetrical sensors (24 V signals): Data transmission rate and cable length with absolute sensors Input signals S Incremental S S 24 V initiator (BERO) SSI Input currents S 5V S 24 V max. 200 kHz for 32 m (105 ft) cable, shielded max. 200 kHz for 100 m (328 ft) cable, shielded Supply voltage max. 100 kHz for 25 m (82 ft) cable, shielded max. 25 kHz for 100 m (328 ft) cable, shielded Logic voltage from 24 V exter- 4.9 V to 5.1 V nal supply produced with switched-mode power supply Current consumption from 24 V without outputs and sensor typ. 120 mA 62.5 kHz (selectable in steps) 125 kHz (160 m/525 ft, shielded) 250 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz (32 m/105 ft, shielded) Undervoltage monitoring Vinternal < 4.65 V Hardware reset Power loss typ. 4 W 2 pulse trains displaced by 90, 1 zero pulse 1 pulse train Absolute value to RS 422 typ. 5 mA Digital Inputs Ambient Conditions Operating temperature 0 to 60 _C Operating pressure 860 to 1080 hPa Vibration load in operation 0.075 mm at 10 to 57 Hz 1 g at 58 to 500 Hz Electric shock in operation 15 g, 11 ms half sine Storage temperature - 40 to +70 _C Relative air humidity (storage) v 95 % at T v25_C Air pressure during storage 660 to 1080 hPa Input voltage range - 3 V to +30 V Noise Immunity Galvanic isolation No Static noise immunity 0 signal - 3 V to +5 V Up to 2.5 kV (except screw terminals) 1 signal +13 V to +30 V Radio-frequency interference 3 V/m Interference on cables S DC voltage supply cables S Signal cables 1 kV 2 kV Permissible zero-signal current 1.1 mA at 0 signal Input current at 24 V typ. 5 mA Other: If the digital inputs are used, they must always be connected to a defined potential (0 V, 24 V) and must not be kept open. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-49 Function Modules A separate manual is available for the IP 263 positioning module. It can be ordered under the order number 6ES5 998-5SK11. The IP 263 is suitable for positioning of two independent axes. Assignments of Outputs The IP 263 is a two-channel module: 4 digital outputs are assigned to each channel for the control of drives; Rapid traverse Creep speed Anti-clockwise rotation Clockwise rotation Both incremental and absolute encoders (SSI - synchronous serial interface) can be connected for actual position encoding. They transmit the machine data, such as Software limit switches Resolution Cutoff difference Switchover difference Zero-speed control The syntax for the data block which has to be created for this purpose is simple and is described in the manual. Positioning The only thing that remains to be done is to specify the desired target and then the module is ready for the positioning procedure. The IP 263 then carries out positioning automatically. When the target has been reached, it sends a message to the ET 200U interface module and thus to the CPU. Figure 9-26 shows the positioning procedure with the IP 263: After the start, a rapid traverse towards the target takes place first. When the switchover/cutoff point has been reached, a switch-over to creep speed or cutoff takes place. Afterwards, the IP 263 monitors approach of the target. When the axis has reached the target range, a signal is sent to the ET 200U interface module. 9-50 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Switchover point vRapid traverse Cutoff point Target range vCreep Rapid traverse Creep speed Clockwise Anti-clockwise Figure 9-26 Positioning with the IP 263 During reference point travel, the digital input of the module senses the speed reducing cam (reference point switch). In the "length measurement" operating mode, the module senses sensor pulses as long as this input has a "1" signal. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-51 Function Modules 9.9 IP 264 Electronic Cam Controller Module 6ES5 264-8MA11 ACTIVE Technical Specifications Encoders Address ID for ET 200U (occupies 2 slots) DP Siemens DP Standard Actual value sensing Incremental, absolute (SSI interface) 223/000 4QX/000 or 243/000 Max. traversing range with incremental encoders with absolute encoders Type 80C32 Clock frequency 16 MHz Signal voltages Differential inputs Asymmectrical inputs Microprocessor Memory EPROM 64 Kbytes RAM 32 Kbytes EEPROM 1 Kbit 9-52 Supply voltages for the encoders (short-circuit-proof, no overload) 216 increments 216 encoder incr. 5 V to RS 422 24 V (only incremental encoders) 5 V / 300 mA 24 V / 300 mA ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Input Frequency and Cable Length Digital Outputs Symmetrical encoders (5 V signals): S with 5 V encoder supply Output voltage range +20 V to +30 V Galvanic isolation no Output current at 1 signal max. 300 mA Short-circuit protection short-circuit proof output Cable length, shielded max. 100 m S with 24 V encoder supply S Asymmetrical encoders (24 V signals): Data transmission rate and cable length with absolute encoders Input signals S Incremental S S 24 V initiator (BERO) SSI Input currents S 5V S 24 V max. 200 kHz at 32 m (105 ft) cable, shielded max. 200 kHz at 100 m (328 ft) cable, shielded max. 100 kHz at 25 m (82 ft) cable, shielded max. 25 kHz at 100 m (328ft) cable, shielded (selectable in steps) 125 kHz (160 m/525 ft, shielded) 250 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz (32 m/105 ft, shielded) 2 pulse trains displaced by 90 _C 1 zero pulse 1 pulse train absolute value to RS 422 typ. 5 mA Digital Inputs Supply Voltage Logic voltage from 24 V exter- 4.9 V to 5.1 V nal supply produced with switched-mode power supply Current consumption from 24 V without outputs and sensors typ. 120 mA Undervoltage monitoring Vintern < 4.65 V Power loss typ. 4 W Module Cycle Time (incl. dead time compensation) Separate cam programs with max. 32 cams each for forwards and backwards (incl. dead time compensation) 57.6 ms "Common" cam program with max. 32/64 cams for forwards 57.6 / 115.2 ms and backwards Ambient Conditions Operating temperature 0 to 60 _C Input voltage range - 3 V to +30 V Operating pressure 860 to 1080 hPa Calvanic isolation no Vibration load in operation 0 signal - 3 V to +5 V 0.075 mm at 10 to 57 Hz 1 g at 58 to 500 Hz 1 signal +13 V to +30 V Electric shock in operation 15 g, 11 ms half sine Storage temperature - 40 to +70 _C Relative air humidity (storage) v 95 % at T v25 _C Air pressure during storage 660 to 1080 hPa Permissible zero signal current 1.1 mA at 0 signal Input current at 24 V typ. 5 mA Other: If the digital inputs are used, they must always be connected to a defined potential (0 V, 24 V) and must not be kept open. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Noise Immunity Static noise immunity Up to 2.5 kV (except screw terminals) Radio-frequency interference 3 V/m Interference on cables S DC voltage supply cables S Signal cables 1 kV 2 kV 9-53 Function Modules A separate manual is available for the electronic cam controller. It can be ordered under the order number 6ES5 998-5SL11. The IP 264 can be used both for rotary and linear axes. The IP 264 electronic cam controller makes electronic processing of cams economical even for applications in the lower performance range. 32 cams which can be allocated as desired to 16 tracks have a switching accuracy of better than 1 degree at 2400 revolutions per minute. This corresponds to a response time of less than 60 m. For applications with low precision requirements (2 degrees at 2400 revolutions per minute ) it is even possible to program 64 cams. It is also possible to integrate 32 cams each into a cam program for "forwards" and a cam program for "backwards". Switchover between these two programs is carried out by automatic direction sensing of the IP 264 or it is controlled by the SIMATIC S5. All cams can be defined either as path-path cams or as path-time cams. Dead Time Compensation Through the speed-dependent, dynamic shift, each individual cam compensates the dead time of the actuator connected (e.g., pneumatic valve) at a scanning rate of 60 ms. This enables the utmost accuracies to be achieved even at changing drive speeds, without complicated adjustments of the STEP 5 program (offset) being required. Direct Process Connection In order to be able to pass on the short response time of the IP 264 directly to the process, a digital output (24 V, 0.5 A) is available on the module for each track. Generally, the units to be controlled can be connected directly. Auxiliary contactors are required only for actuators with a higher current consumption. The sensors to be connected can be incremental encoders, absolute SSI encoders (SSI = synchronous serial interface) or simple 24 V signal sensors (e.g., BEROs). The sensor data can be looped through to further modules via the additional sensor output, without separating the sensor cables mechanically or using additional fan-out units. 9-54 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules 9.10 IP 265 High Speed Sub Control (6ES5 265-8MA01) Technical Specifications Digital 24 V Inputs (9-pin sub D connector) Address ID for ET 200U (The slow mode setting is described in section 4.2.1 and section 5.1.1, figure 5-5) 223 DP Siemens 4AX or 243 DP Standard Number of inputs 8 Galvanic isolation no Status display Yes, on 5 V side Input voltage L+ Rated value for "0" signal for "1" signal 24 V DC 0 to 5 V 11 to 30 V (IEC 65A) Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) <175 mA Input current at "1" signal typ. 6.5 mA (IEC 65 A) Connection of 2-wire BERO possible (zero signal current 1,5 mA) EPROM/EEPROM Input frequency max. 10 kHz approx. 300g (10.5oz) Cable length (shielded) max. 100 m (328 ft) Delay time of input circuit Rising edge Falling edge typ. 15 ms typ. 10 ms Signal status display only for 24 V inputs and 24 V outputs (green LEDs) Operating status display STOP (red LED) RUN (green LED) Memory submodule Weight ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-55 Function Modules 5 V Differential Inputs (15-pin sub D HD socket connector) Number and type of input signals 3 differential signals to RS 422 Input frequency max. 58 kHz Pulse length S "Low" level S "High" level min. 8.6 ms min. 8.6 ms Cable length (shielded) max. 32 m (105 ft) Digital 24 V Outputs (9-pin sub D socket connector) Number of outputs 8 Galvanic isolation no Status display Yes, on 5 V side Short-circuit protection Yes, electronic clock cycle 24 V DC 20 to 30 V Output current at "1" signal 0.5 A at 60 _C 2 A at 60 _C Connection of outputs in paral- possible in pairs lel (Ioutp 0.8 Irated) Output frequency at ohmic load 9-56 max. 100 m (328 ft) Lamp load max. 2 W Residual current at "0" signal max. 1 mA Voltage drop at "1" signal max. 1 V Limitation of inductive cut-off - 15 V voltage Delay time of output circuit S Rising edge S Falling edge, depending on ohmic load typ. 10 ms typ. 150 ms at 15 mA load typ. 90 ms at 50 mA load typ. 70 ms at 500 mA load Expansion Inputs and Outputs (15-pin D sub HD socket connector) Number of inputs and outputs Load voltage L+ S Rated value S Permissible range Permissible total current of output Cable length (shielded) 8 (any desired mixture of I/Os can be configured) Connector for 24 V Load Voltage (2-pin) Permissible cross-sections of cables S Flexible cable H07V-K with end sleeve S Solid cable H07V-U 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 max. 1 kHz at 15 mA load max. 2 kHz at 50 mA load max. 4 kHz at 500 mA load ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules The IP 265 High Speed Sub Control is a powerful, user-programmable I/O module which relieves the CPUs of the SIMATIC S5-100 systems of automation tasks which place great demand on speed and reproducibility. A separate manual is available for the IP 265. It can be ordered under the order number 6ES5 998-5SH11. Function The IP 265 High Speed Sub Control is available with a COM software package which is required to determine the function of the module. The use of the IP 265 in an S5 system enables rapid I/O processing in the millisecond range. By implementation of an FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) in the IP 265 it is possible to process process signals in parallel and very fast. The IP 265 user program consists of elementary basic functions such as logic operations, counters, timers or comparators. The structure of the IP 265 user program is based on the CSF 5 type of representation. The following can be used: Either a user-programmed user program or A fixed-programmed standard program from Siemens. The COM 265 is available for user-programming of the IP 265. Besides it being programmable, the IP 265 can also be used to implement the special "counter" function with a fixed-programmed standard program. For this purpose, SIEMENS AG offers a memory submodule for the IP 265 with the standard "counter" function. The IP 265 user program is automatically processed by the IP 265. It conditions process input signals to process output signals. The IP 265 can read 11 process inputs (8 x 24 V inputs, 3 x 5 V differential inputs) and set 8 process outputs (24 V outputs). The program capacity of the FPGA and the number of process inputs/outputs of one IP 265 are limited. The IP 265 is therefore used for rapid sub controls. By adding one IP 265 to another, complex sub-processes can be controlled with this module. Installation As other I/O modules, the IP 265 High Speed Sub Control is mounted on a bus unit. The module can be plugged in only at slots 0 to 7. The ET 200U distributed I/O station can accommodate a maximum of six IP 265 modules. Addressing The module is addressed like a 4-channel analog module. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-57 Function Modules 9.11 IP 266 Positioning Module Technical Specifications Address ID for ET 200U DP Siemens DP Standard 223 4AX or 243 Analog Output Output signal range 10 V Digital signal representation 13 bits plus sign Short-circuit proof yes Reference potential of the ana- analog ground of the log output signal power section Cable length shielded (6ES5 266-8MA11) Input voltages for the tracks differential inputs asymmetrical inputs 5 V / RS 422 24 V / typ. 7.3 mA Supply voltage for the sensor (short-circuit proof) 5 V / 350 mA 24 V / 350 mA Input Frequency and Cable Length Symmetrical sensors (5 V) max. 500 kHz max. 30 m (98 ft) shielded cable length Asymmetrical sensors (24 V) max. 100 kHz at 25 m (82 ft) cable length shielded max. 32 m (105 ft) max. 25 kHz at 100 m (330 ft) cable length shielded Pulse Input Position decoder incremental Traverse range 32767.999 mm / 0.1 inch / degree 9-58 Input Signals 2 pulse series 90 degrees out of phase 1 zero pulse ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Output voltage range 30 V Output voltage range 20 V to 30 V Galvanic isolation no Galvanic isolation no "0" signal -30 V to +5 V "1" signal 13 V to 30 V Max. output currents at "1" si100 mA gnal Permissible zero signal current 1.5 mA at "0" signal Typical input current at 24 V 7.3 mA Short-circuit protector short-circuit proof output Cable length shielded max. 100 m (330 ft) Supply Voltage Logic voltage from 24 V ext. supply produced with switched mode power supply 4.7 V to 5.5 V Current consumption from 24 V supply without outputs and 24 V sensor ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b typ. 180 mA 9-59 Function Modules Because of its performance capability and the complexity of its description, the IP 266 has its own manual. The order number is 6ES5 998-5SC11. As an intelligent I/O module, it allows you to use open-loop as well as closed-loop control positioning. The IP 266 processes positioning operations independently of the execution times of the user programs in the programmable controller. Thus the CPU is not burdened with positioning jobs constantly being processed. Operation Principle The IP 266 enables you to control the positioning operation of your drive exactly. The module delivers a voltage setpoint in the range of 10 V via an analog output for the control of a power section for servo motors. The IP 266 needs exact data about your drive system in order to calculate speed, acceleration, or traverse residual distances. You can store this data in an EEPROM that is permanently installed in the programmable controller. By using a built-in start-up routine, these data can be accessed immediately after you switch on the programmable controller and can be processed directly. Operating Modes The IP 266 allows you to select between a linear axis and a circular axis. You can also select the unit of measurement for processing the data: either millimeters [mm], inches [in.], or degrees [deg]. Linear Axis Circular Axis Beginning/End of Traversing Range Table Rotary Table Continuous Belt Parameters can be assigned in mm, degree, inch Parameters can be assigned in mm, degree, inch Besides purely traversing movements, other operating modes allow offset generation of axis coordinates or drift compensation in the system. In addition, the IP 266 offers operating modes to read current data such as positioning actual value or residual traversing distances. 9-60 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules In order to use the IP 266 in an automatic manufacturing process, you can combine individual traversing applications, positioning corrections, offsets or dwell times in a traversing program. You can call up these traversing programs via two special operating modes and process them automatically or semiautomatically. The adaptive TEACH-IN mode can create a traversing program simply by taking positions from individual positioning applications and storing them in a traversing program when the mode has run its course. Positioning For the positioning operation, the IP 266 calculates a setpoint course from selected end data and velocity data in conjunction with the programmed machine data. The actual value follows the selection. The deviation (following error) which occurs reaches a constant value after the short start-up phase and must reach zero at the end of the positioning operation (see Figure 9-27). S(t) DS a b t DS DS =const t a = Setpoint Function b = Actual Value Function: DS = Following Error Figure 9-27 Course of a Following Error during a Positioning Operation ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-61 Function Modules Operating Modes Table 9-7 lists the operating modes of the IP 266 positioning module. Table 9-7 Designation of the Operating Modes of the IP 266 Description JOG 1 JOG 2 CONTROLLED JOG FOLLOW-UP MODE RREFERENCE POINT INCREMENTAL ABSOLUTE INCREMENTAL RELATIVE AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC SINGLE BLOCK TEACH-IN ON TEACH-IN OFF ZERO OFFSET ABSOLUTE ZERO OFFSET RELATIVE CLEAR ZERO OFFSET TOOL OFFSET ON TOOL OFFSET OFF ACKNOWLEDGE ERROR MODIFY MACHINE DATA DRIFT COMPENSATION ON UNRESTRICTED SPEED FLAGGING UNRESTRICTED SPEED DISABLING MONITORS ENABLING MONITORS DRIFT COMPENSATION OFF RAM EEPROM READ ACTUAL POSITION READ FOLLOWING ERROR READ DISTANCE TO GO SYNCHRONIZE IP The COM 266 software package offers user-friendly operation and parameter settings. Installation Install the IP 266 on a bus unit like any other I/O module. Connect the external switches to the digital inputs of the IP 266 via the terminal block. These switches are used to limit the traversing range. They also allow you to intervene at any time in the processing of the module. The IP 266 can bypass the PLC CPU cycle, via three digital outputs, and send signals directly to external I/Os. The controller must, however, be enabled (function signal enable controller, FUM) and must be connected to the power section of the drive. Connect the power section of the servo motor to the 9-pin subminiature D female connector. Connect the incremental sensor to the left 15-pin subminiature D female "ENCODER" connector. You can connect a programmer with screen to the 15-pin subminiature connector on the right side to operate the IP 266 via the COM software. 9-62 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules (6ES5 267-8MA11) pr93a009 9.12 IP 267 Stepper Motor Control Module 9-pin Subminiature D Interface Technical Specifications Address ID for ET 200U DP Siemens DP Standard 093 2AX or 241 Supply voltage (BUS) 9V Current consumption approx. 150 mA Special voltage Vs 5 V to 30 V Digital Inputs Rated input voltage 24 V Galvanic isolation no Input voltage "0" signal "1" signal -33 V to 5 V 13 V to 33 V Input current typ. 8.5 mA Supply voltage for two-wire BEROs 22 V to 30 V ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Output voltage with 5 V supply "0" signal "1" signal max. 0.4 V min. 4.5 V Vs supply (5 V to 30 V) "0" signal "1" signal max. 0.4 V min. Vs - 0.4 V Output current 20 mA (short-circuit proof) Output frequency max. 204 kHz Increment number of steps max. 220 - 1 pulses/order Permissible cable length max. 50 m (165 ft.) at 50 kHz (twisted pair cable) 9-63 Function Modules Because of its performance capability and the complexity of its description, the IP 267 has its own manual. The order number is 6ES5 998-5SD21. The IP 267 controls positioning processes independently of the run time of user programs in the programmable controller. The CPU is not loaded with processing positioning job operations. Operation Principle of the IP 267 The IP 267 generates pulses for the stepper motor power section. The number of output pulses determines the length of the traversing path and the pulse frequency is a measure of the velocity. Each pulse causes the stepper motor shaft to turn through a certain angle. In the case of high-speed pulse trains, this step movement becomes a constant rotational movement. Stepper motors can reproduce all movement sequences only as long as no steps are lost. Step losses can be caused when load variations occur or when the programmed pulse trains exceed motor-specific values. To enable the IP 267 to generate these pulse trains, enter the following data: Configuration data: These data describe the individual stepper motors and the technical characteristics of the drive system. Positioning data: These data describe the individual traverse jobs and indicate the velocities, directions, and lengths of the configured paths. The IP 267 generates a symmetrical velocity profile according to the configuring and positioning data. The velocity profile includes the acceleration ramp, the constant stepping range and a deceleration ramp. f CCCCC CCCCC CCCCC CCCCC CCCCC CCCCC CCCCC CCCCC fA fss 1. Acceleration Ramp 2. Constant Stepping Rate/Velocity Range fss = Start/Stop Rate fA = Stepping Rate EEEEE EEEEE EEEEE EEEEE EEEEE EEEEE EEEEE EEEEE 3. Deceleration Ramp t Figure 9-28 Velocity Profile of IP 267 9-64 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules Using a limit switch on the digital inputs, the IP 267 can monitor the limits of a traversing range and stop the traversing movement when the permissible range limit is exceeded. The activated input EXTERNAL STOP causes a calculated deceleration of the traversing movement. You can install an emergency limit switch at input IS (pulse inhibit). When this switch responds, the pulse output is interrupted immediately. For a reference point approach operation, you can connect an additional switch at input REF that lies within the traversing zone. The reference point approach operation is also possible without this switch. LEDs The following table explains the status LEDs of the IP 267 LED Explanation RDY The IP 267 is configured ACT Pulse outputs during a positioning operation ABT Interruption of the positioning operation The four operating modes are as follows: STOP START FORWARDS START BACKWARDS NEUTRAL Installation Install the IP 267 on a bus unit like any other I/O module. Connect external switches to the DIs of the IP 267 via the terminal block. Connect the power section of the stepper motor to the 9-pin subminiature D female connector. Restriction Operation of the IP 267 in the ET 200U distributed I/O system is restricted. Please note that the acknowledgement for a job can be evaluated only after a delay time td. This time is calulated as follows: td = 2 (tI/O-Bus + tDP + tProg) The delay times tI/O-Bus, tDP und tProg are explained in the Appendix of the "ET 200 Distributed I/O System" Manual. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-65 Function Modules 9.13 CP 521 BASIC Communications Module BASIC (6ES5 521-8MB11) + pr93a013 Interpreter Technical Specification Address ID for ET 200U DP Siemens DP Standard 223 4AX or 243 Galvanic isolation TTY signals are isolated Memory submodule EPROM / EEPROM / RAM Serial interface V.24 / TTY passive (active) Transmission mode asynchronous 7-bit mode = 10-bit character frame 11-bit character frame Transmission mode 110 to 9600 Bd 9-66 Permissible cable length V.24 TTY (PT 88) 15 m Results from: (Voltage drop on cable) + (Receiver-typ. voltage drop 1.5 V) or (transmitter-typ. voltage drop 0.9 V) (max. 1000 m) LED displays TxD (green) RxD (green) RTS (green) BATT (yellow) Transmitting Receiving Ready to send Battery failure Back-up battery Lithium 1/2 AA 3.4 V / 850 mAh Back-up time 1 year, minimum Current consumption from +9 V (CPU) typ. 180 mA Power loss of module typ. 1.6 W Weight approx. 500 g (1.1 lb) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules The CP 521 BASIC communications module is a powerful I/O module with its own central processor. A separate manual is available for the CP 521 BASIC. It can be ordered under the order number 6ES5 989-0UW21. The following is an overview of the module's mode of operation. Function The CP 521 BASIC is available with a special COM software package which is required for BASIC program generation and archiving (FLOPPY, EPROM). The implementation of a BASIC interpreter in the CP 521 BASIC enables you to generate and run BASIC programmers which can exchange data with the CPU and an I/O device connected. Programming of the BASIC interpreter is carried out with a programmer via the COM software or at a terminal. The BASIC programs are stored on a battery-backed RAM on the module or on a memory submodule which can be plugged in. The programmer or terminal is connected with the CP 521 BASIC via a serial interface. A TTY current interface or a V.24 (RS 232C) voltage interface (parameterizable) are available for a programmer or a terminal. To print out listings or messages, connect a printer to the unidirectional V.24 (RS 232C) interface of the module. Parameterization (matching) of the I/O interface can be modified via a BASIC command or in the BASIC program. The module has an integrated real-time clock which can be backed up by a battery if the module is de-energized. The clock data can be used, for example, in the unidirectional data exchange for logging of process states and process disturbances. Installation As other I/O modules, the CP 521 BASIC is mounted on the bus unit. The module can be plugged in only at slots 0 to 7. The module has no connection to the terminal block. The printer is connected to the module with a 25-pin sub D connector. Addressing The CP 521 BASIC is addressed like a 4-channel analog module. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-67 Function Modules (6ES5 521-8MA21) pr93a010 9.14 CP 521 SI Communications Processor Technical Specifications Address ID for ET 200U DP Siemens DP Standard 223 4AX or 243 Galvanic isolation TTY signals are isolated Memory submodule EPROM / EEPROM Serial interface V.24 / TTY passive (active) Transmission asynchronous 7-bit frame 10-bit character frame/ 11-bit character frame Transmission rate 9-68 110 to 9600 baud Permissible cable length V.24 TTY 15 m Results from: (Voltage drop on cable) + (Receiver-typ. voltage drop 1.5 V) or (transmitter-typ. voltage drop 0.9 V) (max. 1000 m) LED displays TxD (green) RxD (green) RTS (green) BATT (yellow) Transmitting Receiving Ready to send Battery failure Back-up battery Lithium 1/2 AA 3.6 V / 850 mAh Current consumption from +9 V typ. 140 mA Power loss of module typ. 1.2 W Weight approx. 500 g (1.1 lb) ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Function Modules The CP 521 SI (Serial Interface) communications module is a powerful I/O module with its own central processor. A separate manual is available for this module. It can be ordered under the order number 6ES5 998-1UD11. The following is an overview of the module's mode of operation. Function The CP 521 SI can be used for unidirectional and bidirectional data exchange. Unidirectional Data Exchange For unidirectional data traffic, the CP 521 SI is provided with a printer driver. If the printer driver is used, the following must be connected to the serial interface of the CP 521 SI: A printer with TTY interface (active) or A printer with V.24 (RS 232C) interface. This enables you to log process states and process disturbances. The output of messages on the printer does not extend the response time of the programmable controller. The following messages and texts can be output: Message texts, which you have configured on a memory submodule in data blocks DB 2 to 63. Time of day and date, which are provided by the module's own clock Values for variables which are transmitted to the CP 521 SI via the I/O bus. The message texts are stored on an EPROM or EEPROM memory submodule (up to 8/16 Kbytes). Bidirectional Data Exchange The following drivers are implemented for the bidirectional data exchange: ASCII driver, transparent ASCII driver, interpreting "3964(R)" driver SINEC L1 driver, master (point-to-point link) SINEC L1 driver, slave Terminal driver The use of these drivers enables the transmission of data frames between the CPU and an I/O device connected to the CP 521 SI. The maximum data flow rate is 6 bytes of user data per 2 program cycles; i.e. at a program cycle time of, for example, 50 ms a maximum of 60 bytes per second can be transmitted. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b 9-69 Function Modules The following terminals and communications devices can be used as I/O devices: Keyboard Terminal Another CP 521 SI CP 523 CP 524/CP 525-2 (in connection with special driver 6ES5 897-2AB11) CPU 944 (with ASCII driver, 3964(R) driver) Other I/O devices with serial interface, e.g. bar code readers Which of the I/O devices and transmission modes are used depends on the intended application of data transmission. In the bidirectional data exchange mode of the module you are, for example, able to network programmable controllers (point-to-point link). I/O device and CP 521 SI are connected with each other via a serial interface. Either a passive TTY interface or a V.24 voltage interface are available (programmable). Parameterizing (matching) of the I/O interface and configuring of the message texts are supported by the DB editor of the programmers. The parameters of the I/O interface are stored either on the memory submodule in DB1 or are directly transmitted in the user program. The CP 521 SI can be programmed and operated without the COM software. Integrated Real- Time Clock The CP 521 SI has its own real-time clock which is battery-backed when the module is in the de-energized state. Independent of the type of function selected for the CP 521 SI, the clock data can be read from the CPU and can be used in the user program for date and time-dependent tasks. Installation As other I/O modules, the CP 521 BASIC is mounted on the bus unit. The module can be plugged in only at slots 0 to 7. The module has no connection to the terminal block. The printer is connected to the module with a 25-pin sub D connector. Addressing 9-70 The CP 521 BASIC is addressed like a 4-channel analog module. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Safety-Related Guidelines A A.1 Active and Passive Faults in Automation Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedures for Maintenance and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 A-2 A.2 Suggestions for Configuring and Installing a Programmable Controller . . A-3 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Safety-Related Guidelines A The following guidelines must be observed to prevent personal injuries and damage to the product described or the devices connected. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b A-1 Safety-Related Guidelines A.1 Active and Passive Faults in Automation Equipment Depending on the particular task for which the electronic automation equipment is used, both active as well as passive faults can result in a dangerous situation. For example, in drive control, an active fault is generally dangerous because it can result in an unauthorized start-up of the drive. On the other hand, a passive fault in a signalling function can result in a dangerous operating state not being reported to the operator. The differentiation of the possible faults and their classification into dangerous and non-dangerous faults, depending on the particular task, is important for all safety considerations in respect to the product supplied. ! Procedures for Maintenance and Repair Warning In all cases where a fault in automation equipment can result in severe personal injury or substantial property damage, i.e., where a dangerous fault can occur, additional external measures must be taken or equipment provided to ensure or force safe operating conditions even in the event of a fault (e.g., by means of independent limit monitors, mechanical interlocks, etc.). If you are carrying out measurement or testing work on an ET200U distributed I/O station, you must adhere to the rules and regulations contained in the "VBG 4.0 Accident Prevention Regulations" of the German employers liability assurance association ("Berufsgenossenschaften"). Pay particular attention to paragraph 8, "Permissible exceptions when working on live parts." Repairs may only be carried out by Siemens service personnel or repair shops Siemens has authorized to carry out such repairs. A-2 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Safety-Related Guidelines A.2 Suggestions for Configuring and Installing a Programmable Controller A programmable controller is often used as a component in a larger system. The suggestions contained in the following warning are intended to help you install your programmable controller safely. ! Warning Adhere to any safety and accident-prevention regulations applicable to your situation and system. If your system has a permanent power connection (stationary equipment) that is not equipped with an isolating switch and/or fuses that disconnect all poles, install either a suitable isolating switch or fuses in the building wiring system. Connect your system to a ground conductor. Before start-up, if you have units that operate using the main power supply, make sure that the voltage range setting on the equipment matches the local main power voltage. When using a 24 V supply, make sure to provide proper electric isolation between the main supply and the 24 V supply. Use only power supplies manufactured according to IEC 364-4-41 or HD 384.04.41 (VDE 0100, part 410). Fluctuations or deviations of the supply voltage from the rated value may not exceed the tolerance limit specified in the technical specifications. If they do, functional failures or dangerous conditions can occur in the electronic modules or equipment. Take suitable measures to make sure that programs that are interrupted by a voltage dip or power failure resume proper operation when the power is restored. Make sure that dangerous operating conditions do not occur even momentarily. If necessary, force an EMERGENCY OFF. EMERGENCY OFF devices must be in accordance with EN 60204/ IEC 204 (VDE0113) and be effective in all operating modes of the equipment. Make certain to prevent any uncontrolled or undefined restart when the EMERGENCYOFF devices are released. Install power supply and signal cables so that inductive and capacitive interference cannot affect the automation functions. Install your automation system and its operative components so as to prevent unintentional operation. Automation equipment can assume an undefined state in the case of a wire break in the signal lines. To prevent this, take the proper hardware and software safety measures when linking the inputs and outputs of the automation equipment. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b A-3 Safety-Related Guidelines A-4 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b B Glossary A Access mode There are two access modes: read and write access Active nodes Can transmit data to other nodes or request data from other nodes when they have a permission to send (= master station). Address identifier Combination of letters/digits identifying an ET 200U I/O module in COM ET 200. Arc suppression element Components for reducing induced voltages. Induced voltages occur when inductive circuits are de-energized. Array A set of elements of the same type. In the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), for example, multi-channel analog modules are assigned the object code "array". B Baud rate Data transmission speed: specifies the number of bits transmitted per second (baud rate = bit rate) Bus Common transmission path for all nodes connected; with defined termination points. Bus connector Physical interface between node and bus cable. Bus node Device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, e.g. master station, slave station, repeater, active star hub, etc. Bus segment Segment C Chassis Chassis defines the entire range of interconnected dead inactive parts of a device that are not subject to any dangerous touch voltages, even in the case of a fault. Communication link A communications link forms a logical interface between two bus nodes. Their relationships are defined in the list of communications links. Communication reference A communications link is established between two stations which need to exchange data. Each station is therefore assigned at least one communications link. These relationships are identified by numbers (so- called communications references). A communications reference is equivalent to an "internal address" of the station in layer 7. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b B-1 Glossary Control command A DP master can send commands to one slave station, a group of slave stations or to all slave stations in order to synchronize the slave stations. The FREEZE and SYNC control commands are used to synchronize slave stations event-driven. The ET 200U(DP Standard) slave station responds to the FREEZE and SYNC control commands. CP 5410 S5-DOS/ST Programmer interface module for connection to SINEC L2 and SINEC L2-DP. D Diagnostics Detection, location, classification, display, additional evaluation of errors, faults and messages. Diagnostics includes monitoring functions that are automatically executed during normal operation. Application: Increasing the availability of a sytem/plant by cutting start-up and idle times. DIN 19245, Part 1 German process and fieldbus standard. Part 1 specifies the bus access and transmission protocol and defines the required transmission technique. DIN 19245, Part 3 PROFIBUS-DP Distributed I/O Comprises the input/output modules connected in a distributed configuration, i.e. at a distance from the CPU. The ET 200 is the distributed I/O of the SIMATIC range. It includes the following distributed I/O systems: ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200U or third-party systems. Distributed I/O station Distributed I/O DP Standard DP Standard is the bus protocol of the ET 200 distributed I/O system, based on the DIN 19245, Part 3 draft standard. DP Siemens DP Siemens is the bus protocol developed by Siemens. In cooperation with the PROFIBUS User Organization, the bus protocol has been extended to an open multi-vendor system. This extended bus protocol has been filed with the German Electrotechnical Commission (DKE) and accepted as national draft standard DIN 19245, Part 3 ( DP Standard ). E Earth The conductive soil where the potential at all points can be assumed equal to zero. Earthing Connecting an electrically conductive part to the earthing electrode via the earthing system. Earthing electrode One or more conductive part(s) that make good contact with the earth. B-2 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Glossary ET 200 Bus for connecting the distributed I/O to the S5-115U ... S5-155U programmable controllers or any other adequate master. The ET 200 is characterized by fast response times since only small data volumes (bytes) are transferred. The ET 200 is based on the PROFIBUS standard (DIN 19245/part 1) and the PROFIBUS-DP draft standard (DIN E 19245/Part 3). The ET 200 operates according to the master-slave principle. The IM 308-B master interface module or any host incorporating the CP 5480-DP can be master. The ET 200B, ET 200C or ET 200U distributed I/O systems can be configured as slaves. Distributed I/O systems including an SPM module can also be connected. Event An important message which the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), for example, sends to the FMS master. F Field devices All devices outside the switchgear room installed in the field, i.e. where the sensors and actuators are. Floating In floating I/O modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuits are electrically isolated, e.g. via optical couplers, relay contacts or line transformers. Input and output circuits can be grouped. Do not confuse with "isolated". FMS Fieldbus Message Specification, DIN 19245, Part 2. FMS service FMS services are used by the FMS master to process the "ET 200U(FMS)" object. There are FMS services which require acknowledgement and those which need not be acknowledged. For an FMS service requiring acknowledgement (e.g. MSAZ), the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) acknowledges the receipt of an FMS service to the FMS master. If an FMS service need not be acknowledged (e.g. multicast and broadcast), the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) sends no acknowledgement to the FMS master. FMS master The term FMS master defines a master acting in accordance with the PROFIBUS standard, DIN 19245, Parts 1 and 2. FMS slave The term FMS slave defines a slave acting in accordance with the PROFIBUS standard, DIN 19245, Parts 1 and 2. FREEZE is a control command. Using this control command, the DP master can "freeze" the input statuses to their actual value. The input data are updated again only when the DP master once more sends the FREEZE control command. I Indication An indication is used to mark a request (.ind). Inherently short-circuit proof Equipment is inherently short-circuit proof if a short-circuit is not likely to occur under certain operating conditions if suitable measures are taken. Insulation monitoring Circuit for monitoring the insulation resistance of a plant. I/O bus Bus which links the I/O modules to the CPU or IM 308-B interface module. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b B-3 Glossary I/O bus speed The speed of the I/O bus is selectable. Certain modules, i.e. the IP 265 have to be operated at a lower I/O bus speed (slow mode). The speed can be set on the IM 318-B interface module. IP 20 Degree of protection to DIN 40050: Protection against contact with live or moving parts by fingers or against ingress of solid foreign bodies of diameters greater than 12 mm. Isolated In isolated I/O modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuits are electrically isolated. The input and output circuits are not "grouped", i.e. the input and output cicuits are not connected to a common potential (so-called group of one). Do not confuse with "floating". K KBL List of communication links KR Communication reference L Length Length of a data type List of communication links The list of communication links (KBL) contains the configuring data of the bus nodes concerned. The list of communication links for the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) describes seven relationships. Load power supply For supplying power to the I/O modules Loop resistance Overall resistance of the outgoing and return conductors. M Master interface module Module for distributed configurations. The IM 308-B master interface module is used for "connecting" the distributed I/O to the programmable controller. Master-slave access method Bus access method providing for only one active node while all other nodes are passive. N NCM SINEC NCM (Network and Communication Management) is a software tool for configuring the CP 5431 FMS as an FMS master. Non-floating In non-floating I/O modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuits are electrically interconnected. O Object Each FMS bus node is addressed via objects. The data area and data structure are defined in an object. Object code The object code describes the structure of an object. In the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), objects of the type Simple-Variable, Array and Event are used. B-4 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Glossary Object list Data communications on the bus cannot commence unless the FMS master is informed of the stations involved and their significance and structure. This information is contained in the object list (OV). The object list of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) contains the following: Input and output values of the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) Diagnostics data Parameter data. Octet Octet is a general expression for one byte. OV Object list P Page addressing Multiplying of address range Passive nodes They may exchange data with an active node only after being requested to do so by the active node (= slave station). PDU Protocol Data Unit PII Process image PIQ Process image Process image An "image" of the input states (= PII) or output states (= PIQ) at a specified point of time. The process image can be accessed by the PLC program. PROFIBUS PROcess FIeld BUS, German process and field bus standard defined in the PROFIBUS standard (DIN 19245). It specifies functional, electrical and mechanical characteristics for a bit-serial field bus system. PROFIBUS-DP PROFIBUS-DP draft standard (DIN 19245, Part 3) on which the ET 200 distributed I/O system is based. The major task of PROFIBUS-DP is the fast cyclic data exchange between the central master stations and the I/O devices. Protective conductor A conductor required for protective measures against shock currents. It is symbolized by PE. Protocol Data Unit A protocol data unit (PDU) contains the information to be exchanged between two bus nodes. In the PROFIBUS specification, this means a message exchanged, for example, between the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) and the FMS master. The maximum length of a protocol data unit is specified in the list of communications links. R Reference earth Earth Reference potential Potential to which the voltages of the circuits involved are referred, or with reference to which they are measured. Repeater Device for amplifying bus signals and interfacing segments for covering long distances. ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b B-5 Glossary Repeater adapter Device for a mixed configuration of RS 485 and optical-fiber conductor transmission hardware. Request A request of the FMS master (.req) Response time Period between an edge at the input and the programmed output signal change. S SAP Service Access Point Screen impedance AC resistance of the cable screen. The screen impedance is a characteristic of the cable and is generally specified by the manufacturer. Segment The bus line between two terminating resistors constitutes a segment. A segment includes 0 to 32 nodes. Segments can be linked via repeaters. Sensors/actuators profile The PROFIBUS standard, DIN 19245, Parts 1 and 2 covers a wide range of applications. In a specialized environment, however, such as the field level, only a limited scope of functions is required. For this reason, the sensors/actuators profile has been created. It defines the lower field level and the measuring technology used. The ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) is based on the sensors/actuators profile. Service Access Point The services available in a layer can be accessed by the (next) higher layer via a service access point. It represents a logical interface for the exchange of protocol data units. Short circuit Caused by a fault; it conductively connects conductors that are energized in normal operation if no resistance is inserted in the faulty circuit. Short circuit proof Equipment is short-circuit proof if it withstands the thermal and dynamic effects of the maximum permissible short-circuit current at a location. Simple-Variable Objects of the "Simple-Variable" type cannot be divided up further. In the ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), e.g. digital modules and single- channel analog modules have a "Simple-Variable" object code. SINEC L2 LAN that interfaces PROFIBUS-compatible programmable controllers and field devices both at the cell and field levels. SINEC L2-DP SINEC L2 LAN with DP protocol. DP denotes the distributed I/O. Slave initiation When the slave has received a send request from the FMS master, it can send an FMS service to the FMS master without any further initiation. The ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), for example, informs the FMS master of the change of a diagnostics message without any external inititation. SPM module An SPM module can be used for interfacing the distributed I/O with the SINEC L2-DP bus. The module incorporates an SPM (SIEMENS PROFIBUS Multiplexer) which generates all the bus messages. Static object list The static object list is an integral part of the tic object list describes the individual objects. B-6 object list. The sta- ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Glossary Station number Each ET 200 node must be assigned a station number. The programmer or ET 200 handheld unit are addressed by means of station number "0"; A master has either station number "1" or "2"; The station numbers for the slave stations are in the range from 3 to 124. Exception: The ET 200B is assigned a station number in the range from 3 to 99. Subindex Access index for an element of an array. SYNC is a control command. Using this control command, the DP master can "freeze" the outputs to their actual value. The output data of the following frames are stored, but the output statuses are not changed. The outputs are updated again only when the DP master once more sends the SYNC control command. T Terminating resistor Resistance for matching to the impedance of a bus cable; terminating resistors are generally required for terminating cables or segments. U Ungrounded configuration ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Configuration without any electrical connection to ground. In most cases, the fault currents are discharged via an RC element. B-7 Glossary B-8 ET 200U Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Index Index Numbers 262-8MA12. See Closed-loop control module IP 262 262-8MB12. See Closed-loop control module IP 262 263-8MA11. See IP 263 Positioning module 264-8MA11. See Electronic cam controller module IP 264 265-8MA01. See IP 265 high speed sub control 266-8MA11. See IP 266 positioning module 267-8MA11. See IP 267 Stepper motor control module 315-8MA11. See Interface module IM 315 316-8MA12. See Interface modules IM 316 330-8MA11. See Diagnostic module 380-4AB01. See Stromversorgungsbaugruppe PS 2410 380-8MA11. See Timer module 2x0.3 to 300s 385-8MA11. See Counter module 2 x 0 to 500 Hz 385-8MB11. See Counter module 25/500 kHz 461-8MA11. See Comparator module 464-8MA11, analog input module, 7-14 464-8MA21, analog input module, 7-12, 7-14 464-8MB11, analog input module, 7-5 464-8MC11, analog input module, 7-5 464-8MD11, analog input module, 7-6 464-8MF21, analog input module, 7-15 466-8MC11, analog input module, 7-5, 7-23 521-8MA21. See CP 521 SI communications processor 521-8MB11. See CP 521 BASIC communications module 700-8MA11. See Bus unit (SIGUT) 700-8MA21. See Bus unit (Crimp-snap-in) 788-8MA11. See Simulator module 931-8MD11. See Power supply module PS 931 935-8ME11. See Power supply module PS 935 A Abort, 6-11 Access mode, B-1 ACI, 6-34 Acknowledge-Event-Notification, 6-12 Active node, B-1 Address, 1st available, 4-6, 4-7, 5-6, 5-7 ET 200 Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Address assignment using COM ET 200 ET 200U (DP Siemens), 4-3-4-16 ET 200U (DP Standard), 5-3-5-19 Address identifier, B-1 Address IDs ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-9-4-13 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-9-5-13 Address space, 1-3 Addressing, 9-42 with multi-tier configuration, 3-11 Addressing range, ET 200U, 3-1 Addressing with CPUs 941, 942, 943 and 944 ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-7-4-8 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-7-5-8 Alter-Event-Condition-Monitoring, 6-12 Analog input module 464-8MA11, 7-14 464-8MA21, 7-12, 7-14 464-8MB11, 7-5 464-8MC11, 7-5 464-8MD11, 7-6 464-8MF21, 7-15 466-8MC11, 7-5, 7-23 start-up, 7-11 Analog input modules, 7-2, 8-41 2 x PT 100 / +/-500 mV, 8-55 2 x PT 100 / +/-500 V, 8-53 4 x +/- 20 mA, 8-51 4 x +0 ... 10 V, 8-57 4x+/- 1 V, 8-45 4x+/- 20 mA, 8-49 4x+/- 50 mV, 8-41, 8-43 4x+/-10 V, 8-47 Analog output modules, 7-25, 8-59 2 x +/-10 V, 8-59 2 x +/-20 mA, 8-61 2 x 1 to 5 V, 8-65 2 x 4 to 20 V, 8-63 Analog value representation, 7-16 Arc suppression element, B-1 Area ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-6 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-6 Array, B-1 ATTR, 6-33 Index-1 Index B Baud rate, B-1 Bus, B-1 Bus connector, B-1 BUS FAULT LED, ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-29 "BUS-FAULT" LED, ET 200U(DP Standard/ FMS), 6-35 Bus modules installing, 3-5 number of modules which can be connected, 3-1 Bus node, B-1 Bus parameters for operation with the FMS protocol, 6-5 Bus protocol, 1-4 Bus segment, B-1 Bus unit, 8-12 bus unit (Crimp-snap-in), 8-13 technical specifications, 8-12, 8-13 Bus units bus unit (SIGUT), 8-12 remove, 3-8 C Cabinet installation, 3-9 CCI, 6-34 Chassis, B-1 Closed-loop control module IP 262, 9-44 addressing, 9-47 analog inputs, 9-44 analog outputs of the constant controller, 9-45 binary inputs, 9-45 binary output for the open-loop controller, 9-45 DDC operation, 9-47 function, 9-46 installation, 9-46 operating modes, 9-47 SPC operation, 9-47 technical specifications, 9-44 Index-2 Combi-slave mode of IM 318-C, 6-4 requirements for operating an IM 318-C, 6-5 with an IM 318-C, 6-3 Communication link, 6-30, B-1 Communication reference, 6-33, B-1 Communications conforming to PROFIBUS standard, Part 2, 6-10-6-34 Comparator module, 9-2 addressing, 9-3 function, 9-3 installation, 9-3 technical specifications, 9-2 typical application, 9-4 wiring, 9-3 Compensating box, 7-3 Configuration floating, 3-30 grounded, 3-26 nonfloating, 3-28 one tier, 3-3-3-11 ungrounded, 3-27 with power supply, 3-25 Configuring, 4-9, 5-9 ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-9 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-9 CONFIGURING screen ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-4 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-4 Connecting cable 712-8, 3-9 Connection current sensor, 7-3, 7-6 resistance termometer, 7-10 thermocouple, 7-5 transducer, 7-8 voltage sensor, 7-3, 7-5 Control command, B-2 CONTROL function ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-23 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-26 CONTROL with load circuit ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-23 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-27 ET 200 Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Index Counter module 25/500 kHz, 9-18 connection of a 24 V DC position sensor, 9-23 connection of a 5 V DC position sensor to RS 422A, 9-23 connection of a counting pulse sensor for 24 V DC, 9-22 connection of counting pulse sensors for a 5 V differential signal to RS 422A, 9-22 connection of pulse and position sensors, 9-21 counter mode, 9-28 data transmission, 9-26 disabling the counter, 9-29 enabling the counter, 9-28 function, 9-20 functional description of the position decoder, 9-31 initial setting, 9-28, 9-31 installing and removing the module, 9-21 installing/removing sensors, 9-21 loading setpoints, 9-28, 9-32 performance during overflow, 9-30 position resolution, 9-31 requirements of the sensors, 9-24 synchronization of actual value detection (reference point approach), 9-33 technical specifications, 9-18 terminal block, 9-25 Counter module 2x0 to 500 Hz, 9-13 addressing, 9-15 function, 9-15 installation, 9-15 technical specifications, 9-14 typical application, 9-17 wiring, 9-15 CP 521 BASIC communications module, 9-66 function, 9-67 technical specifications, 9-66 CP 521 SI communications processor, 9-68 function, 9-69 installation, 9-70 CP 5410-S5-DOS/ST, B-2 Crimp-snap-in connections, 3-13 Crimp-snap-in contacts, dismantling, 3-14 Crimp-snap-in terminals, 3-12 Current consumption, 3-1 Current sensor, connection, 7-3, 7-6 ET 200 Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b D Data throughput, 1-3 Degree of protection, 1-3 Degree to which a slave station can be expanded, 3-1 Diagnose problems using COM ET 200 ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-27-4-28 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-30-5-31 Diagnosing faults ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-25-4-36 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-28-5-40 Diagnosing faults with STEP 5 ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-29-4-36 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-32-5-40 Diagnostic module, 9-10 addressing, 9-12 CLEAR, 9-11 DATA/DATA-N, 9-11 function, 9-11 IDENT, 9-11 installation, 9-12 LATCH/CLOCK, 9-11 technical specifications, 9-10 wiring, 9-12 Diagnostics, B-2 Diagnostics data, "diagnostics data" object, 6-19-6-24 Diagnostics event, "Diagnostics event" object, 6-29-6-32 Diagnostics messages of ET 200U(DP Standard/ FMS), Station status, 6-20 Diagnostics messages of the ET 200U (DP Standard/FMS) "module diagnostics" header, 6-23 "station diagnostics" header, 6-22 DP master address, 6-21 manufacturer identification, 6-21 module diagnostics, 6-24 module diagnostics, 6-23 station diagnostics, 6-22 DIAGNOSTICS:OVERVIEW screen, ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-27, 5-30 Differences, between ET 200U(DP Standard), ET 200U(FMS), ET 200U in a mixed configuration and combi-slave, 6-6-6-8 Differences between the Various Modes of the IM 318-C, 6-6-6-8 Index-3 Index Digital input module, 8-16 4x24 V DC, 8-16 8x115 V AC, 8-23 8x230 V AC, 8-24 8x24 V DC, 8-17, 8-22 8x5 to 24 V DC, 8-25 Digital input modules 4x115 V AC, 8-20 4x230 V AC, 8-21 4x24 V to 60 V DC, 8-19 Digital input/output modules, 8-39 crimp snap-in connector, 40-pin, 8-39 crimp snap-in connector; 40-pin, 8-18 screw plug connector, 40-pin, 8-39 screw plug connector; 40-pin, 8-18 Digital modules, connecting, 3-16 Digital output module 4x 24 V DC / 2 A, 8-28 4x115 to 230 V AC / 1 A, 8-31 4x24 to 60 V DC / 0.5 A, 8-30 4x24 V DC / 0.5 A, 8-26 8x115 to 230 V AC / 0.5 A, 8-33 8x24 V DC / 1 A, 8-32 8x5 to 24 V DC / 0.1 A, 8-34 digital output module 4x24 V DC / 0.5 A, 8-29 relay output module 4x30 V DC / 230 V AC, 8-37 relay output module 8x30 V DC / 230 V AC, 8-35 DIN 19245 E, Part 3, 1-2 DIN 19245, Part 1, 1-2, 1-4, B-2 DIN 19245, Part 2, 1-5 DIN 19245, Part 3, 1-4 DIN E 19245, Part 3, B-2 Index-4 Dismantling, 3-2, 3-7 IM 318-B, 3-7 power supply, 3-7 Distributed I/O, B-2 Distributed I/O station, B-2 DP inputs, "DP inputs" object, 6-27 DP master address, ET 200U(DP Standard/ FMS), 6-21 DP outputs, "DP outputs" object, 6-28 DP Siemens, 1-3-1-8, 4-2, B-2 DP slave parameterization frame, ET 200U (DP Standard), 5-15-5-16 DP Standard, 1-3-1-8, 5-2, B-2 E Earth, B-2 Earthing, B-2 Earthing electrode, B-2 Electrical configuration, 3-23 Electronic cam controller module IP 264, technical specifications, 9-52 ET 200, 1-2, B-3 ET 200 in a mixed configuration, Requirements for operating an IM 318-C, 6-5 ET 200(DP Standard), with an IM 318-C, 6-2 ET 200(DP Standard/FMS), structure of diagnostics data, 6-19 ET 200U, 1-3 addressing range, 3-1 ET 200U (DP Siemens), address assignment using COM ET 200, 4-3-4-16 ET 200U (DP Standard), address assignment using COM ET 200, 5-3-5-19 ET 200 Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Index ET 200U (DP Standard/FMS), 6-1-6-42 ET 200U in a mixed configuration, Mode of the IM 318-C, 6-4 ET 200U interface module, 1-3 ET 200U(DP Siemens), 1-4-1-9, 4-1-4-36 "DIAGNOSTICS:OVERVIEW" screen, 4-27, 5-30 address IDs, 4-9-4-13 addressing with CPUs 941, 942, 943, 944, 4-7-4-8 area, 4-6 configuring, 4-9 CONFIGURING screen, 4-4 CONTROL function, 4-23 CONTROL with load circuit, 4-23 diagnose problems using COM ET 200, 4-27-4-28 diagnosing faults, 4-25-4-36 diagnosing faults with STEP 5, 4-29-4-36 I/O bus speed, 4-18-4-19 "INDIVIDUAL DIAGNOSTICS" screen, 4-28 manufacturer identification, 4-33 modifying an already configured slave station, 4-16 modifying the configuration at a later point, 4-15-4-17 module address, 4-14 module diagnostics, 4-35, 5-38 next available address, 4-7 requirements for operation, 4-2 setting the station number, 4-18-4-19 slow mode, 4-18 start-up, 4-17-4-24 station diagnostics, 4-34 station number area, 4-5 station status, 4-31 station type, 4-6 STATUS function, 4-23 structure of diagnostics, 4-30 SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: STATUS/ CONTROL screen, 4-22 SYSTEM START-UP/TEST:MODULE SELECTION screen, 4-21 test, 4-17-4-24 using LEDs to diagnose problems, 4-26 ET 200 Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b ET 200U(DP Standard), 1-4-1-9, 5-1-5-40 "SYSTEM START-UP/TEST:MODULE SELECTION" screen, 5-24 address IDs, 5-9-5-13 addressing with CPUs 941, 942, 943, 944, 5-7-5-8 area, 5-6 BUS FAULT LED, 5-29 configuring, 5-9 CONFIGURING screen, 5-4 CONTROL function, 5-26 CONTROL with load circuit, 5-27 diagnose problems using COM ET 200, 5-30-5-31 diagnosing faults, 5-28-5-40 diagnosing faults with STEP 5, 5-32-5-40 diagnostics messages, 5-25 DP slave parameterization frame, 5-15 I/O bus speed, 5-21-5-22 IM FAULT LED, 5-29 INDIVIDUAL DIAGNOSTICS screen, 5-31 manufacturer identification, 5-36 mode of the IM 318-C, 6-4 modifying an already configured slave station, 5-19 modifying the configuration at a later point, 5-18-5-20 module address, 5-14 next available address, 5-7 parameterization frame, 5-15-5-16 requirements for operating an IM 318-C, 6-5 requirements for operation, 5-2 RUN LED, 5-29 setting the station number, 5-21-5-22 start-up, 5-20-5-27 station diagnostics, 5-37 station number area, 5-5 station status, 5-34 station type, 5-6 STATUS function, 5-26 structure of diagnostics, 5-33 SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: STATUS/ CONTROL screen, 5-25 test, 5-20-5-27 using LEDs to diagnose problems, 5-29 Index-5 Index ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) "BUS-FAULT" LED, 6-35 "IM-FAULT" LED, 6-35 "RUN" LED, 6-35 ET 200U(FMS), 6-1, 6-2 coding the I/O Modules, 6-15-6-19 mode of the IM 318-C, 6-4 requirements for operating an IM 318-C, 6-5 Event, B-3 Event-Notification, 6-12 Example, of programming a link between an ET 200U(FMS) and a CP 5431 FMS, 6-36-6-42 Expanding several tiers, 3-9 slave station, already configured, 4-15, 5-18 Expanding at a later point, slave station, 4-15, 5-18 Extraction tool, 3-14 F Features supported, 6-34 Field device, B-3 Floating, B-3 FMS, 1-5, 6-1-6-42, B-3 FMS inputs, "FMS inputs" object, 6-27 FMS master, B-3 FMS outputs, "FMS outputs" object, 6-28 FMS service, 6-11-6-12, B-3 Abort, 6-11 Acknowledge-Event-Notification, 6-12 Alter-Event-Condition-Monitoring, 6-12 Event-Notification, 6-12 Get-OV, 6-12 Identify, 6-12 Initiate, 6-11 Read, 6-12 Reject, 6-11 Status, 6-12 Write, 6-12 FMS slave, B-3 FREEZE, B-3 Function, CONTROL, 4-23, 5-26 G H Hardware, replacing, 3-2 Heat dissipation, 3-9 I I/O bus, B-3 I/O bus speed, B-4 I/O module installing, 3-6 plugging under load voltage, 3-2 pulling under load voltage, 3-2 remove, 3-7 swinging out, 3-7 I/O modules, Coding for the ET 200U(FMS), 6-15-6-19 Identify, 6-12 IM 315, 3-9 IM 316, 3-9 IM 318-B, 2-2 connecting to a PS 931 power supply module, 3-15 connecting to a PS 935 power supply module, 3-15 IM 318-B interface module, 8-3 technical specifications, 8-4 IM 318-C, 6-1-6-42 Bus parameters for operation with the FMS protocol, 6-5 Combi-slave, 6-3 ET 200U with mixed configuration, 6-2 ET 200U(DP Standard), 6-2 ET 200U(FMS), 6-2 Modes, 6-2-6-7 Requirements for operating an IM 318-C, 6-5 Set station number, 6-8 Set switch 8, 6-8 Settings, 6-8 IM-FAULT LED, ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-29 "IM-FAULT" LED, ET 200U(DP Standard/ FMS), 6-35 Index in the static object list, 6-13 of a slot, 6-13 Indication, B-3 General electrical configuration, 3-23 Get-OV, 6-12 Index-6 ET 200 Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Index INDIVIDUAL DIAGNOSTICS screen ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-28 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-31 Inherently short-circuit proof, B-3 Initiate, 6-11 Input, "Input" object, 6-14-6-18 Input module, connecting, 3-17 Input modules, connecting, 3-19 Input/output module, connecting, 3-21 Installing, 3-2, 3-3 Insulation monitoring, B-3 Interface modules, 8-14 interface module IM 315, 8-14 interface module IM 316, 8-15 technical specifications, 8-14, 8-15 Interference immunity, 3-9 IP 20, 1-3, B-4 IP 263 positioning module, technical specifications, 9-48 IP 265 high speed sub control, technical specifications, 9-55 IP 266 positioning module, 9-58 analog output, 9-58 installation, 9-62 operating modes, 9-60, 9-62 operation principle, 9-60 positioning, 9-61 pulse input, 9-58 technical specifications, 9-58 IP 267 stepper motor control module, 9-63 installation, 9-65 LEDs, 9-65 operation principle, 9-64 technical specifications, 9-63 Isolated, B-4 K L LED "BUS FAULT", 2-2 "IM FAULT", 2-2 "RUN", 2-2 Length, B-4 Link attribute, 6-33 List of communication links, 6-30-6-36, B-4 Load power supply, 3-23, B-4 Local LSAP, 6-33 Loop resistance, B-4 M Manufacturer identification, 4-33, 5-36 ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-33 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-36 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), 6-21 Master interface module, B-4 Master-slave access method, B-4 Max. PDU Size, 6-34 Modes of the IM 318-C, 6-2 Modifying an already configured slave station ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-19 ET 200U(DPSiemens), 4-16 Modifying the configuration at a later point ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-15-4-17 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-18-5-20 Module, comparator, 9-2 Module address ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-14 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-14 Module diagnostics, 4-35, 4-36, 5-38, 5-39 "Module diagnostics" header, ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), 6-23 ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-35, 5-38 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), 6-23, 6-24 KBL. See List of communication links KR. See Communication reference ET 200 Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Index-7 Index Multi-tier configuration addressing, 3-11 in a cabinet, 3-10 with a row of devices, 3-10 N NCM, B-4 Next available address ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-7 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-7 Non-floating, B-4 Numbering, with multi-tier configuration, 3-11 O Object, B-4 "diagnostics data", 6-19-6-24 diagnostics message, 6-19 "diagnostics event", 6-29-6-32 "DP inputs", 6-27 "DP outputs", 6-28 "FMS inputs", 6-27 "FMS outputs", 6-28 "Input" or "output" (slot), 6-14-6-18 "parameter data", 6-25-6-26 Object code, B-4 Object list, 6-13-6-29, B-5 static object list, 6-13 structure, 6-13 Octet, B-5 Operating mode, 7-11, 7-12, 7-15 Output, "Output" object, 6-14-6-18 Output modules, connecting, 3-18, 3-20 OV. See Object list P Page addressing, B-5 Parameter data, "Parameter data" object, 6-25-6-26 Parameterization frame, ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-15 Parameters ET 200U (DP Standard/FMS), result when removing or inserting I/O modules, 6-26 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS) evaluating the diagnostics data of modules with diagnostics capability, 6-26 I/O bus speed, 6-26 Index-8 mode of the IM 318-C, 6-26 evaluation of diagnostics data, 5-16 I/O bus speed, 5-16 result when pulling or plugging-in modules, 5-16 Passive node, B-5 PDU, B-5 PDU Size, 6-34 PII, B-5 PIQ, B-5 Power supply, 3-23 configuration, 3-25 Power supply module, 8-6 PS 2410, 8-9 PS 931, 8-6 PS 935, 8-8 Power supply module PS 931, technical specifications, 8-6 Power supply module PS 935, technical specifications, 8-8 Power supply unit, switch-moded, 3-23 Process image, B-5 PROFIBUS, 1-2, 1-4, 6-1-6-42, B-5 PROFIBUS, Part 2, Communications, 6-10-6-34 PROFIBUS-DP, 1-2, 1-4, B-5 PROFIBUS-FMS, 1-5 Programming a link between an ET 200U(FMS) and a CP 5431 FMS, Example, 6-36-6-42 Protective conductor, B-5 Protocol Data Unit, B-5 PS 2410 power supply module, technical specifications, 8-10 PS 931 power supply module, 3-23 connecting to the main power, 3-15 installing, 3-4 PS 935 power supply module, 3-23 connecting to the main power, 3-15 installing, 3-4 R RAC, 6-33 RADR, 6-33 RCC, 6-33 Read, 6-12 Reference earth, B-5 Reference potential, B-5 Reject, 6-11 Remote Address, 6-33 Remote SAP, 6-33 ET 200 Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Index Repeater, B-5 Repeater adapter, B-6 Request, B-6 Resistance thermometer, connection, 7-10 Response time, B-6 RSAP, 6-33 "RUN" LED, ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-29 "RUN" LED, ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), 6-35 S SAC, 6-33 SAP, B-6 SCC, 6-33 Screen, "CONFIGURING", 4-6, 5-6 Screen impedance, B-6 Segment, B-6 Sensors/actuators profile, B-6 Service. See FMS service Service Access Point, B-6 Set station number, IM 318-C, 6-8 Set switch 8, IM 318-C, 6-8 Setting the station number ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-18-4-19 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-21-5-22 Short circuit, B-6 Short circuit proof, B-6 SIGUT screw type connections, 3-12 Simple-Variable, B-6 Simulator module addressing, 9-9 function, 9-9 installation, 9-9 technical specifications, 9-8 typical application, 9-9 wiring, 9-9 SINEC L2, B-6 SINEC L2-DP, 1-2, 3-1, B-6 Slave initiation, B-6 Slave station, expanding at a later point, 4-15, 5-18 Slave station, already configured, expanding, 4-15, 5-18 Slot, "Input" or "Output" object (slot), 6-14-6-18 Slot numbering, 3-11 Slow Mode, 5-21 Slow mode, ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-18 ET 200 Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Speed of I/O bus ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-18-4-19 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-21-5-22 SPM module, B-6 Standard draft, 1-2, 1-4 Start-up analog input module, 7-11 ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-17-4-24 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-20-5-27 Static object list, 6-13, B-6 Station diagnostics, 4-30, 4-34, 5-33, 5-37 ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-34 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-37 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), 6-22 "Station diagnostics" header, ET 200U (DP Standard/FMS), 6-22 Station number, B-7 Station number area ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-5 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-5 Station number label, 2-2 Station status, 4-31, 5-34 ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-31 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-34 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), 6-20 Status, 6-12 STATUS function ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-23 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-26 Stop/RUN switch, 2-2 Structure of diagnostics ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-30 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-33 Structure of diagnostics data, ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), 6-19 Structure of the object list, 6-13 Subindex, B-7 Switch, "operating mode", 7-11, 7-12, 7-15 Switch 8, 2-2 SYNC, B-7 SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: MODULE SELECTION screen ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-21 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-24 SYSTEM START-UP/TEST: STATUS/ CONTROL screen ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-25 ET 200U(DP-Siemens), 4-22 Index-9 Index T U Technical specifications, general, 8-2 Terminating resistor, B-7 Test ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-17-4-24 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-20-5-27 Thermocouple, connection, 7-5 Tiers, 3-9 Timer module, 9-5 addressing, 9-6 function, 9-6 installation, 9-6 technical specifications, 9-5 typical application, 9-7 wiring, 9-6 Transducer, connection, 7-8 Two-wire transducer, 7-3, 7-7 Type, 6-33 Type of link, 6-33 BRCT, 6-33 MSAZ, 6-33 MSAZ_SI, 6-33 MSZY, 6-33 MSZY_SI, 6-33 MULT, 6-33 Ungrounded configuration, B-7 Using LEDs to diagnose problems ET 200U(DP Siemens), 4-26 ET 200U(DP Standard), 5-29 ET 200U(DP Standard/FMS), 6-35 Index-10 V Voltage potentials in floating, 3-28 Voltage sensor, connection, 7-3, 7-5 W Wiring, 3-12 Wiring methods, 3-12 Write, 6-12 ET 200 Distributed I/O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6087-02b Sender (Please fill out) Siemens AG AUT 125 Documentation P.O. Box 1963 Name D-92209 Amberg Federal Republic of Germany Company/Department Address Suggestions: Corrections: ET 200U Distributed I/O Station Edition 3 (6ES5 998-5ET21) Telephone / Have you found any typographical errors while reading this manual? Please use this form to tell us about them. We would also welcome any ideas and suggestions you may have.